MATHEMATICS

Textbook for Class XII

PART I
MATHEMATICS
Textbook for Class XII
PART I
 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
q No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise
without the prior permission of the publisher.
q This book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by
way of trade, be lent, re-sold, hired out or otherwise disposed
of without the publisher’s consent, in any form of binding or
cover other than that in which it is published.
q The correct price of this publication is the price printed on
this page, Any revised price indicated by a rubber stamp or
by a sticker or by any other means is incorrect and should be
unacceptable.

OFFICES OF THE PUBLICATION

DIVISION, NCERT

`
 Foreword

The National Curriculum Framework, 2005, recommends that children’s life at school
must be linked to their life outside the school. This principle marks a departure from
the legacy of bookish learning which continues to shape our system and causes a gap
between the school, home and community. The syllabi and textbooks developed on
the basis of NCF signify an attempt to implement this basic idea. They also attempt to
discourage rote learning and the maintenance of sharp boundaries between different
subject areas. We hope these measures will take us significantly further in the direction
of a child-centred system of education outlined in the National Policy on Education
(1986).
The success of this effort depends on the steps that school principals and teachers
will take to encourage children to reflect on their own learning and to pursue imaginative
activities and questions. We must recognise that, given space, time and freedom,
children generate new knowledge by engaging with the information passed on to them
by adults. Treating the prescribed textbook as the sole basis of examination is one of
the key reasons why other resources and sites of learning are ignored. Inculcating
creativity and initiative is possible if we perceive and treat children as participants in
learning, not as receivers of a fixed body of knowledge.
These aims imply considerable change in school routines and mode of functioning.
Flexibility in the daily time-table is as necessary as rigour in implementing the annual
calendar so that the required number of teaching days are actually devoted to teaching.
The methods used for teaching and evaluation will also determine how effective this
textbook proves for making children’s life at school a happy experience, rather than a
source of stress or boredom. Syllabus designers have tried to address the problem of
curricular burden by restructuring and reorienting knowledge at different stages with
greater consideration for child psychology and the time available for teaching. The
textbook attempts to enhance this endeavour by giving higher priority and space to
opportunities for contemplation and wondering, discussion in small groups, and
activities requiring hands-on experience.
 vi

NCERT appreciates the hard work done by the textbook development committee
responsible for this book. We wish to thank the Chairperson of the advisory group in
Science and Mathematics, Professor J.V. Narlikar and the Chief Advisor for this book,
Professor P.K. Jain for guiding the work of this committee. Several teachers contributed
to the development of this textbook; we are grateful to their principals for making this
possible. We are indebted to the institutions and organisations which have generously
permitted us to draw upon their resources, material and personnel. As an organisation
committed to systemic reform and continuous improvement in the quality of its
products, NCERT welcomes comments and suggestions which will enable us to
undertake further revision and refinement.

Director
New Delhi National Council of Educational
20 December 2005 Research and Training
 Preface
The National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) had constituted
21 Focus Groups on Teaching of various subjects related to School Education, to
review the National Curriculum Framework for School Education - 2000 (NCFSE -
2000) in face of new emerging challenges and transformations occurring in the fields
of content and pedagogy under the contexts of National and International spectrum of
school education. These Focus Groups made general and specific comments in their
respective areas. Consequently, based on these reports of Focus Groups, National
Curriculum Framework (NCF)-2005 was developed.
NCERT designed the new syllabi and constituted Textbook Development Teams
for Classes XI and XII to prepare textbooks in mathematics under the new guidelines
and new syllabi. The textbook for Class XI is already in use, which was brought in
2005.
The first draft of the present book (Class XII) was prepared by the team consisting of
NCERT faculty, experts and practicing teachers. The draft was refined by the
development team in different meetings. This draft of the book was exposed to a
group of practicing teachers teaching mathematics at higher secondary stage in different
parts of the country, in a review workshop organised by the NCERT at Delhi. The
teachers made useful comments and suggestions which were incorporated in the draft
textbook. The draft textbook was finalised by an editorial board constituted out of
the development team. Finally, the Advisory Group in Science and Mathematics and
the Monitoring Committee constituted by the HRD Ministry, Government of India
have approved the draft of the textbook.
In the fitness of things, let us cite some of the essential features dominating the
textbook. These characteristics have reflections in almost all the chapters. The existing
textbook contain 13 main chapters and two appendices. Each Chapter contain the
followings:
§ Introduction: Highlighting the importance of the topic; connection with earlier
studied topics; brief mention about the new concepts to be discussed in the
chapter.
§ Organisation of chapter into sections comprising one or more concepts/sub
concepts.
§ Motivating and introducing the concepts/sub concepts. Illustrations have been
provided wherever possible.
 viii

§ Proofs/problem solving involving deductive or inductive reasoning, multiplicity

of approaches wherever possible have been inducted.
§ Geometric viewing /visualisation of concepts have been emphasised whenever
needed.
§ Applications of mathematical concepts have also been integrated with allied
subjects like science and social sciences.
§ Adequate and variety of examples/exercises have been given in each section.
§ For refocusing and strengthening the understanding and skill of problem solving
and applicabilities, miscellaneous types of examples/exercises have been
provided involving two or more sub concepts at a time at the end of the chapter.
The scope of challenging problems to talented minority have been reflected
conducive to the recommendation as reflected in NCF-2005.
§ For more motivational purpose, brief historical background of topics have been
provided at the end of the chapter and at the beginning of each chapter relevant
quotation and photograph of eminent mathematician who have contributed
significantly in the development of the topic undertaken, are also provided.
§ Lastly, for direct recapitulation of main concepts, formulas and results, brief
summary of the chapter has also been provided.
I am thankful to Professor Krishan Kumar, Director, NCERT who constituted the
team and invited me to join this national endeavor for the improvement of mathematics
education. He has provided us with an enlightened perspective and a very conducive
environment. This made the task of preparing the book much more enjoyable and
rewarding. I express my gratitude to Professor J. V. Narlikar, Chairperson of the
Advisory Group in Science and Mathematics, for his specific suggestions and advice
towards the improvement of the book from time to time. I, also, thank Prof. G. Ravindra,
Joint Director, NCERT for his help from time to time.
I express my sincere thanks to Professor Hukum Singh, Chief Coordinator and
Head DESM, Dr. V. P. Singh, Coordinator and Professor S. K. Singh Gautam who
have been helping for the success of this project academically as well as
administratively. Also, I would like to place on records my appreciation and thanks to
all the members of the team and the teachers who have been associated with this
noble cause in one or the other form.

PAWAN K. J AIN
Chief Advisor
Textbook Development Committee
 Textbook Development Committee

CHAIRPERSON, ADVISORY GROUP IN SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

J. V. Narlikar, Emeritus Professor, Inter-University Centre for Astronomy and
Astrophysics (IUCA), Ganeshkhind, Pune University, Pune
CHIEF ADVISOR
P.K. Jain, Professor, Department of Mathematics, University of Delhi, Delhi
CHIEF COORDINATOR
Hukum Singh, Professor and Head, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
MEMBERS
Arun Pal Singh, Sr. Lecturer, Department of Mathematics, Dayal Singh College,
University of Delhi, Delhi
A.K. Rajput, Reader, RIE, Bhopal, M.P.
B.S.P. Raju, Professor, RIE Mysore, Karnataka
C.R. Pradeep, Assistant Professor, Department of Mathematics, Indian Institute of
Science, Bangalore, Karnataka
D.R. Sharma, P.G.T., JN-V Mungeshpur, Delhi
Ram Avtar, Professor (Retd.) and Consultant, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
R.P. Maurya, Reader, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
S.S. Khare, Pro-Vice-Chancellor, NEHU, Tura Campus, Meghalaya
S.K.S. Gautam, Professor, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
S.K. Kaushik, Reader, Department of Mathematics, Kirori Mal College, University
of Delhi, Delhi
Sangeeta Arora, P.G.T., Apeejay School Saket, New Delhi-110017
Shailja Tewari, P.G.T., Kendriya Vidyalaya, Barkakana, Hazaribagh, Jharkhand
Vinayak Bujade, Lecturer, Vidarbha Buniyadi Junior College, Sakkardara Chowk,
Nagpur, Maharashtra
Sunil Bajaj, Sr. Specialist, SCERT, Gurgaon, Haryana
MEMBER - COORDINATOR
V.P. Singh, Reader, DESM, NCERT, New Delhi
 Acknowledgements
The Council gratefully acknowledges the valuable contributions of the following
participants of the Textbook Review Workshop: Jagdish Saran, Professor, Deptt. of
Statistics, University of Delhi; Quddus Khan, Lecturer, Shibli National P.G. College
Azamgarh (U.P.); P.K. Tewari, Assistant Commissioner (Retd.), Kendriya Vidyalaya
Sangathan; S.B. Tripathi, Lecturer, R.P.V.V. Surajmal Vihar, Delhi; O.N. Singh, Reader,
RIE, Bhubaneswar, Orissa; Miss Saroj, Lecturer, Govt. Girls Senior Secondary School
No.1, Roop Nagar, Delhi; P. Bhaskar Kumar, PGT, Jawahar Navodaya Vidyalaya,
Lepakshi, Anantapur, (A.P.); Mrs. S. Kalpagam, PGT, K.V. NAL Campus, Bangalore;
Rahul Sofat, Lecturer, Air Force Golden Jubilee Institute, Subroto Park, New Delhi;
Vandita Kalra, Lecturer, Sarvodaya Kanya Vidyalaya, Vikaspuri, District Centre,
New Delhi; Janardan Tripathi, Lecturer, Govt. R. H. S.S. Aiza wl, Mizoram and
Ms. Sushma Jaireth, Reader, DWS, NCERT, New Delhi.
The Council acknowledges the efforts of Deepak Kapoor, Incharge, Computer
Station, Sajjad Haider Ansari, Rakesh Kumar and Nargis Islam, D.T.P. Operators,
Monika Saxena,Copy Editor and Abhimanu Mohanty, Proof Reader.
The Contribution of APC-Office, administration of DESM and Publication
Department is also duly acknowledged.
 Constitution of India

Fundamental Duties
It shall be the duty of every citizen of India —
(a) to abide by the Constitution and respect its ideals and institutions, the
National Flag and the National Anthem;
(b) to cherish and follow the noble ideals which inspired our national struggle
for freedom;
(c) to uphold and protect the sovereignty, unity and integrity of India;
(d) to defend the country and render national service when called upon to
do so;
(e) to promote harmony and the spirit of common brotherhood amongst all
the people of India transcending religious, linguistic and regional or
sectional diversities; to renounce practices derogatory to the dignity of
women;
(f) to value and preserve the rich heritage of our composite culture;
(g) to protect and improve the natural environment including forests, lakes,
rivers, wildlife and to have compassion for living creatures;
(h) to develop the scientific temper, humanism and the spirit of inquiry and
reform;
(i) to safeguard public property and to abjure violence;
(j) to strive towards excellence in all spheres of individual and collective
activity so that the nation constantly rises to higher levels of endeavour
and achievement;
*(k) who is a parent or guardian, to provide opportunities for education to
his child or, as the case may be, ward between the age of six and
fourteen years.

Note: The Article 51A containing Fundamental Duties was inserted by the Constitution
(42nd Amendment) Act, 1976 (with effect from 3 January 1977).
*(k) was inserted by the Constitution (86th Amendment) Act, 2002 (with effect from
1 April 2010).
 Contents
PART I
Foreword v
Preface vii
1. Relations and Functions 1
1.1 Introduction 1
1.2 Types of Relations 2
1.3Types of Functions 7
1.4Composition of Functions and Invertible Function 12
1.5 Binary Operations 19
2. Inverse Trigonometric Functions 33
2.1 Introduction 3
2.2 Basic Concepts 3
2.3Properties of Inverse Trigonometric Functions 42
3. Matrices 56
3.1 Introduction 56
3.2 Matrix 56
3.3Types of Matrices 61
3.4Operations on Matrices 65
3.5 Transpose of a Matrix 83
3.6 Symmetric and Skew Symmetric Matrices 85
3.7Elementary Operation (Transformation) of a Matrix 90
3.8 Invertible Matrices 91
4. Determinants 103
4.1 Introduction 103
4.2 Determinant 103
4.3Properties of Determinants 109
4.4Area of a Triangle 121
4.5 Minors and Cofactors 123
4.6 Adjoint and Inverse of a Matrix 126
4.7Applications of Determinants and Matrices 133
 xiv

5. Continuity and Differentiability 147

5.1 Introduction 147
5.2 Continuity 147
5.3Differentiability 161
5.4Exponential and Logarithmic Functions 170
5.5 Logarithmic Differentiation 174
5.6 Derivatives of Functions in Parametric Forms 179
5.7Second Order Derivative 181
5.8 Mean Value Theorem 184
6. Application of Derivatives 194
6.1 Introduction 194
6.2 Rate of Change of Quantities 194
6.3Increasing and Decreasing Functions 199
6.4Tangents and Normals 206
6.5 Approximations 213
6.6 Maxima and Minima 216
Appendix 1: Proofs in Mathematics 247
A.1.1 Introduction 247
A.1.2 What is a Proof?247
Appendix 2: Mathematical Modelling 256
A.2.1 Introduction 256
A.2.2 Why Mathematical Modelling?256
A.2.3 Principles of Mathematical Modelling 257
Answers 268
Supplementary Material 286
 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
q No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise
without the prior permission of the publisher.
q This book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by
way of trade, be lent, re-sold, hired out or otherwise disposed
of without the publisher’s consent, in any form of binding or
cover other than that in which it is published.
q The correct price of this publication is the price printed on
this page, Any revised price indicated by a rubber stamp or
by a sticker or by any other means is incorrect and should be
unacceptable.

OFFICES OF THE PUBLICATION

DIVISION, NCERT

`
 Chapter 1
RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS
vThere is no permanent place in the world for ugly mathematics ... . It may
be very hard to define mathematical beauty but that is just as true of
beauty of any kind, we may not know quite what we mean by a
beautiful poem, but that does not prevent us from recognising
one when we read it. — G. H. HARDY v

1.1 Introduction
Recall that the notion of relations and functions, domain,
co-domain and range have been introduced in Class XI
along with different types of specific real valued functions
and their graphs. The concept of the term ‘relation’ in
mathematics has been drawn from the meaning of relation
in English language, according to which two objects or
quantities are related if there is a recognisable connection
or link between the two objects or quantities. Let A be
the set of students of Class XII of a school and B be the
set of students of Class XI of the same school. Then some
of the examples of relations from A to B are
(i) {(a, b) Î A × B: a is brother of b}, Lejeune Dirichlet
(ii) {(a, b) Î A × B: a is sister of b}, (1805-1859)
(iii) {(a, b) Î A × B: age of a is greater than age of b},
(iv) {(a, b) Î A × B: total marks obtained by a in the final examination is less than
the total marks obtained by b in the final examination},
(v) {(a, b) Î A × B: a lives in the same locality as b}. However, abstracting from
this, we define mathematically a relation R from A to B as an arbitrary subset
of A × B.
If (a, b) Î R, we say that a is related to b under the relation R and we write as
a R b. In general, (a, b) Î R, we do not bother whether there is a recognisable
connection or link between a and b. As seen in Class XI, functions are special kind of
relations.
In this chapter, we will study different types of relations and functions, composition
of functions, invertible functions and binary operations.
 2 MATHEMATICS

1.2 Types of Relations

In this section, we would like to study different types of relations. We know that a
relation in a set A is a subset of A × A. Thus, the empty set f and A × A are two
extreme relations. For illustration, consider a relation R in the set A = {1, 2, 3, 4} given by
R = {( a, b): a – b = 10}. This is the empty set, as no pair ( a, b) satisfies the condition
a – b = 10. Similarly, R ¢ = {( a, b) : | a – b | ³ 0} is the whole set A × A, as all pairs
(a, b) in A × A satisfy | a – b | ³ 0. These two extreme examples lead us to the
following definitions.
Definition 1 A relation R in a set A is called empty relation, if no element of A is
related to any element of A, i.e., R = f Ì A × A.
Definition 2 A relation R in a set A is called universal relation, if each element of A
is related to every element of A, i.e., R = A × A.
Both the empty relation and the universal relation are some times called trivial
relations.
Example 1 Let A be the set of all students of a boys school. Show that the relation R
in A given by R = {( a, b) : a is sister of b} is the empty relation and R¢ = {( a, b) : the
difference between heights of a and b is less than 3 meters} is the universal relation.
Solution Since the school is boys school, no student of the school can be sister of any
student of the school. Hence, R = f, showing that R is the empty relation. It is also
obvious that the difference between heights of any two students of the school has to be
less than 3 meters. This shows that R ¢ = A × A is the universal relation.
Remark In Class XI, we have seen two ways of representing a relation, namely raster
method and set builder method. However, a relation R in the set {1, 2, 3, 4} defined by R
= {( a, b) : b = a + 1} is also expressed as a R b if and only if b = a + 1 by many
authors. We may also use this notation, as and when convenient.
If (a, b) Î R, we say that a is related to b and we denote it as a R b.
One of the most important relation, which plays a significant role in Mathematics,
is an equivalence relation. To study equivalence relation, we first consider three
types of relations, namely reflexive, symmetric and transitive.
Definition 3 A relation R in a set A is called
(i) reflexive, if (a, a) Î R, for every a Î A,
(ii) symmetric, if (a1 , a2 ) Î R implies that (a2 , a1 ) Î R, for all a1 , a2 Î A.
(iii) transitive, if (a1 , a2 ) Î R and (a2 , a3 ) Î R implies that (a1 , a3 ) Î R, for all a1 , a2 ,
a3 Î A.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS3

Definition 4 A relation R in a set A is said to be an equivalence relation if R is

reflexive, symmetric and transitive.
Example 2 Let T be the set of all triangles in a plane with R a relation in T given by
R = {(T 1 , T2 ) : T1 is congruent to T2 }. Show that R is an equivalence relation.
Solution R is reflexive, since every triangle is congruent to itself. Fu rther,
(T1 , T2 ) Î R Þ T1 is congruent to T2 Þ T2 is congruent to T1 Þ (T2 , T1 ) Î R. Hence,
R is symmetric. Moreover, (T1 , T2 ), (T2 , T3 ) Î R Þ T1 is congruent to T2 and T2 is
congruent to T3 Þ T1 is congruent to T3 Þ (T1 , T3 ) Î R. Therefore, R is an equivalence
relation.
Example 3 Let L be the set of all lines in a plane and R be the relation in L defined as
R = {(L 1 , L2 ) : L1 is perpendicular to L2 }. Show that R is symmetric but neither
reflexive nor transitive.
Solution R is not reflexive, as a line L1 can not be perpendicular to itself, i.e., (L1 , L1 )
Ï R. R is symmetric as (L1 , L2 ) Î R
Þ L1 is perpendicular to L2
Þ L2 is perpendicular to L1
Þ (L2 , L1 ) Î R.
R is not transitive. Indeed, if L1 is perpendicular to L2 and Fig 1.1
L2 is perpendicular to L3 , then L1 can never be perpendicular to
L3 . In fact, L1 is parallel to L3 , i.e., (L1 , L2 ) Î R, (L2 , L3 ) Î R but (L1 , L3 ) Ï R.
Example 4 Show that the relation R in the set {1, 2, 3} given by R = {(1, 1), (2, 2),
(3, 3), (1, 2), (2, 3)} is reflexive but neither symmetric nor transitive.
Solution R is reflexive, since (1, 1), (2, 2) and (3, 3) lie in R. Also, R is not symmetric,
as (1, 2) Î R but (2, 1) Ï R. Similarly, R is not transitive, as (1, 2) Î R and (2, 3) ÎR
but (1, 3) Ï R.
Example 5 Show that the relation R in the set Z of integers given by
R = {( a, b) : 2 divides a – b}
is an equivalence relation.
Solution R is reflexive, as 2 divides ( a – a) for all a Î Z. Further, if (a, b) Î R, then
2 divides a – b. Therefore, 2 divides b – a. Hence, (b, a) Î R, which shows that R is
symmetric. Similarly, if ( a, b) Î R and (b, c) Î R, then a – b and b – c are divisible by
2. Now, a – c = ( a – b) + ( b – c) is even (Why?). So, ( a – c) is divisible by 2. This
shows that R is transitive. Thus, R is an equivalence relation in Z.
 4 MATHEMATICS

In Example 5, note that all even integers are related to zero, as (0, ± 2), (0, ± 4)
etc., lie in R and no odd integer is related to 0, as (0, ± 1), (0, ± 3) etc., do not lie in R.
Similarly, all odd integers are related to one and no even integer is related to one.
Therefore, the set E of all even integers and the set O of all odd integers are subsets of
Z satisfying following conditions:
(i) All elements of E are related to each other and all elements of O are related to
each other.
(ii) No element of E is related to any element of O and vice-versa.
(iii) E and O are disjoint and Z = E È O.
The subset E is called the equivalence class containing zero and is denoted by
[0]. Similarly, O is the equivalence class containing 1 and is denoted by [1]. Note that
[0] ¹ [1], [0] = [2 r] and [1] = [2 r + 1], r Î Z. Infact, what we have seen above is true
for an arbitrary equivalence relation R in a set X. Given an arbitrary equivalence
relation R in an arbitrary set X, R divides X into mutually disjoint subsets A i called
partitions or subdivisions of X satisfying:
(i) all elements of Ai are related to each other, for all i.
(ii) no element of Ai is related to any element of Aj , i ¹ j.
(iii) È Aj = X and A i
Ç Aj = f, i ¹ j.
The subsets Ai are called equivalence classes. The interesting part of the situation
is that we can go reverse also. For example, consider a subdivision of the set Z given
by three mutually disjoint subsets A1 , A2 and A3 whose union is Z with
A1 = { x Î Z : x is a multiple of 3} = {..., – 6, – 3, 0, 3, 6, ...}
A2 = { x Î Z : x – 1 is a multiple of 3} = {..., – 5, – ,2 1, 4, 7, ...}
A3 = { x Î Z : x – 2 is a multiple of 3} = {..., – 4, – ,1 2, 5, 8, ...}
Define a relation R in Z given by R = {( a, b) : 3 divides a – b}. Following the
arguments similar to those used in Example 5, we can show that R is an equivalence
relation. Also, A1 coincides with the set of all integers in Z which are related to zero, A 2
coincides with the set of all integers which are related to 1 and A 3 coincides with the
set of all integers in Z which are related to 2. Thus, A 1 = [0], A 2
= [1] and A 3
= [2].
In fact, A1 = [3 r], A 2 = [3 r + 1] and A 3 = [3 r + 2], for all r Î Z.
Example 6 Let R be the relation defined in the set A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7} by
R = {( a, b) : both a and b are either odd or even}. Show that R is an equivalence
relation. Further, show that all the elements of the subset {1, 3, 5, 7} are related to each
other and all the elements of the subset {2, 4, 6} are related to each other, but no
element of the subset {1, 3, 5, 7} is related to any element of the subset {2, 4, 6}.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS5

Solution Given any element a in A, both a and a must be either odd or even, so
that (a, a) Î R. Further, ( a, b) Î R Þ both a and b must be either odd or even
Þ (b, a) Î R. Similarly, ( a, b) Î R and (b, c) Î R Þ all elements a, b, c, must be
either even or odd simultaneously Þ (a, c) Î R. Hence, R is an equivalence relation.
Further, all the elements of {1, 3, 5, 7} are related to each other, as all the elements
of this subset are odd. Similarly, all the elements of the subset {2, 4, 6} are related to
each other, as all of them are even. Also, no element of the subset {1, 3, 5, 7} can be
related to any element of {2, 4, 6}, as elements of {1, 3, 5, 7} are odd, while elements
of {2, 4, 6} are even.

EXERCISE 1.1
1. Determine whether each of the following relations are reflexive, symmetric and
transitive:
(i) Relation R in the set A = {1, 2, 3, ..., 13, 14} defined as
R = {( x, y) : 3 x – y = 0}
(ii) Relation R in the set N of natural numbers defined as
R = {( x, y) : y = x + 5 and x < 4}
(iii) Relation R in the set A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} as
R = {( x, y) : y is divisible by x}
(iv) Relation R in the set Z of all integers defined as
R = {( x, y) : x – y is an integer}
(v) Relation R in the set A of human beings in a town at a particular time given by
(a) R = {( x, y) : x and y work at the same place}
(b) R = {( x, y) : x and y live in the same locality}
(c) R = {( x, y) : x is exactly 7 cm taller than y}
(d) R = {( x, y) : x is wife of y}
(e) R = {( x, y) : x is father of y}
2. Show that the relation R in the set R of real numbers, defined as
R = {( a, b) : a £ b2 } is neither reflexive nor symmetric nor transitive.
3. Check whether the relation R defined in the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} as
R = {( a, b) : b = a + 1} is reflexive, symmetric or transitive.
4. Show that the relation R in R defined as R = {( a, b) : a £ b}, is reflexive and
transitive but not symmetric.
5. Check whether the relation R in R defined by R = {( a, b) : a £ b3 } is reflexive,
symmetric or transitive.
 6 MATHEMATICS

6. Show that the relation R in the set {1, 2, 3} given by R = {(1, 2), (2, 1)} is
symmetric but neither reflexive nor transitive.
7. Show that the relation R in the set A of all the books in a library of a college,
given by R = {( x, y) : x and y have same number of pages} is an equivalence
relation.
8. Show that the relation R in the set A = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} given by
R = {( a, b) : | a – b| is even}, is an equivalence relation. Show that all the
elements of {1, 3, 5} are related to each other and all the elements of {2, 4} are
related to each other. But no element of {1, 3, 5} is related to any element of {2, 4}.
9. Show that each of the relation R in the set A = { x Î Z : 0 £ x £ 12}, given by
(i) R = {( a, b) : | a – b| is a multiple of 4}
(ii) R = {( a, b) : a = b}
is an equivalence relation. Find the set of all elements related to 1 in each case.
10. Give an example of a relation. Which is
(i) Symmetric but neither reflexive nor transitive.
(ii) Transitive but neither reflexive nor symmetric.
(iii) Reflexive and symmetric but not transitive.
(iv) Reflexive and transitive but not symmetric.
(v) Symmetric and transitive but not reflexive.
11. Sh ow that the relation R in the set A of points in a plane given by
R = {(P, Q) : distance of the point P from the origin is same as the distance of the
point Q from the origin}, is an equivalence relation. Further, show that the set of
all points related to a point P ¹ (0, 0) is the circle passing through P with origin as
centre.
12. Show that the relation R defined in the set A of all triangles as R = {(T 1 , T2 ) : T1
is similar to T2 }, is equivalence relation. Consider three right angle triangles T1
with sides 3, 4, 5, T 2 with sides 5, 12, 13 and T 3
with sides 6, 8, 10. Which
triangles among T1 , T2 and T3 are related?
13. Show that the relation R defined in the set A of all polygons as R = {(P 1
,P 2):
P 1 and P 2 have same number of sides}, is an equivalence relation. What is the
set of all elements in A related to the right angle triangle T with sides 3, 4 and 5?
14. Let L be the set of all lines in XY plane and R be the relation in L defined as
R = {(L 1 , L2 ) : L1 is parallel to L2 }. Show that R is an equivalence relation. Find
the set of all lines related to the line y = 2 x + 4.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS7

15. Let R be the relation in the set {1, 2, 3, 4} given by R = {(1, 2), (2, 2), (1, 1), (4,4),
(1, 3), (3, 3), (3, 2)}. Choose the correct answer.
(A) R is reflexive and symmetric but not transitive.
(B) R is reflexive and transitive but not symmetric.
(C) R is symmetric and transitive but not reflexive.
(D) R is an equivalence relation.
16. Let R be the relation in the set N given by R = {( a, b) : a = b – 2, b > 6}. Choose
the correct answer.
(A) (2, 4) ÎR (B) (3, 8) ÎR (C) (6, 8) ÎR (D) (8, 7) ÎR

1.3 Types of Functions

The notion of a function along with some special functions like identity function, constant
function, polynomial function, rational function, modulus function, signum function etc.
along with their graphs have been given in Class XI.
Addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of two functions have also been
studied. As the concept of function is of paramount importance in mathematics and
among other disciplines as well, we would like to extend our study about function from
where we finished earlier. In this section, we would like to study different types of
functions.
Consider the functions f1 , f2 , f3 and f4 given by the following diagrams.
In Fig 1.2, we observe that the images of distinct elements of X 1
under the function
f1 are distinct, but the image of two distinct elements 1 and 2 of X 1 under f2 is same,
namely b. Further, there are some elements like e and f in X2 which are not images of
any element of X1 under f1 , while all elements of X3 are images of some elements of X1
under f3 . The above observations lead to the following definitions:
Definition 5 A function f : X ® Y is defined to be one-one (or injective), if the images
of distinct elements of X under f are distinct, i.e., for every x1 , x2 Î X, f (x1 ) = f (x2 )
implies x1 = x2 . Otherwise, f is called many-one.
The function f1 and f4 in Fig 1.2 (i) and (iv) are one-one and the function f2 and f3
in Fig 1.2 (ii) and (iii) are many-one.
Definition 6 A function f : X ® Y is said to be onto (or surjective), if every element
of Y is the image of some element of X under f, i.e., for every y Î Y, there exists an
element x in X such that f (x) = y.
The function f3 and f4 in Fig 1.2 (iii), (iv) are onto and the function f1 in Fig 1.2 (i) is
not onto as elements e, f in X2 are not the image of any element in X1 under f1 .
 8 MATHEMATICS

Fig 1.2 (i) to (iv)

Remark f : X ® Y is onto if and only if Range of f = Y.

Definition 7 A function f : X ® Y is said to be one-one and onto (or bijective), if f is
both one-one and onto.
The function f4 in Fig 1.2 (iv) is one-one and onto.
Example 7 Let A be the set of all 50 students of Class X in a school. Let f : A ® N be
function defined by f (x) = roll number of the student x. Show that f is one-one
but not onto.
Solution No two different students of the class can have same roll number. Therefore,
f must be one-one. We can assume without any loss of generality that roll numbers of
students are from 1 to 50. This implies that 51 in N is not roll number of any student of
the class, so that 51 can not be image of any element of X under f. Hence, f is not onto.
Example 8 Show that the function f : N ® N, given by f (x) = 2 x, is one-one but not
onto.
Solution The function f is one-one, for f (x1 ) = f (x2 ) Þ 2 x1 = 2 x2 Þ x1 = x2 . Further,
f is not onto, as for 1 Î N, there does not exist any x in N such that f (x) = 2 x = 1.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS9

Example 9 Prove that the function f : R ® R, given by f (x) = 2 x, is one-one and onto.
Solution f is one-one, as f (x1 ) = f (x2 ) Þ 2 x1 = 2 x2 Þ x1 = x2 . Also, given any real
y y y
number y in R, there exists in R such that f ( )=2.( ) = y. Hence, f is onto.
2 2 2

Fig 1.3

Example 10 Show that the function f : N® N, given by f (1) = f (2) = 1 and f (x) = x – 1,
for every x > 2, is onto but not one-one.
Solution f is not one-one, as f (1) = f (2) = 1. But f is onto, as given any y Î N, y ¹ 1,
we can choose x as y + 1 such that f (y + 1) = y + 1 – 1 = y. Also for 1 Î N, we
have f (1) = 1.
Example 11 Show that the function f : R ® R,
defined as f (x) = x2 , is neither one-one nor onto.
Solution Since f (– 1) = 1 = f (1), f is not one-
one. Also, the element – 2 in the co-domain R is
not image of any element x in the domain R
(Why?). Therefore f is not onto.
Example 12 Show that f : N ® N, given by

ì x + 1, if xis odd,
f ( x) = í
î x - 1, if xis even
is both one-one and onto. Fig 1.4
 10 MATHEMATICS

Solution Suppose f (x1 ) = f (x2 ). Note that if x1 is odd and x2 is even, then we will have
x1 + 1 = x2 – 1, i.e., x2 – x1 = 2 which is impossible. Similarly, the possibility of x1 being
even and x2 being odd can also be ruled out, using the similar argument. Therefore,
both x1 and x2 must be either odd or even. Suppose both x1 and x2 are odd. Then
f (x1 ) = f (x2 ) Þ x1 + 1 = x2 + 1 Þ x1 = x2 . Similarly, if both x1 and x2 are even, then also
f (x1 ) = f (x2 ) Þ x1 – 1 = x2 – 1 Þ x1 = x2 . Thus, f is one-one. Also, any odd number
2 r + 1 in the co-domain N is the image of 2 r + 2 in the domain N and any even number
2 r in the co-domain N is the image of 2 r – 1 in the domain N. Thus, f is onto.
Example 13 Show that an onto function f : {1, 2, 3} ® {1, 2, 3} is always one-one.
Solution Suppose f is not one-one. Then there exists two elements, say 1 and 2 in the
domain whose image in the co-domain is same. Also, the image of 3 under f can be
only one element. Therefore, the range set can have at the most two elements of the
co-domain {1, 2, 3}, showing that f is not onto, a contradiction. Hence, f must be one-one.
Example 14 Show that a one-one function f : {1, 2, 3} ® {1, 2, 3} must be onto.
Solution Since f is one-one, three elements of {1, 2, 3} must be taken to 3 different
elements of the co-domain {1, 2, 3} under f. Hence, f has to be onto.
Remark The results mentioned in Examples 13 and 14 are also true for an arbitrary
finite set X, i.e., a one-one function f : X ® X is necessarily onto and an onto map
f : X ® X is necessarily one-one, for every finite set X. In contrast to this, Examples 8
and 10 show that for an infinite set, this may not be true. In fact, this is a characteristic
difference between a finite and an infinite set.

EXERCISE 1.2
1
1. Show that the function f : R* ® R* defined by f (x) = is one-one and onto,
x
where R* is the set of all non-zero real numbers. Is the result true, if the domain
R* is replaced by N with co-domain being same as R*?
2. Check the injectivity and surjectivity of the following functions:
(i) f : N ® N given by f (x) = x2
(ii) f : Z ® Z given by f (x) = x2
(iii) f : R ® R given by f (x) = x2
(iv) f : N ® N given by f (x) = x3
(v) f : Z ® Z given by f (x) = x3
3. Prove that the Greatest Integer Function f : R ® R, given by f (x) = [ x], is neither
one-one nor onto, where [ x] denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to x.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS1

4. Show that the Modulus Function f : R ® R, given by f (x) = | x |, is neither one-

one nor onto, where | x | is x, if x is positive or 0 and | x | is – x, if x is negative.
5. Show that the Signum Function f : R ® R, given by

ì1, if x >0
ï
f ( x ) = í0, if x =0
ï – 1, if x <0
î
is neither one-one nor onto.
6. Let A = {1, 2, 3}, B = {4, 5, 6, 7} and let f = {(1, 4), (2, 5), (3, 6)} be a function
from A to B. Show that f is one-one.
7. In each of the following cases, state whether the function is one-one, onto or
bijective. Justify your answer.
(i) f : R ® R defined by f (x) = 3 – 4 x
(ii) f : R ® R defined by f (x) = 1 + x2
8. Let A and B be sets. Show that f : A × B ® B × A such that f (a, b) = ( b, a) is
bijective function.

ìn +1
ïï 2 , if n is odd
9. Let f : N ® N be defined by f (n) = í for all n Î N.
ï n , if n is even
ïî 2

State whether the function f is bijective. Justify your answer.

10. Let A = R – {3} and B = R – {1}. Consider the function f : A ® B defined by
æx-2 ö
f (x) = ç ÷ . Is f one-one and onto? Justify your answer. .
è x -3 ø
11. Let f : R ® R be defined as f(x) = x4 . Choose the correct answer.
(A) f is one-one onto (B) f is many-one onto
(C) f is one-one but not onto (D) f is neither one-one nor onto.
12. Let f : R ® R be defined as f (x) = 3 x. Choose the correct answer.
(A) f is one-one onto (B) f is many-one onto
(C) f is one-one but not onto (D) f is neither one-one nor onto.
 12 MATHEMATICS

1.4 Composition of Functions and Invertible Function

In this section, we will study composition of functions and the inverse of a bijective
function. Consider the set A of all students, who appeared in Class X of a Board
Examination in 206. Each student appearing in the Board Examination is assigned a
roll number by the Board which is written by the students in the answer script at the
time of examination. In order to have confidentiality, the Board arranges to deface the
roll numbers of students in the answer scripts and assigns a fake code number to each
roll number. Let B Ì N be the set of all roll numbers and C Ì N be the set of all code
numbers. This gives rise to two functions f : A ® B and g : B ® C given by f (a) = the
roll number assigned to the student a and g (b) = the code number assigned to the roll
number b. In this process each student is assigned a roll number through the function f
and each roll number is assigned a code number through the function g. Thus, by the
combination of these two functions, each student is eventually attached a code number.
This leads to the following definition:
Definition 8 Let f : A ® B and g : B ® C be two functions. Then the composition of
f and g, denoted by gof, is defined as the function gof : A ® C given by
gof (x) = g(f (x)), " x Î A.

Fig 1.5

Example 15 Let f : {2, 3, 4, 5} ® {3, 4, 5, 9} and g : {3, 4, 5, 9} ® {7, 1, 15} be

functions defined as f (2) = 3, f (3) = 4, f (4) = f (5) = 5 and g (3) = g (4) = 7 and
g (5) = g (9) = 1. Find gof.
Solution eW have gof (2) = g (f (2)) = g (3) = 7, gof (3) = g (f (3)) = g (4) = 7,
gof (4) = g (f (4)) = g (5) = 1 and gof (5) = g (5) = 1.
Example 16 Find gof and fog, if f : R ® R and g : R ® R are given by f (x) = cos x
and g (x) = 3 x2 . Show that gof ¹ fog.
Solution We have gof (x) = g (f (x)) = g (cos x) = 3 (cos x)2 = 3 cos 2 x. Similarly,
fog (x) = f (g (x)) = f (3 x2 ) = cos (3 x2 ). Note that 3cos 2 x ¹ cos 3 x2 , for x = 0. Hence,
gof ¹ fog.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS13

ì 73 ü ì ü 34 x +
Example 17 Show that if f : R - í ý ® R - í ý is defined by f ( x ) = and
î5 þ î þ 57 x -

ì 37 ü ì ü 74 x +
g : R - í ý ® R - í ý is defined by g ( x ) = , then fog = I and gof = I B, where,
î5 þ î þ 53 x - A

ì3 ü ì7 ü
A = R – í ý , B = R – í ý ; I A (x) = x, " x Î A, IB (x) = x, " x Î B are called identity
î5 þ î5 þ
functions on sets A and B, respectively.
Solution We have

æ (34) x + ö
74 ç ÷+ 21804 x + + x-
æ 34 x + ö
gof ( x ) = g ç è (57) x - ø =
x
=x
÷= =
è 57 x - ø æ (34) x + ö 15204 x + - x+
53 ç ÷-
è (57) x - ø

æ (74) x + ö
34 ç ÷+ 2104 x + + x-
æ 74 x + ö
fog ( x) = f ç è (53) x - ø =
x
=x
Similarly, ÷= =
è 53 x - ø æ (74) x + ö 352014 x + - x+
57 ç ÷-
è (53) x - ø

Thus, gof (x) = x, " x Î B and fog (x) = x, " x Î A, which implies that gof = I B
and fog = I A.
Example 18 Show that if f : A ® B and g : B ® C are one-one, then gof : A ® C is
also one-one.
Solution Suppose gof (x1 ) = gof (x2 )
Þ g (f (x1 )) = g(f (x2 ))
Þ f (x1 ) = f (x2 ), as g is one-one
Þ x1 = x2 , as f is one-one
Hence, gof is one-one.

Example 19 Show that if f : A ® B and g : B ® C are onto, then gof : A ® C is

also onto.
Solution Given an arbitrary element z Î C, there exists a pre-image y of z under g
such that g (y) = z, since g is onto. Further, for y Î B, there exists an element x in A
 14 MATHEMATICS

with f (x) = y, since f is onto. Therefore, gof (x) = g (f (x)) = g (y) = z, showing that gof
is onto.
Example 20 Consider functions f and g such that composite gof is defined and is one-
one. Are f and g both necessarily one-one.
Solution Consider f : {1, 2, 3, 4} ® {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} defined as f (x) = x, " x and
g : {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} ® {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} as g (x) = x, for x = 1, 2, 3, 4 and g (5) = g (6) = 5.
Then, gof (x) = x " x, which shows that gof is one-one. But g is clearly not one-one.
Example 21 Are f and g both necessarily onto, if gof is onto?
Solution Consider f : {1, 2, 3, 4} ® {1, 2, 3, 4} and g : {1, 2, 3, 4} ® {1, 2, 3} defined
as f (1) = 1, f (2) = 2, f (3) = f (4) = 3, g (1) = 1, g (2) = 2 and g (3) = g (4) = 3. It can be
seen that gof is onto but f is not onto.
Remark It can be verified in general that gof is one-one implies that f is one-one.
Similarly, gof is onto implies that g is onto.
Now, we would like to have close look at the functions f and g described in the
beginning of this section in reference to a Board Examination. Each student appearing
in Class X Examination of the Board is assigned a roll number under the function f and
each roll number is assigned a code number under g. After the answer scripts are
examined, examiner enters the mark against each code number in a mark book and
submits to the office of the Board. The Board officials decode by assigning roll number
back to each code number through a process reverse to g and thus mark gets attached
to roll number rather than code number. Further, the process reverse to f assigns a roll
number to the student having that roll number. This helps in assigning mark to the
student scoring that mark. We observe that while composing f and g, to get gof, first f
and then g was applied, while in the reverse process of the composite gof, first the
reverse process of g is applied and then the reverse process of f.
Example 22 Let f : {1, 2, 3} ® {a, b, c} be one-one and onto function given by
f (1) = a, f (2) = b and f (3) = c. Show that there exists a function g : {a, b, c} ® {1, 2, 3}
such that gof = I X and fog = I Y , where, X = {1, 2, 3} and Y = { a, b, c}.
Solution Consider g : {a, b, c} ® {1, 2, 3} as g (a) = 1, g (b) = 2 and g (c) = 3. It is
easy to verify that the composite gof = I X is the identity function on X and the composite
fog = I Y is the identity function on Y.
Remark The interesting fact is that the result mentioned in the above example is true
for an arbitrary one-one and onto function f : X ® Y. Not only this, even the converse
is also true , i.e., if f : X ® Y is a function such that there exists a function g : Y ® X
such that gof = I X and fog = I Y , then f must be one-one and onto.
The above discussion, Example 2 and Remark lead to the following definition:
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS15

Definition 9 A function f : X ® Y is defined to be invertible, if there exists a function

g : Y ® X such that gof = I X and fog = I Y . The function g is called the inverse of f and
is denoted by f – 1 .
Thus, if f is invertible, then f must be one-one and onto and conversely, if f is
one-one and onto, then f must be invertible. This fact significantly helps for proving a
function f to be invertible by showing that f is one-one and onto, specially when the
actual inverse of f is not to be determined.
Example 23 Let f : N ® Y be a function defined as f (x) = 4 x + 3, where,
Y = { y Î N : y = 4 x + 3 for some x Î N }. Show that f is invertible. Find the inverse.
Solution Consider an arbitrary element y of Y. By the definition of Y, y=4 x + 3,
( y - 3)
for some x in the domain N . This shows that x = . Define g:Y ® N by
4
( y - 3) (43) x + -
g ( y) = . Now, gof (x) = g (f (x)) = g (4 x + 3) = = x and
4 4

æ ( y - 3) ö 4( y3) -
fog (y) = f (g (y)) = f ç ÷= +3 = y– 3+3= y. This shows that gof = I
è 4 ø N

and fog = I Y , which implies that f is invertible and g is the inverse of f.

Example 24 Let Y = { n2 : n Î N } Ì N . Consider f : N ® Y as f (n) = n2 . Show that
f is invertible. Find the inverse of f.
Solution An arbitrary element y in Y is of the form n2 , for some n Î N . This
implies that n = y . This gives a function g : Y ® N , defined by g (y) = y . Now, ,
2
gof (n) = g (n2 ) = n2 = n and fog (y) = f y = y = y , which shows that
gof = I N
and fog = I Y . Hence, f is invertible with f – 1 = g.
Example 25 Let f : N ® R be a function defined as f (x) = 4 x2 + 12 x + 15. Show that
f : N ® S, where, S is the range of f, is invertible. Find the inverse of f.
Solution Let y be an arbitrary element of range f. Then y = 4 x2 + 12 x + 15, for some

y - 63 -
x in N, which implies that y = (2 x + 3) 2
+ 6. This gives x= , as y ³ 6.
2
 16 MATHEMATICS

y - 63 -
Let us define g : S ® N by g (y) = .
2
Now gof (x) = g (f (x)) = g (4 x2 + 12 x + 15) = g ((2 x + 3) 2
+ 6)
2
(23) x +63 + - - 23 x + -
= = =x
2
2
æ y - 632 - ö æ y- - ö
and fog (y) = f çç ÷÷ = çç + 36 ÷÷ +
è 2 ø è ø
2 2
= y - 63 - + + = y- + = y– 6+6= y.
Hence, gof =I N
and fog =I S . This implies that f is invertible with f – 1 = g.

Example 26 Consider f : N ® N, g : N ® N and h : N ® R defined as f (x) = 2 x,

g (y) = 3 y + 4 and h (z) = sin z, " x, y and z in N. Show that ho(gof ) = ( hog) of.
Solution We have
ho(gof) (x) = h(gof (x)) = h(g (f (x))) = h (g (2 x))
= h(3(2 x) + 4) = h(6 x + 4) = sin (6 x + 4) " x ÎN.
Also, ((hog) o f ) (x) =( hog) ( f (x)) = ( hog) (2 x) = h ( g (2 x))
= h(3(2 x) + 4) = h(6 x + 4) = sin (6 x + 4), " x Î N.
This shows that ho(gof) = ( hog) o f.
This result is true in general situation as well.
Theorem 1 If f : X ® Y, g : Y ® Z and h : Z ® S are functions, then
ho(gof ) =( hog) o f.
Proof We have
ho(gof ) (x) = h(gof (x)) = h(g (f (x))), " x in X
and (hog) of (x) = hog(f (x)) = h(g (f (x))), " x in X.
Hence, ho(gof) =( hog) o f.
Example 27 Consider f : {1, 2, 3} ® {a, b, c} and g : {a, b, c} ® {apple, ball, cat}
defined as f (1) = a, f (2) = b, f (3) = c, g(a) = apple, g(b) = ball and g(c) = cat.
Show that f, g and gof are invertible. Find out f – 1 , g– 1 and (gof)– 1 and show that
(gof) – 1 = f – 1 o g– 1 .
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS17

Solution No te that by definition, f and g are bijective functions. Let

f – 1 : {a, b, c} ® (1, 2, 3} and g– 1 : {apple, ball, cat} ® {a, b, c} be defined as
f {a} = 1, f {b} = 2,
– 1 – 1
f {c} = 3,
– 1
g – 1 {apple} = a, g – 1 {ball} = b and g – 1 {cat} = c.
It is easy to verify that f o f = I{1, 2, 3} , f o f – 1 = I{a, b, c}, g – 1 og = I{a, b, c} and g o g– 1 = ID ,
– 1

where, D = {apple, ball, cat}. Now, gof : {1, 2, 3} ® {apple, ball, cat} is given by
gof (1) = apple, gof (2) = ball, gof (3) = cat. We can define
(gof)– 1 : {apple, ball, cat} ® {1, 2, 3} by ( gof)– 1 (apple) = 1, (gof)– 1 (ball) = 2 and
(g o f)– 1 (cat) = 3. It is easy to see that ( g o f)– 1 o (g o f) = I {1, 2, 3} and
(gof) o (gof)– 1 = I D . Thus, we have seen that f, g and gof are invertible.
Now, f – 1 og– 1 (apple)= f – 1 (g– 1 (apple)) = f – 1 (a) = 1 = ( gof)– 1 (apple)
f – 1 og– 1 (ball) = f – 1 (g– 1 (ball)) = f – 1 (b) = 2 = ( gof)– 1 (ball) and
f – 1 og– 1 (cat) = f – 1 (g– 1 (cat)) = f – 1 (c) = 3 = ( gof)– 1 (cat).
Hence (gof)– 1 = f – 1 og– 1 .
The above result is true in general situation also.
Theorem 2 Let f : X ® Y and g : Y ® Z be two invertible functions. Then gof is also
invertible with (gof)– 1 = f – 1 og– 1 .
Proof To show that gof is invertible with (gof)– 1 = f – 1 og– 1 , it is enough to show that
( f – 1 og– 1 )o(gof) = I X and (gof)o( f – 1 og– 1 ) = I Z .
Now, ( f – 1 og– 1 ) o (gof) = (( f – 1 og– 1 ) og) of, by Theorem 1
= ( f – 1 o(g– 1 og)) of, by Theorem 1
= ( f – 1 o IY ) of, by definition of g– 1
= I X.
Similarly, it can be shown that ( gof ) o (f – 1 o g – 1 ) = I Z .

Example 28 Let S = {1, 2, 3}. Determine whether the functions f : S ® S defined as

below have inverses. Find f – 1 , if it exists.
(a) f = {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3)}
(b) f = {(1, 2), (2, 1), (3, 1)}
(c) f = {(1, 3), (3, 2), (2, 1)}

Solution
(a) It is easy to see that f is one-one and onto, so that f is invertible with the inverse
f – 1 of f given by f – 1 = {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3)} = f.
(b) Since f (2) = f (3) = 1, f is not one-one, so that f is not invertible.
(c) It is easy to see that f is one-one and onto, so that f is invertible with
f – 1 = {(3, 1), (2, 3), (1, 2)}.
18 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 1.3
1. Let f : {1, 3, 4} ® {1, 2, 5} and g : {1, 2, 5} ® {1, 3} be given by
f = {(1, 2), (3, 5), (4, 1)} and g = {(1, 3), (2, 3), (5, 1)}. Write down gof.
2. Let f, g and h be functions from R to R. Show that
(f + g) o h = foh + goh
(f . g) o h = ( foh) . (goh)
3. Find gof and fog, if
(i) f (x) = | x | and g(x) = | 5 x– 2|
1

(ii) f (x) = 8 x3 and g(x) = x3 .

(43) x + 2 2
4. If f (x) = , x¹ , show that fof (x) = x, for all x ¹ . What is the
(64) x - 3 3
inverse of f ?
5. State with reason whether following functions have inverse
(i) f : {1, 2, 3, 4} ® {10} with
f = {(1, 10), (2, 10), (3, 10), (4, 10)}
(ii) g : {5, 6, 7, 8} ® {1, 2, 3, 4} with
g = {(5, 4), (6, 3), (7, 4), (8, 2)}
(iii) h : {2, 3, 4, 5} ® {7, 9, 1, 13} with
h = {(2, 7), (3, 9), (4, 1), (5, 13)}
x
6. Show that f : [ – 1, 1] ® R, given by f (x) = is one-one. Find the inverse
( x + 2)
of the function f : [ – 1, 1] ® Range f.
x 2 y
(Hint: For y Î Range f, y = f (x) = , for some x in [ – 1, 1], i.e., x= )
x+2 (1) - y
7. Consider f : R ® R given by f (x) = 4 x + 3. Show that f is invertible. Find the
inverse of f.
8. Consider f : R+ ® [4, ¥) given by f (x) = x2 + 4. Show that f is invertible with the
inverse f – 1 of f given by f – 1 (y) = y - 4 , where R+ is the set of all non-negative
real numbers.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS19

9. Consider f : R+ ® [ – 5, ¥) given by f (x) = 9 x2 + 6 x – 5. Show that f is invertible

æ y + 61 - ö
ç
with f – 1 (y) = ÷.
è 3 ø
10. Let f : X ® Y be an invertible function. Show that f has unique inverse.
(Hint: suppose g1 and g2 are two inverses of f. Then for all y Î Y,
fog1 (y) = 1 Y (y) = fog2 (y). Use one-one ness of f).
11. Consider f : {1, 2, 3} ® {a, b, c} given by f (1) = a, f (2) = b and f (3) = c. Find
f and show that (f ) = f.
– 1 – 1 – 1

12. Let f : X ® Y be an invertible function. Show that the inverse of f – 1 is f, i.e.,

(f – 1 )– 1 = f.
1
3
13. If f : R ® R be given by f (x) = (3) - x 3 , then fof (x) is
1
(A) x 3 (B) x 3 (C) x (D) (3 – x3 ).

ì 4 ü 4 x
14. Let f : R – í- ý ® R be a function defined as f (x) = . The inverse of
î 3 þ 43 x +

ì 4 ü
f is the map g : Range f ® R – í- ý given by
î 3 þ

3 y 4 y
(A) g ( y) = (B) g ( y) =
34 - y 43 - y

4 y 3 y
(C) g ( y) = (D) g ( y) =
34 - y 43 - y

1.5 Binary Operations

Right from the school days, you must have come across four fundamental operations
namely addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. The main feature of these
operations is that given any two numbers a and b, we associate another number a + b
a
or a – b or ab or , b ¹ 0. It is to be noted that only two numbers can be added or
b
multiplied at a time. When we need to add three numbers, we first add two numbers
and the result is then added to the third number. Thus, addition, multiplication, subtraction
 20 MATHEMATICS

and division are examples of binary operation, as ‘binary’ means two. If we want to
have a general definition which can cover all these four operations, then the set of
numbers is to be replaced by an arbitrary set X and then general binary operation is
nothing but association of any pair of elements a, b from X to another element of X.
This gives rise to a general definition as follows:
Definition 10 A binary operation * on a set A is a function * : A × A ® A. We denote
* (a, b) by a * b.
Example 29 Show that addition, subtraction and multiplication are binary operations
on R, but division is not a binary operation on R. Further, show that division is a binary
operation on the set R* of nonzero real numbers.
Solution +: R × R ® R is given by
(a, b) ® a + b
– : R × R ® R is given by
(a, b) ® a – b
× : R × R ® R is given by
(a, b) ® ab
Since ‘+ ’, ‘–’ and ‘×’ are functions, they are binary operations on R.
a
But ¸: R × R ® R, given by (a, b) ® , is not a function and hence not a binary
b
a
operation, as for b = 0, is not defined.
b
a
However, ¸ : R* × R* ® R*, given by (a, b) ® is a function and hence a
b
binary operation on R*.
Example 30 Show that subtraction and division are not binary operations on N.
Solution – : N × N ® N, given by (a, b) ® a – b, is not binary operation, as the image
of (3, 5) under ‘–’ is 3 – 5 = – 2 Ï N. Similarly, ¸ : N × N ® N, given by (a, b) ® a ¸ b
3
is not a binary operation, as the image of (3, 5) under ¸ is 3 ¸ 5 = Ï N.
5
Example 31 Show that * : R × R ® R given by (a, b) ® a + 4 b2 is a binary
operation.
Solution Since * carries each pair (a, b) to a unique element a + 4 b2 in R, * is a binary
operation on R.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS21

Example 32 Let P be the set of all subsets of a given set X. Show that È : P × P ® P
given by (A, B) ® A È B and Ç : P × P ® P given by (A, B) ® A Ç B are binary
operations on the set P.
Solution Since union operation È carries each pair (A, B) in P × P to a unique element
A È B in P, È is binary operation on P. Similarly, the intersection operation Ç carries
each pair (A, B) in P × P to a unique element A Ç B in P, Ç is a binary operation on P.
Example 33 Show that the Ú : R × R ® R given by (a, b) ® max {a, b} and the
Ù : R × R ® R given by (a, b) ® min {a, b} are binary operations.
Solution Since Ú carries each pair (a, b) in R × R to a unique element namely
maximum of a and b lying in R, Ú is a binary operation. Using the similar argument,
one can say that Ù is also a binary operation.
Remark Ú (4, 7) = 7, Ú (4, – 7) = 4, Ù (4, 7) = 4 and Ù (4, – 7) = – 7.
When number of elements in a set A is small, we can express a binary operation * on
the set A through a table called the operation table for the operation *. For example
consider A = {1, 2, 3}. Then, the operation Ú on A defined in Example 3 can be expressed
by the following operation table (Table 1.1) . Here, Ú (1, 3) = 3, Ú (2, 3) = 3, Ú (1, 2) = 2.
Table 1.1

Here, we are having 3 rows and 3 columns in the operation table with ( i, j) the
entry of the table being maximum of ith and jth elements of the set A. This can be
generalised for general operation * : A × A ® A. If A = { a1 , a2 , ..., an}. Then the
operation table will be having n rows and n columns with (i, j)th entry being ai * aj.
Conversely, given any operation table having n rows and n columns with each entry
being an element of A = { a1 , a2 , ..., an}, we can define a binary operation * : A × A ® A
given by ai * aj = the entry in the ith row and jth column of the operation table.
One may note that 3 and 4 can be added in any order and the result is same, i.e.,
3 + 4 = 4 + 3, but subtraction of 3 and 4 in different order give different results, i.e.,
3 – 4 ¹ 4 – 3. Similarly, in case of multiplication of 3 and 4, order is immaterial, but
division of 3 and 4 in different order give different results. Thus, addition and
multiplication of 3 and 4 are meaningful, but subtraction and division of 3 and 4 are
meaningless. For subtraction and division we have to write ‘subtract 3 from 4 ’, ‘subtract
4 from 3 ’, ‘divide 3 by 4 ’ or ‘divide 4 by 3 ’.
 2 MATHEMATICS

This leads to the following definition:

Definition 11 A binary operation * on the set X is called commutative, if a * b = b * a,
for every a, b Î X.
Example 34 Show that + : R × R ® R and × : R × R ® R are commutative binary
operations, but – : R × R ® R and ¸ : R* × R* ® R* are not commutative.
Solution Since a + b = b + a and a × b = b × a, " a, b Î R, ‘+ ’ and ‘×’ are
commutative binary operation. However, ‘–’ is not commutative, since 3 – 4 ¹ 4 – 3.
Similarly, 3 ¸ 4 ¹ 4 ¸ 3 shows that ‘¸’ is not commutative.
Example 35 Show that * : R × R ® R defined by a * b = a + 2 b is not commutative.
Solution Since 3 * 4 = 3 + 8 = 1 and 4 * 3 = 4 + 6 = 10, showing that the operation *
is not commutative.
If we want to associate three elements of a set X through a binary operation on X,
we encounter a natural problem. The expression a * b * c may be interpreted as
(a * b) * c or a * (b * c) and these two expressions need not be same. For example,
(8 – 5) – 2 ¹ 8 – (5 – 2). Therefore, association of three numbers 8, 5 and 3 through
the binary operation ‘subtraction’ is meaningless, unless bracket is used. But in case
of addition, 8 + 5 + 2 has the same value whether we look at it as ( 8 + 5) + 2 or as
8 + (5 + 2). Thus, association of 3 or even more than 3 numbers through addition is
meaningful without using bracket. This leads to the following:
Definition 12 A binary operation * : A × A ® A is said to be associative if
(a * b) * c = a * (b * c), " a, b, c, Î A.
Example 36 Show that addition and multiplication are associative binary operation on
R. But subtraction is not associative on R. Division is not associative on R*.
Solution Addition and multiplication are associative, since (a + b) + c = a + ( b + c) and
(a × b) × c = a × (b × c) " a, b, c Î R. However, subtraction and division are not
associative, as (8 – 5) – 3 ¹ 8 – (5 – 3) and (8 ¸ 5) ¸ 3 ¹ 8 ¸ (5 ¸ 3).
Example 37 Show that * : R × R ® R given by a * b ® a + 2 b is not associative.
Solution The operation * is not associative, since
(8 * 5) * 3 = (8 + 10) * 3 = (8 + 10) + 6 = 24,
while 8 * (5 * 3) = 8 * (5 + 6) = 8 * 1 = 8 + 2 = 30.
Remark Associative property of a binary operation is very important in the sense that
with this property of a binary operation, we can write a1 * a2 * ... * an which is not
ambiguous. But in absence of this property, the expression a1 * a2 * ... * an is ambiguous
unless brackets are used. Recall that in the earlier classes brackets were used whenever
subtraction or division operations or more than one operation occurred.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS23

For the binary operation ‘+ ’ on R, the interesting feature of the number zero is that
a+0= a=0+ a, i.e., any number remains unaltered by adding zero. But in case of
multiplication, the number 1 plays this role, as a × 1 = a = 1 × a, " a in R. This leads
to the following definition:
Definition 13 Given a binary operation * : A × A ® A, an element e Î A, if it exists,
is called identity for the operation *, if a * e = a = e * a, " a Î A.

Example 38 Show that zero is the identity for addition on R and 1 is the identity for
multiplication on R. But there is no identity element for the operations
– : R × R ® R and ¸ : R* × R* ® R*.
Solution a + 0 = 0 + a = a and a × 1 = a = 1 × a, " a Î R implies that 0 and 1 are
identity elements for the operations ‘+ ’ and ‘×’ respectively. Further, there is no element
e in R with a – e = e – a, " a. Similarly, we can not find any element e in R* such that
a ¸ e = e ¸ a, " a in R*. Hence, ‘–’ and ‘¸’ do not have identity element.
Remark Zero is identity for the addition operation on R but it is not identity for the
addition operation on N, as 0 Ï N. In fact the addition operation on N does not have
any identity.
One further notices that for the addition operation + : R × R ® R, given any
a Î R, there exists – a in R such that a + ( – a) = 0 (identity for ‘+ ’) = ( – a) + a.
1
Similarly, for the multiplication operation on R, given any a ¹ 0 in R, we can choose
a
1 1
in R such that a × = 1(identity for ‘×’) = × a. This leads to the following definition:
a a
Definition 14 Given a binary operation * : A × A ® A with the identity element e in A,
an element a Î A is said to be invertible with respect to the operation *, if there exists
an element b in A such that a * b = e = b * a and b is called the inverse of a and is
denoted by a– 1 .

Example 39 Show that – a is the inverse of a for the addition operation ‘+ ’ on R and
1
is the inverse of a ¹ 0 for the multiplication operation ‘×’ on R.
a
Solution As a + ( – a) = a – a = 0 and ( – a) + a = 0, – a is the inverse of a for addition.
1 1 1
Similarly, for a ¹ 0, a × =1= × a implies that is the inverse of a for multiplication.
a a a
 24 MATHEMATICS

Example 40 Show that – a is not the inverse of a Î N for the addition operation + on
1
N and is not the inverse of a Î N for multiplication operation × on N, for a ¹ 1.
a
Solution Since – a Ï N, – a can not be inverse of a for addition operation on N,
although – a satisfies a + ( – a) = 0 = ( – a) + a.
1
Similarly, for a ¹ 1 in N,
Ï N, which implies that other than 1 no element of N
a
has inverse for multiplication operation on N.
Examples 34, 36, 38 and 39 show that addition on R is a commutative and associative
binary operation with 0 as the identity element and – a as the inverse of a in R " a.

EXERCISE 1.4
1. Determine whether or not each of the definition of * given below gives a binary
operation. In the event that * is not a binary operation, give justification for this.
(i) On Z+ , define * by a * b = a – b
(ii) On Z+ , define * by a * b = ab
(iii) On R, define * by a * b = ab2
(iv) On Z+ , define * by a * b = | a – b |
(v) On Z+ , define * by a * b = a
2. For each operation * defined below, determine whether * is binary, commutative
or associative.
(i) On Z, define a * b = a – b
(ii) On Q, define a * b = ab + 1
ab
(iii) On Q, define a * b =
2
(iv) On Z+ , define a * b = 2 ab

(v) On Z+ , define a * b = ab
a
(vi) On R – {– 1}, define a * b =
b +1
3. Consider the binary operation Ù on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} defined by
a Ù b = min { a, b}. Write the operation table of the operation Ù .
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS25

4. Consider a binary operation * on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} given by the following

multiplication table (Table 1.2).
(i) Compute (2 * 3) * 4 and 2 * (3 * 4)
(ii) Is * commutative?
(iii) Compute (2 * 3) * (4 * 5).
(Hint: use the following table)
Table 1.2

5. Let *¢ be the binary operation on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} defined by

a *¢ b = H.C.F. of a and b. Is the operation *¢ same as the operation * defined
in Exercise 4 above? Justify your answer.
6. Let * be the binary operation on N given by a * b = L.C.M. of a and b. Find
(i) 5 * 7, 20 * 16(ii) Is * commutative?
(iii) Is * associative?(iv) Find the identity of * in N
(v) Which elements of N are invertible for the operation *?
7. Is * defined on the set {1, 2, 3, 4, 5} by a * b = L.C.M. of a and b a binary
operation? Justify your answer.
8. Let * be the binary operation on N defined by a * b = H.C.F. of a and b.
Is * commutative? Is * associative? Does there exist identity for this binary
operation on N?
9. Let * be a binary operation on the set Q of rational numbers as follows:
(i) a * b = a – b (ii) a * b = a2 + b2
(iii) a * b = a + ab (iv) a * b = ( a – b)2
ab
(v) a * b = (vi) a * b = ab2
4
Find which of the binary operations are commutative and which are associative.
10. Find which of the operations given above has identity.
11. Let A = N × N and * be the binary operation on A defined by
(a, b) * (c, d) = ( a + c, b + d)
 26 MATHEMATICS

Show that * is commutative and associative. Find the identity element for * on
A, if any.
12. State whether the following statements are true or false. Justify.
(i) For an arbitrary binary operation * on a set N, a * a = a " a Î N.
(ii) If * is a commutative binary operation on N, then a * (b * c) = ( c * b) * a
13. Consider a binary operation * on N defined as a * b = a3 + b3 . Choose the
correct answer.
(A) Is * both associative and commutative?
(B) Is * commutative but not associative?
(C) Is * associative but not commutative?
(D) Is * neither commutative nor associative?

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 41 If R1 and R2 are equivalence relations in a set A, show that R1 Ç R2 is
also an equivalence relation.
Solution Since R 1 and R2 are equivalence relations, (a, a) Î R1 , and (a, a) Î R2 " a Î A.
This implies that (a, a) Î R1 Ç R2 , " a, showing R1 Ç R2 is reflexive. Further, ,
(a, b) Î R1 Ç R2 Þ (a, b) Î R1 and (a, b) Î R2 Þ (b, a) Î R1 and (b, a) Î R2 Þ
(b, a) Î R1 Ç R2 , hence, R1 Ç R2 is symmetric. Similarly, ( a, b) Î R1 Ç R2 and
(b, c) Î R1 Ç R2 Þ (a, c) Î R1 and (a, c) Î R2 Þ (a, c) Î R1 Ç R2 . This shows that
R1 Ç R2 is transitive. Thus, R1 Ç R2 is an equivalence relation.
Example 42 Let R be a relation on the set A of ordered pairs of positive integers
defined by (x, y) R (u, v) if and only if xv = yu. Show that R is an equivalence relation.
Solution Clearly, (x, y) R (x, y), " (x, y) Î A, since xy = yx. This shows that R is
reflexive. Further, ( x, y) R (u, v) Þ xv = yu Þ uy = vx and hence (u, v) R (x, y). This
shows that R is symmetric. Similarly, ( x, y) R (u, v) and (u, v) R (a, b) Þ xv = yu and
a a b a
ub = va Þ xv = yu Þ xv = yu Þ xb = ya and hence (x, y) R (a, b). Thus, R
u u v u
is transitive. Thus, R is an equivalence relation.
Example 43 Let X = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9}. Let R 1
be a relation in X given
by R1 = {( x, y) : x – y is divisible by 3} and R 2 be another relation on X given by
R2 = {( x, y): {x, y} Ì {1, 4, 7}} or { x, y} Ì {2, 5, 8} or { x, y} Ì {3, 6, 9}}. Show that
R1 = R 2 .
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS27

Solution Note that the characteristic of sets {1, 4, 7}, {2, 5, 8} and {3, 6, 9} is
that difference between any two elements of these sets is a multiple of 3. Therefore,
(x, y) Î R1 Þ x – y is a multiple of 3 Þ {x, y} Ì {1, 4, 7} or { x, y} Ì {2, 5, 8}
or {x, y} Ì {3, 6, 9} Þ (x, y) Î R2 . Hence, R1 Ì R2 . Similarly, { x, y} Î R2 Þ {x, y}
Ì {1, 4, 7} or { x, y} Ì {2, 5, 8} or { x, y} Ì {3, 6, 9} Þ x – y is divisible by
3 Þ {x, y} Î R1 . This shows that R2 Ì R1 . Hence, R1 = R 2 .
Example 44 Let f : X ® Y be a function. Define a relation R in X given by
R = {( a, b): f(a) = f(b)}. Examine whether R is an equivalence relation or not.
Solution For every a Î X, (a, a) Î R, since f (a) = f (a), showing that R is reflexive.
Similarly, ( a, b) Î R Þ f (a) = f (b) Þ f (b) = f (a) Þ (b, a) Î R. Therefore, R is
symmetric. Further, ( a, b) Î R and (b, c) Î R Þ f (a) = f (b) and f (b) = f (c) Þ f (a)
= f (c) Þ (a, c) Î R, which implies that R is transitive. Hence, R is an equivalence
relation.
Example 45 Determine which of the following binary operations on the set R are
associative and which are commutative.
( a + b)
(a) a * b = 1 " a, b Î R (b) a * b = " a, b Î R
2
Solution
(a) Clearly, by definition a * b = b * a = 1, " a, b Î R. Also
(a * b) * c = (1 * c) =1 and a * (b * c) = a * (1) = 1, " a, b, c Î R. Hence
R is both associative and commutative.
a+b b+a
(b) a * b = = = b * a, shows that * is commutative. Further, ,
2
æa+bö
(a * b) * c = ç ÷ * c.
è 2 ø
æa+bö
ç ÷+c a+b+2 c
è 2 ø =
= .
24
æb+cö
But a * (b * c) = a * ç ÷
è 2 ø
b+c
a+
2 2 a +b +c a +b+ c
= = ¹ in general.
24
Hence, * is not associative.
 28 MATHEMATICS

Example 46 Find the number of all one-one functions from set A = {1, 2, 3} to itself.
Solution One-one function from {1, 2, 3} to itself is simply a permutation on three
symbols 1, 2, 3. Therefore, total number of one-one maps from {1, 2, 3} to itself is
same as total number of permutations on three symbols 1, 2, 3 which is 3! = 6.
Example 47 Let A = {1, 2, 3}. Then show that the number of relations containing (1, 2)
and (2, 3) which are reflexive and transitive but not symmetric is three.
Solution The smallest relation R1 containing (1, 2) and (2, 3) which is reflexive and
transitive but not symmetric is {(1, 1), (2, 2), (3, 3), (1, 2), (2, 3), (1, 3)}. Now, if we add
the pair (2, 1) to R 1 to get R2 , then the relation R2 will be reflexive, transitive but not
symmetric. Similarly, we can obtain R 3 by adding (3, 2) to R 1 to get the desired relation.
However, we can not add two pairs (2, 1), (3, 2) or single pair (3, 1) to R 1
at a time, as
by doing so, we will be forced to add the remaining pair in order to maintain transitivity
and in the process, the relation will become symmetric also which is not required. Thus,
the total number of desired relations is three.
Example 48 Show that the number of equivalence relation in the set {1, 2, 3} containing
(1, 2) and (2, 1) is two.
Solution The smallest equivalence relation R1 containing (1, 2) and (2, 1) is {(1, 1),
(2, 2), (3, 3), (1, 2), (2, 1)}. Now we are left with only 4 pairs namely (2, 3), (3, 2),
(1, 3) and (3, 1). If we add any one, say (2, 3) to R 1
, then for symmetry we must add
(3, 2) also and now for transitivity we are forced to add (1, 3) and (3, 1). Thus, the only
equivalence relation bigger than R1 is the universal relation. This shows that the total
number of equivalence relations containing (1, 2) and (2, 1) is two.
Example 49 Show that the number of binary operations on {1, 2} having 1 as identity
and having 2 as the inverse of 2 is exactly one.
Solution A binary operation * on {1, 2} is a function from {1, 2} × {1, 2} to {1, 2}, i.e.,
a function from {(1, 1), (1, 2), (2, 1), (2, 2)} ® {1, 2}. Since 1 is the identity for the
desired binary operation *, * (1, 1) = 1, * (1, 2) = 2, * (2, 1) = 2 and the only choice
left is for the pair (2, 2). Since 2 is the inverse of 2, i.e., * (2, 2) must be equal to 1. Thus,
the number of desired binary operation is only one.
Example 50 Consider the identity function IN : N ® N defined as IN (x) = x " x Î N.
Show that although I N is onto but IN + I N : N ® N defined as
(IN + I N) (x) = I N (x) + I N (x) = x + x = 2 x is not onto.
Solution Clearly IN is onto. But IN + I N is not onto, as we can find an element 3
in the co-domain N such that there does not exist any x in the domain N with
(IN + I N) (x) = 2 x = 3.
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS29

p
Example 51 Consider a function f : éê0, ùú ® R given by f (x) = sin x and
ë 2 û

pù
g : éê,0 ® R given by g(x) = cos x. Show that f and g are one-one, but f + g is not
ë 2 úû
one-one.
é pù
Solution Since for any two distinct elements x1 and x2 in ê0, ú , sin x1 ¹ sin x2 and
ë 2 û
cos x1 ¹ cos x2 , both f and g must be one-one. But (f + g) (0) = sin 0 + cos 0 = 1 and
æ pö p p
(f + g) ç ÷ = sin + cos = 1 . Therefore, f + g is not one-one.
è2 ø 2

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 1

1. Let f : R ® R be defined as f (x) = 10 x + 7. Find the function g : R ® R such
that g o f = f o g = 1 R.
2. Let f : W ® W be defined as f (n) = n – 1, if n is odd and f (n) = n + 1, if n is
even. Show that f is invertible. Find the inverse of f. Here, W is the set of all
whole numbers.
3. If f : R ® R is defined by f(x) = x2 – 3 x + 2, find f (f (x)).

x
4. Show that the function f : R ® {x Î R : – 1 < x < 1} defined by f ( x) = ,
1| + x
x Î R is one one and onto function.
5. Show that the function f : R ® R given by f (x) = x3 is injective.
6. Give examples of two functions f : N ® Z and g : Z ® Z such that g o f is
injective but g is not injective.
(Hint : Consider f (x) = x and g (x) = | x |).
7. Give examples of two functions f : N ® N and g : N ® N such that g o f is onto
but f is not onto.

ì x - 1if x >1
(Hint : Consider f (x) = x + 1 and g ( x) = í
î 1if 1x =
8. Given a non empty set X, consider P(X) which is the set of all subsets of X.
30 MATHEMATICS

Define the relation R in P(X) as follows:

For subsets A, B in P(X), ARB if and only if A Ì B. Is R an equivalence relation
on P(X)? Justify your answer.
9. Given a non-empty set X, consider the binary operation * : P(X) × P(X) ® P(X)
given by A * B = A Ç B " A, B in P(X), where P(X) is the power set of X.
Show that X is the identity element for this operation and X is the only invertible
element in P(X) with respect to the operation *.
10. Find the number of all onto functions from the set {1, 2, 3, ... , n} to itself.
11. Let S = { a, b, c} and T = {1, 2, 3}. Find F – 1
of the following functions F from S
to T, if it exists.
(i) F = {( a, 3), ( b, 2), ( c, 1)} (ii) F = {( a, 2), ( b, 1), ( c, 1)}
12. Consider the binary operations * : R × R ® R and o : R × R ® R defined as
a *b = | a – b| and a o b = a, " a, b Î R. Show that * is commutative but not
associative, o is associative but not commutative. Further, show that " a, b, c Î R,
a * (b o c) = ( a * b) o (a * c). [If it is so, we say that the operation * distributes
over the operation o]. Does o distribute over *? Justify your answer.
13. Gi ven a non-empty set X, let * : P( X) × P( X) ® P( X) be defined as
A * B = (A – B) È (B – A), " A, B Î P(X). Show that the empty set f is the
identity for the operation * and all the elements A of P(X) are invertible with
A– 1 = A. (Hint : (A – f) È (f – A) = A and (A – A) È (A – A) = A * A = f).
14. Define a binary operation * on the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5} as
ìa + b, if a + b < 6
a *b = í
îa + b - 6 if a + b 6 ³
Show that zero is the identity for this operation and each element a ¹ 0 of the set
is invertible with 6 – a being the inverse of a.
15. Let A = { – 1, 0, 1, 2}, B = { – 4, – 2, 0, 2} and f, g : A ® B be functions defined
1
by f (x) = x2 – x, x Î A and g ( x) = 21, x - - x Î A. Are f and g equal?
2
Justify your answer. (Hint: One may note that two functions f : A ® B and
g : A ® B such that f (a) = g (a) " a Î A, are called equal functions).
16. Let A = {1, 2, 3}. Then number of relations containing (1, 2) and (1, 3) which are
reflexive and symmetric but not transitive is
(A) 1(B) 2(C) 3(D) 4
17. Let A = {1, 2, 3}. Then number of equivalence relations containing (1, 2) is
(A) 1(B) 2(C) 3(D) 4
 RELATIONS AND FUNCTIONS31

18. Let f : R ® R be the Signum Function defined as

ì 1, x >0
ï
f ( x) = í 0, x =0
ï-1, x <0
î
and g : R ® R be the Greatest Integer Function given by g (x) = [ x], where [ x] is
greatest integer less than or equal to x. Then, does fog and gof coincide in (0, 1]?
19. Number of binary operations on the set { a, b} are
(A) 10(B) 16(C) 20(D ) 8

Summary
In this chapter, we studied different types of relations and equivalence relation,
composition of functions, invertible functions and binary operations. The main features
of this chapter are as follows:
® Empty relation is the relation R in X given by R = f Ì X × X.
® Universal relation is the relation R in X given by R = X × X.
® Reflexive relation R in X is a relation with (a, a) Î R " a Î X.
® Symmetric relation R in X is a relation satisfying (a, b) Î R implies (b, a) Î R.
® Transitive relation R in X is a relation satisfying (a, b) Î R and (b, c) Î R
implies that (a, c) Î R.
® Equivalence relation R in X is a relation which is reflexive, symmetric and
transitive.
® Equivalence class [ a] containing a Î X for an equivalence relation R in X is
the subset of X containing all elements b related to a.
® A function f : X ® Y is one-one (or injective) if
f (x1 ) = f (x2 ) Þ x1 = x2 " x1 , x2 Î X.
® A function f : X ® Y is onto (or surjective) if given any y Î Y, $ x Î X such
that f (x) = y.
® A function f : X ® Y is one-one and onto (or bijective), if f is both one-one
and onto.
® The composition of functions f : A ® B and g : B ® C is the function
gof : A ® C given by gof (x) = g(f (x)) " x Î A.
® A function f : X ® Y is invertible if $ g : Y ® X such that gof = I X and
fog = I Y .
® A function f : X ® Y is invertible if and only if f is one-one and onto.
32 MATHEMATICS

® Given a finite set X, a function f : X ® X is one-one (respectively onto) if and

only if f is onto (respectively one-one). This is the characteristic property of a
finite set. This is not true for infinite set
® A binary operation * on a set A is a function * from A × A to A.
® An element e Î X is the identity element for binary operation * : X × X ® X,
if a * e = a = e * a " a Î X.
® An element a Î X is invertible for binary operation * : X × X ® X, if
there exists b Î X such that a * b = e = b * a where, e is the identity for the
binary operation *. The element b is called inverse of a and is denoted by a– 1 .
® An operation * on X is commutative if a * b = b * a " a, b in X.
® An operation * on X is associative if (a * b) * c = a * (b * c) " a, b, c in X.

Historical Note
The concept of function has evolved over a long period of time starting from
R. Descartes (1596-1650), who used the word ‘function’ in his manuscript
“ Geometrie” in 1637 to mean some positive integral power xn of a variable x
while studying geometrical curves like hyperbola, parabola and ellipse. James
Gregory (163-1675) in his work “ Vera Circuli et Hyperbolae Quadratura”
(167) considered function as a quantity obtained from other quantities by
successive use of algebraic operations or by any other operations. Later G. W.
Leibnitz (164-176) in his manuscript “ Methodus tangentium inversa, seu de
functionibus” written in 1673 used the word ‘function’ to mean a quantity varying
from point to point on a curve such as the coordinates of a point on the curve, the
slope of the curve, the tangent and the normal to the curve at a point. However,
in his manuscript “ Historia” (1714), Leibnitz used the word ‘function’ to mean
quantities that depend on a variable. He was the first to use the phrase ‘function
of x’. John Bernoulli (167-1748) used the notation fx for the first time in 178 to
indicate a function of x. But the general adoption of symbols like f, F, f, y ... to
represent functions was made by Leonhard Euler (170-1783) in 1734 in the first
part of his manuscript “ Analysis Infinitorium” . Later on, Joeph Louis Lagrange
(1736-183) published his manuscripts “ Theorie des functions analytiques” in
1793, where he discussed about analytic function and used the notion f (x), F( x),
f(x) etc. for different function of x. Subsequently, Lejeunne Dirichlet
(1805-1859) gave the definition of function which was being used till the set
theoretic definition of function presently used, was given after set theory was
developed by Georg Cantor (1845-198). The set theoretic definition of function
known to us presently is simply an abstraction of the definition given by Dirichlet
in a rigorous manner.
—v—
 Chapter 2
INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC
FUNCTIONS
v Mathematics, in general, is fundamentally the science of
self-evident things. — FELIX KLEIN v
2.1 Introduction
In Chapter 1, we have studied that the inverse of a function
f, denoted by f –1, exists if f is one-one and onto. There are
many functions which are not one-one, onto or both and
hence we can not talk of their inverses. In Class XI, we
studied that trigonometric functions are not one-one and
onto over their natural domains and ranges and hence their
inverses do not exist. In this chapter, we shall study about
the restrictions on domains and ranges of trigonometric
functions which ensure the existence of their inverses and
observe their behaviour through graphical representations.
Besides, some elementary properties will also be discussed.
The inverse trigonometric functions play an important Arya Bhatta
(476-550 A. D.)
role in calculus for they serve to define many integrals.
The concepts of inverse trigonometric functions is also used in science and engineering.
2.2 Basic Concepts
In Class XI, we have studied trigonometric functions, which are defined as follows:
sine function, i.e., sine : R ® [– 1, 1]
cosine function, i.e., cos : R ® [– 1, 1]
p
tangent function, i.e., tan : R – { x : x = (2n + 1) , n Î Z} ® R
2
cotangent function, i.e., cot : R – { x : x = np, n Î Z} ® R
p
secant function, i.e., sec : R – { x : x = (2n + 1) , n Î Z} ® R – (– 1, 1)
2
cosecant function, i.e., cosec : R – { x : x = np, n Î Z} ® R – (– 1, 1)
34M AT HEM AT ICS

We have also learnt in Chapter 1 that if f : X®Y such that f (x) = y is one-one and
onto, then we can define a unique function g : Y ®X such that g (y) = x, where x Î X
and y = f (x), y Î Y. Here, the domain of g = range of f and the range of g = domain
of f. The function g is called the inverse of f and is denoted by f –1. Further, g is also
one-one and onto and inverse of g is f. Thus, g –1 = (f –1)–1 = f. We also have
(f –1 o f ) (x) = f –1 (f (x)) = f –1(y) = x
and (f o f –1) (y) = f (f –1(y)) = f (x) = y
Since the domain of sine function is the set of all real numbers and range is the
é-p pù
closed interval [–1, 1]. If we restrict its domain to ê , ú , then it becomes one-one
ë 2 2û
and onto with range [– 1, 1]. Actually, sine function restricted to any of the intervals
é -3 p – p ù , é -p p ù , é p , 3 p ù etc., is one-one and its range is [–1, 1]. We can,
êë 2 , 2 úû êë 2 , 2 úû êë 2 2 úû
therefore, define the inverse of sine function in each of these intervals. We denote the
inverse of sine function by sin–1 (arc sine function). Thus, sin–1 is a function whose
é -3 p -p ù é -p p ù
domain is [– 1, 1] and range could be any of the intervals ê , , , or
ë 2 2 úû êë 2 2 úû
ép 3 pù
ê 2 , 2 ú , and so on. Corresponding to each such interval, we get a branch of the
ë û
é -p p ù
function sin–1. The branch with range ê , ú is called the principal value branch,
ë 2 2û
whereas other intervals as range give different branches of sin–1. When we refer
to the function sin–1, we take it as the function whose domain is [–1, 1] and range is
é -p p ù é -p p ù
êë 2 , 2 úû . We write sin
–1
: [–1, 1] ® ê , ú
ë 2 2û
From the definition of the inverse functions, it follows that sin (sin –1 x) = x
p p
if – 1 £ x £ 1 and sin–1 (sin x) = x if - £ x £ . In other words, if y = sin–1 x, then
2 2
sin y = x.
Remarks
(i) We know from Chapter 1, that if y = f (x) is an invertible function, then x = f –1 (y).
Thus, the graph of sin–1 function can be obtained from the graph of original
function by interchanging x and y axes, i.e., if (a, b) is a point on the graph of
sine function, then (b, a) becomes the corresponding point on the graph of inverse
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 35

of sine function. Thus, the graph of the function y = sin–1 x can be obtained from
the graph of y = sin x by interchanging x and y axes. The graphs of y = sin x and
y = sin–1 x are as given in Fig 2.1 (i), (ii), (iii). The dark portion of the graph of
y = sin–1 x represent the principal value branch.
(ii) It can be shown that the graph of an inverse function can be obtained from the
corresponding graph of original function as a mirror image (i.e., reflection) along
the line y = x. This can be visualised by looking the graphs of y = sin x and
y = sin–1 x as given in the same axes (Fig 2.1 (iii)).

Fig 2.1 (i)

Fig 2.1 (ii) Fig 2.1 (iii)

Like sine function, the cosine function is a function whose domain is the set of all
real numbers and range is the set [–1, 1]. If we restrict the domain of cosine function
to [0, p], then it becomes one-one and onto with range [–1, 1]. Actually, cosine function
36M AT HEM AT ICS

restricted to any of the intervals [– p, 0], [0, p], [p, 2p] etc., is bijective with range as
[–1, 1]. We can, therefore, define the inverse of cosine function in each of these
intervals. We denote the inverse of the cosine function by cos –1 (arc cosine function).
Thus, cos–1 is a function whose domain is [–1, 1] and range
could be any of the intervals [–p, 0] , [0, p], [p, 2p] etc.
Corresponding to each such interval, we get a branch of the
function cos–1. The branch with range [0, p] is called the principal
value branch of the function cos–1. We write
cos–1 : [–1, 1] ® [0, p].
The graph of the function given by y = cos–1 x can be drawn
in the same way as discussed about the graph of y = sin–1 x. The
graphs of y = cos x and y = cos–1 x are given in Fig 2.2 (i) and (ii).

Fig 2.2 (i) Fig 2.2 (ii)

Let us now discuss cosec –1x and sec–1x as follows:

1
Since, cosec x = , the domain of the cosec function is the set {x : x Î R and
sin x
x ¹ np, n Î Z} and the range is the set {y : y Î R, y ³ 1 or y £ –1} i.e., the set
R – (–1, 1). It means that y = cosec x assumes all real values except –1 < y < 1 and is
not defined for integral multiple of p. If we restrict the domain of cosec function to
é p pù
êë - 2 , 2 úû – {0}, then it is one to one and onto with its range as the set R – (– 1, 1). Actually, ,
é -3 p -p ù é -p p ù
cosec function restricted to any of the intervals ê , ú - {-p} , ê , ú – {0},
ë 2 2 û ë 2 2û
ép 3 pù
ê 2 , 2 ú - {p} etc., is bijective and its range is the set of all real numbers R – (–1, 1).
ë û
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 37

Thus cosec–1 can be defined as a function whose domain is R – (–1, 1) and range could
é -p p ù é -3 p -p ù
be any of the intervals ê , ú - {0} , ê , ú - {-p} , é p , 3 p ù - {p} etc. The
ë 2 2 û ë 2 2 û êë 2 2 úû
é -p p ù
function corresponding to the range ê , ú - {0} is called the principal value branch
ë 2 2û
of cosec–1. We thus have principal branch as
é -p p ù
cosec–1 : R – (–1, 1) ® ê , ú - {0}
ë 2 2û
The graphs of y = cosec x and y = cosec x are given in Fig 2.3 (i), (ii).
–1

Fig 2.3 (i) Fig 2.3 (ii)

1 p
Also, since sec x = , the domain of y = sec x is the set R – {x : x = (2n + 1) ,
cos x 2
n Î Z} and range is the set R – (–1, 1). It means that sec (secant function) assumes
p
all real values except –1 < y < 1 and is not defined for odd multiples of . If we
2
p
restrict the domain of secant function to [0, p] – { }, then it is one-one and onto with
2
38M AT HEM AT ICS

its range as the set R – (–1, 1). Actually, secant function restricted to any of the
-p ìpü 3 p
intervals [–p, 0] – { }, [0, p] – í ý , [p, 2p] – { } etc., is bijective and its range
2 î2þ 2
is R – {–1, 1}. Thus sec can be defined as a function whose domain is R– (–1, 1) and
–1

-p p 3 p
range could be any of the intervals [– p, 0] – { }, [0, p] – { }, [p, 2p] – { } etc.
2 2 2
Corresponding to each of these intervals, we get different branches of the function sec–1.
p
The branch with range [0, p] – { } is called the principal value branch of the
2
function sec–1. We thus have
p
sec–1 : R – (–1,1) ® [0, p] – { }
2
The graphs of the functions y = sec x and y = sec-1 x are given in Fig 2.4 (i), (ii).

Fig 2.4 (i) Fig 2.4 (ii)

Finally, we now discuss tan –1 and cot–1

We know that the domain of the tan function (tangent function) is the set
p
{x : x Î R and x ¹ (2n +1) , n Î Z} and the range is R. It means that tan function
2
p
is not defined for odd multiples of . If we restrict the domain of tangent function to
2
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 39

æ -p p ö
ç , ÷ , then it is one-one and onto with its range as R. Actually, tangent function
è 2 2 ø
æ -3 p -p ö æ -p p ö æ p 3 p ö
restricted to any of the intervals ç , ÷ , ç , ÷, ç , ÷ etc., is bijective
è 2 2 ø è 2 2ø è2 2 ø
and its range is R. Thus tan–1 can be defined as a function whose domain is R and
æ -3 p -p ö æ -p p ö æ p 3 p ö
range could be any of the intervals ç , ÷, ç , ÷ , ç , ÷ and so on. These
è 2 2 ø è 2 2ø è2 2 ø
æ -p p ö
intervals give different branches of the function tan–1. The branch with range ç , ÷
è 2 2ø
is called the principal value branch of the function tan–1.
We thus have
æ -p p ö
tan–1 : R ® ç , ÷
è 2 2ø
The graphs of the function y = tan x and y = tan–1x are given in Fig 2.5 (i), (ii).

Fig 2.5 (i) Fig 2.5 (ii)

We know that domain of the cot function (cotangent function) is the set
{x : x Î R and x ¹ np, n Î Z} and range is R. It means that cotangent function is not
defined for integral multiples of p. If we restrict the domain of cotangent function to
(0, p), then it is bijective with and its range as R. In fact, cotangent function restricted
to any of the intervals (–p, 0), (0, p), (p, 2p) etc., is bijective and its range is R. Thus
cot –1 can be defined as a function whose domain is the R and range as any of the
40M AT HEM AT ICS

intervals (–p, 0), (0, p), (p, 2p) etc. These intervals give different branches of the
function cot –1. The function with range (0, p) is called the principal value branch of
the function cot –1. We thus have
cot–1 : R ® (0, p)
The graphs of y = cot x and y = cot–1x are given in Fig 2.6 (i), (ii).

Fig 2.6 (i) Fig 2.6 (ii)

The following table gives the inverse trigonometric function (principal value
branches) along with their domains and ranges.
é p pù
sin–1 : [–1, 1] ® ê- 2 , 2 ú
ë û
cos –1 : [–1, 1] ® [0, p]

é p pù
cosec –1 : R – (–1,1) ® ê- 2 , 2 ú – {0}
ë û
p
sec –1 : R – (–1, 1) ® [0, p] – { }
2
æ -p p ö
tan –1 : R ® ç 2 ,2÷
è ø
cot –1 : R ® (0, p)
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 41

A Note 1
1. sin–1x should not be confused with (sin x)–1. In fact (sin x)–1 = and
sin x
similarly for other trigonometric functions.
2. Whenever no branch of an inverse trigonometric functions is mentioned, we
mean the principal value branch of that function.
3. The value of an inverse trigonometric functions which lies in the range of
principal branch is called the principal value of that inverse trigonometric
functions.
We now consider some examples:
æ 1 ö
Example 1 Find the principal value of sin ç
–1
÷.
è 2ø
æ 1 ö 1
Solution Let sin –1
ç ÷ = y. Then, sin y = .
è 2ø 2
æ -p p ö
We know that the range of the principal value branch of sin –1
is ç , ÷ and
è 2 2ø
æpö 1 æ 1 ö p
sin ç ÷ = . Therefore, principal value of sin–1 ç ÷ is
è4 ø 2 è 2ø 4
æ -1 ö
Example 2 Find the principal value of cot –1 ç ÷
è 3 ø
æ -1 ö
Solution Let cot –1 ç ÷ = y. Then,
è 3 ø
-1 æpö æ pö æ 2p ö
cot y = = - cot ç ÷ = cot ç p - ÷ = cot ç ÷
3 è3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø
We know that the range of principal value branch of cot –1 is (0, p) and
æ 2 p ö -1 æ -1 ö 2p
cot ç ÷ = . Hence, principal value of cot –1 ç ÷ is
è 3 ø 3 è 3 ø 3

EXERCISE 2.1
Find the principal values of the following:

æ 1ö æ 3 ö
1. sin–1 ç - ÷ 2. cos–1 çç 2 ÷÷ 3. cosec–1 (2)
è 2ø è ø

æ 1ö
4. tan–1 (- 3) 5. cos–1 ç - ÷ 6. tan–1 (–1)
è 2ø
42 MAT HEM AT ICS

æ 2 ö æ 1 ö
7. sec–1 ç ÷ 8. cot–1 ( 3) 9. cos–1 ç - ÷
è 3 ø è 2ø
10. cosec–1 ( - 2 )
Find the values of the following:
æ 1ö æ 1ö æ 1ö æ 1ö
11. tan–1(1) + cos–1 ç - ÷ + sin–1 ç - ÷ 12. cos–1 ç ÷ + 2 sin–1 ç ÷
è 2ø è ø 2 è 2ø è 2ø
13. If sin–1 x = y, then
p p
(A) 0 £y£p (B) - £ y£
2 2
p p
(C) 0 < y< p (D) - < y<
2 2
-1
14. tan–1 -
3sec 2- is equal to

p p 2p
(A) p (B) - (C) (D)
3 3 3
2.3 Properties of Inverse Trigonometric Functions
In this section, we shall prove some important properties of inverse trigonometric
functions. It may be mentioned here that these results are valid within the principal
value branches of the corresponding inverse trigonometric functions and wherever
they are defined. Some results may not be valid for all values of the domains of inverse
trigonometric functions. In fact, they will be valid only for some values of x for which
inverse trigonometric functions are defined. We will not go into the details of these
values of x in the domain as this discussion goes beyond the scope of this text book.
Let us recall that if y = sin–1x, then x = sin y and if x = sin y, then y = sin–1x. This is
equivalent to
é p pù
sin (sin–1 x) = x, x Î [– 1, 1] and sin–1 (sin x) = x, x Î ê - , ú
ë 2 2û
Same is true for other five inverse trigonometric functions as well. We now prove
some properties of inverse trigonometric functions.
1
1. (i) sin–1 = cosec–1 x, x ³ 1 or x £ – 1
x
1
(ii) cos–1 = sec–1x, x ³ 1 or x £ – 1
x
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 43

1
(iii) tan–1 = cot–1 x, x > 0
x
To prove the first result, we put cosec –1 x = y, i.e., x = cosec y
1
Therefore = sin y
x
1
He nce sin –1 = y
x
1
or sin–1 = cosec–1 x
x
Similarly, we can prove the other parts.
2. (i) sin–1 (–x) = – sin–1 x, x Î [– 1, 1]
(ii) tan–1 (–x) = – tan–1 x, x Î R
(iii) cosec–1 (–x) = – cosec–1 x, | x | ³ 1
Let sin –1 (–x) = y, i.e., –x = sin y so that x = – sin y, i.e., x = sin (–y).
He nce sin –1 x = – y = – sin–1 (–x)
Therefore sin–1 (–x) = – sin–1x
Similarly, we can prove the other parts.
3. (i) cos–1 (–x) = p – cos–1 x, x Î [– 1, 1]
(ii) sec–1 (–x) = p – sec–1 x, | x | ³ 1
(iii) cot–1 (–x) = p – cot–1 x, x Î R
Let cos –1 (–x) = y i.e., – x = cos y so that x = – cos y = cos (p – y)
Therefore cos–1 x = p – y = p – cos–1 (–x)
He nce cos –1 (–x) = p – cos–1 x
Similarly, we can prove the other parts.
p
4. (i) sin–1 x + cos–1 x = , x Î [– 1, 1]
2
p
(ii) tan–1 x + cot–1 x = , x Î R
2
p
(iii) cosec–1 x + sec–1 x = , |x| ³ 1
2
æp ö
Let sin –1 x = y. Then x = sin y = cos ç - y ÷
è2 ø
p p
Therefore cos–1 x = -y = - sin –1 x
2 2
4M AT HEM AT ICS

p
He nce sin –1
x + cos–1 x =
2
Similarly, we can prove the other parts.
x+ y
5. (i) tan–1x + tan–1 y = tan–1 , xy < 1
1 – xy

x– y
(ii) tan–1x – tan–1 y = tan–1 , xy > – 1
1 + xy

Let tan –1
x = q and tan–1 y = f. Then x = tan q, y = tan f
tan q + tan f x + y
Now tan( q+ f) = =
1 - tan q tan f 1- xy

x+ y
This gives q + f = tan–1 1- xy

x+ y
He nce tan –1
x + tan–1 y = tan–1 1- xy

In the above result, if we replace y by – y, we get the second result and by replacing
y by x, we get the third result as given below.

2x
6. (i) 2tan–1 x = sin–1 , |x| £ 1
1 + x2

1 – x2
(ii) 2tan–1 x = cos–1 ,x³0
1 + x2

2x
(iii) 2 tan–1 x = tan–1 ,–1<x<1
1 – x2

Let tan –1
x = y, then x = tan y. Now
2x 2 tan y
sin–1 2 = sin 1 + tan 2 y
–1
1+ x
= sin–1 (sin 2y) = 2y = 2tan–1 x
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 45

1 - x2 1- tan 2 y
Also cos –1
= cos –1
= cos–1 (cos 2y) = 2y = 2tan–1 x
1 + x2 1 + tan 2 y
(iii) Can be worked out similarly.
We now consider some examples.

Example 3 Show that

1 1
(i) sin–1 2 x 1 - x 2 = 2 sin–1 x, - £x£
2 2
1
(ii) sin–1 2 x 1 - x 2 = 2 cos–1 x, £ x £1
2
Solution
(i) Let x = sin q. Then sin–1 x = q. We have
sin–1 2 x 1 - x 2 = sin–1 2sin q 1 - sin 2 q

= sin–1 (2sinq cosq) = sin–1 (sin2q) = 2q

= 2 sin–1 x
(ii) Take x = cos q, then proceeding as above, we get, sin–1 2 x 1 - x 2 = 2 cos–1 x
1 2 3
Example 4 Show that tan + tan –1 = tan –1
–1
2 11 4
Solution By property 5 (i), we have

1 2
+ 3
1 2 15
= tan –1 2 11 = tan -1
-1
L.H.S. = tan –1 + tan –1 = tan = R.H.S.
2 11 1 2 20 4
1- ´
2 11

æ cos x ö - 3 p p
Example 5 Express tan -1 ç , < x < in the simplest form.
è 1 - sin x ÷ø 2 2
Solution We write

é x x ù
ê cos 2 - sin 2 ú
æ cos x ö 2 2
tan -1 ç –1
÷ = tan ê ú
è 1 - sin x ø ê cos + sin - 2sin x cos x
2 x 2 x
ú
ë 2 2 2 2 û
46M AT HEM AT ICS

éæ x x öæ x x öù
ê ç cos 2 + sin 2 ÷ç cos 2 - sin 2 ÷ ú
–1 è øè øú
= tan ê
ê æ x x ö 2 ú
êë ç cos - sin ÷ úû
è 2 2ø

éx xù é xù
cos + sin ú 1 + tan ú
–1 ê2 2 = tan –1 ê 2
= tan ê ú ê ú
x x
ê cos - sin ú ê1 - tan x ú
ë 2 2û ë 2û

–1 é æ p x öù p x
= tan ê tan ç + ÷ú = +
ë è 42 øû42
Alternatively,

é æp ö ù é æ p - 2x ö ù
æ cos x ö ê sin ç 2 - x ÷ ú ê sin ç 2 ÷ ú
è ø è ø ú
tan –1 ç ÷ = tan ê ú = tan –1 ê
–1

è 1 - sin x ø ê1 - cos æ p - x ö ú ê1 - cos æ p - 2 x ö ú

êë ç2 ÷ úû êë ç 2 ÷ú
è ø è øû

é æ p - 2x ö æ p - 2x ö ù
ê 2sin ç 4 ÷ cos ç ÷ú
tan –1
ê è ø è øú
= p -
ê æ 2 x ö ú
êë 2sin 2 ç ÷ úû
è 4 ø

–1 é æ p - 2 x ö ù = tan –1 é tan æ p - p - 2 x ö ù
= tan ê cot ç ÷ú ê ç2 ÷ú
ë è 4 øû ë è 4 øû

–1 é æp x öù p x
= tan ê tan ç + ÷ú = +
ë è 42 øû 24

æ 1 ö
Example 6 Write cot –1 ç ÷ , x > 1 in the simplest form.
2
è x -1 ø

Solution Let x = sec q, then x2 - 1 = sec 2 q - 1 = tan q

 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 47

–1 1
Therefore, cot = cot–1 (cot q) = q = sec–1 x, which is the simplest form.
x2 - 1

–1 2x æ 3 x - x3 ö 1
Example 7 Prove that tan –1
x + tan = tan–1 ç 2 ÷, | x <
1 - x2 è 1 - 3 x ø 3
Solution Let x = tan q. Then q = tan–1 x. We have

æ 3tan ö
x - x 3 tan æ q- qö
R.H.S. = tan –1 ç 2 ÷
= tan –1 ç 2 ÷
è 1 - 31 x 3tan
ø è - q ø
= tan–1 (tan3 q) = 3 q = 3tan –1
x = tan–1 x + 2 tan–1 x
2x
= tan–1 x + tan–1
= L.H.S. (Why?)
1 - x2
Example 8 Find the value of cos (sec –1 x + cosec–1 x), | x | ³ 1
æ pö
Solution We have cos (sec –1
x + cosec–1 x) = cos ç ÷ = 0
è 2ø

EXERCISE 2.2
Prove the following:
é 1 1ù
1. 3sin –1
x = sin–1 (3 x – 4 x3 ), x Î ê – , ú
ë 2 2û
é1 ù
2. 3cos –1
x = cos–1 (4 x3 – 3 x), x Î ê , 1ú
ë2 û
2 71
3. tan–1 + tan -1 = tan -1
11 242
-1 1 1 31
4. 2 tan + tan -1 = tan -1
2 717
Write the following functions in the simplest form:

1 + x2 - 1 1
5. tan -1 ,x¹0 6. tan -1 , | x| > 1
x x2 - 1
æ 1 - cos x ö æ cos x - sin x ö
7. tan -1 çç ÷÷ , 0 < x< p 8. tan -1 ç ÷, 0 < x< p
è 1 + cos x ø è cos x + sin x ø
48M AT HEM AT ICS

x
9. tan -1 , | x| < a
a2 - x2

æ 3 a2 x - x3 ö -a a
10. tan -1 ç 32 ÷ , a > 0; <x<
è a - 3 ax ø 3
Find the values of each of the following:
é æ 1 öù
11. tan –1 ê 2 cos ç 2sin –1 ÷ ú 12. cot (tan–1a + cot–1a)
ë è 2 øû

1é 2x –1 1 - y ù
2

13. tan êsin –1 + cos ú , | x | < 1, y > 0 and xy < 1

2ë 1 + x2 1 + y2 û

æ –1 1 ö
14. If sin ç sin + cos –1 x ÷ =1 , then find the value of x
è 5 ø
–1 x -1 x +1 p
15. If tan + tan –1 = , then find the value of x
x-2 x+2 4
Find the values of each of the expressions in Exercises 16 to 18.
–1 æ 2p ö æ 3 pö
16. sin ç sin ÷ 17. tan –1 ç tan ÷
è 3 ø è 4 ø
æ 3 ö
18. tan ç sin –1 + cot –1 ÷
è 2
5 ø
-1 æ 7 pö
19. cos ç cos ÷ is equal to
è 6 ø
7 p 5 p p p
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6 6 3 6
æp 1 ö
20. sin ç - sin -1 ( - ) ÷ is equal to
è 32 ø
1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1
2 3 4
21. tan -1 3cot- ( -1
3)- is equal to
p
(A) p (B) - (C) 0(D) 2 3
2
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 49

Miscellaneous Examples

-1 3 p
Example 9 Find the value of sin (sin )
5

-1 3 p p
Solution We know that sin -1 (sin x) = x . Therefore, sin (sin )=
5
3 p é p pù
But Ï - , ú , which is the principal branch of sin–1 x
52 2 êë û
32p p p 2p é p p ù
However sin ( ) = sin( p - ) = sin and Î - , ú
5 25 2 êë û

32p 2 -1 p p
Therefore sin -1 (sin ) = sin (sin ) =
5
384
Example 10 Show that sin -1 - sin -1 = cos -1
51785
3 8
Solution Let sin -1 = x and sin -1 =y
5 17

3 8
Therefore sin x = and sin y =
5 17

49
Now cos x = 1 - sin 2 x = 1 - = (Why?)
255

416 5
and cos y = 1 - sin 2 y = 1 - =
28917
We have cos ( x–y) = cos x cos y + sin x sin y
14 5384
= ´ + ´ =
51751785
æ 84 ö
Therefore x - y = cos -1 ç ÷ø
è 85
384
He nce sin -1 - sin -1 = cos -1
51785
50M AT HEM AT ICS

12 463
Example 11 Show that sin -1 + cos -1 + tan -1 =p
13516

12 463
Solution Let sin -1 = x, cos -1 = y , tan -1 =z
13516

12 463
Then sin x = , cos y = , tan z =
13516

5 2
31 3
Therefore cos x = , sin y = , tan x = and tan y =
1354
12 3
+
tan x + tan y 4 5 36
We have tan( x + y ) = = =-
1 - tan x tan y 1- 12 ´ 3 16
54
He nce tan( x + y ) = - tan z
i.e., tan (x + y) = tan (–z) or tan (x + y) = tan (p – z)
Therefore x + y = – z or x + y = p – z
Since x, y and z are positive, x + y ¹ – z (Why?)

–1 12 634
He nce x + y + z = p or sin + cos –1 + tan –1 =p
13516

–1 é a cos x - b sin x ù a
Example 12 Simplify tan ê ú , if tan x > –1
ë b cos x + a sin x û b

Solution We have,

é a cos x - b sin x ù é a ù
é a cos x - b sin x ù ê ú ê - tan x ú
tan ê –1 –1 b cos x –1 b
b cos x + a sin x ú = tan ê b cos x + a sin x ú = tan ê a ú
ë û ê ú ê1 + tan x ú
ë b cos x û ë b û

–1 a a
= tan - tan –1 (tan x ) = tan –1 - x
b b
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 51

p
Example 13 Solve tan –1
2x + tan–1 3 x =
4
p
Solution We have tan –1
2x + tan–1 3 x =
4
æ 2x + 3 x ö p
or tan –1 ç ÷ =
è 1 - 2x´3 x ø 4

æ 5 x ö p
i.e. tan –1 ç 2 ÷ =
è1- 6 x ø 4
5 x p
Therefore 2 = tan =1
1- 6 x 4
or 6 x2 + 5 x – 1 = 0 i.e., (6 x – 1) (x + 1) = 0
1
which gives x=
or x = – 1.
6
Since x = – 1 does not satisfy the equation, as the L.H.S. of the equation becomes
1
negative, x = is the only solution of the given equation.
6

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 2

Find the value of the following:

–1 æ 13 p ö æ 7 pö
1. cos ç cos ÷ 2. tan –1 ç tan ÷
è 6 ø è 6 ø
Prove that
–1 324 378
3. 2sin = tan –1 4. sin
–1
+ sin –1 = tan –1
57 17536

–1 412 3 12 356
5. cos + cos –1 = cos –1 6. cos
–1
+ sin –1 = sin –1
51365 1356
356
7. tan –1 = sin –1 + cos –1
16135
1 1 1 1 p
8. tan –1 + tan -1 + tan -1 + tan -1 =
57384
52 MAT HEM AT ICS

Prove that
1 æ 1 - xö
9. tan –1 x = cos –1 ç , x Î [0, 1]
2 è 1 + x ÷ø

æ 1 + sin x + 1 - sin x ö x æ pö
10. cot –1 çç ÷÷ = , x Î çè 0, 4 ÷ø
è 1 + sin x - 1 - sin x ø 2

æ 1+ x - 1- x ö p 1 1
11. tan –1 çç –1
÷÷ = - cos x , - £ x £ 1 [Hint: Put x = cos 2q]
è 1 + x + 1 - x ø 42 2

91 p 92 2 -1
12. - sin = sin -1
843
Solve the following equations:
1 - x 1 –1
13. 2tan–1 (cos x) = tan–1 (2 cosec x) 14. tan –1 = tan x,( x > 0)
1+ x 2
15. sin (tan–1 x), | x | < 1 is equal to
x 1 1 x
(A) (B) 2
(C) (D)
1- x 2
1- x 1+ x 2
1 + x2

p
16. sin–1 (1 – x) – 2 sin–1 x = , then x is equal to
2

1 1 1
(A) 0, (B) 1, (C) 0(D)
2 2 2

æxö x-y
17. tan -1 ç ÷ - tan -1
èyø x + y is equal to

p p p -3 p
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 4 4
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 53

Summary
® The domains and ranges (principal value branches) of inverse trigonometric
functions are given in the following table:
Functions Domain Range
(Principal Value Branches)
é -p p ù
y = sin–1 x [–1, 1] ê 2 , 2ú
ë û
y = cos–1 x [–1, 1] [0, p]
é -p p ù
y = cosec–1 x R – (–1,1) ê 2 , 2 ú – {0}
ë û
p
y = sec–1 x R – (–1, 1) [0, p] – { }
2
æ p pö
y = tan–1 x R ç- 2 , 2 ÷
è ø
y = cot–1 x R (0, p)
1
® sin–1x should not be confused with (sin x)–1. In fact (sin x)–1 =
sin x
and
similarly for other trigonometric functions.
® The value of an inverse trigonometric functions which lies in its principal
value branch is called the principal value of that inverse trigonometric
functions.
For suitable values of domain, we have
® y = sin–1 x Þ x = sin y ® x = sin y Þ y = sin–1 x
® sin (sin–1 x) = x ® sin–1 (sin x) = x
1
® sin–1
x
= cosec–1 x ® cos–1 (–x) = p – cos–1 x

1
® cos–1
x
= sec–1x ® cot–1 (–x) = p – cot–1 x

1
® tan–1
x
= cot–1 x ® sec–1 (–x) = p – sec–1 x
54M AT HEM AT ICS

® sin–1 (–x) = – sin–1 x ® tan–1 (–x) = – tan–1 x

p
® tan–1 x + cot–1 x =
2
® cosec–1 (–x) = – cosec–1 x

p p
® sin–1 x + cos–1 x =
2
® cosec–1 x + sec–1 x =
2
x+ y 2x
® tan–1x + tan–1y = tan–1
1 - xy ® 2tan–1x = tan–1
1 - x2
x- y
® tan–1x – tan–1y = tan–1
1 + xy

2x 1 - x2
® 2tan x = sin
–1 –1
1 + x2
= cos –1
1 + x2

Historical Note
The study of trigonometry was first started in India. The ancient Indian
Mathematicians, Aryabhatta (476A.D.), Brahmagupta (598 A.D.), Bhaskara I
(60 A.D.) and Bhaskara II (1114 A.D.) got important results of trigonometry. All
this knowledge went from India to Arabia and then from there to Europe. The
Greeks had also started the study of trigonometry but their approach was so
clumsy that when the Indian approach became known, it was immediately adopted
throughout the world.
In India, the predecessor of the modern trigonometric functions, known as
the sine of an angle, and the introduction of the sine function represents one of
the main contribution of the siddhantas (Sanskrit astronomical works) to
mathematics.
Bhaskara I (about 60 A.D.) gave formulae to find the values of sine functions
for angles more than 90°. A sixteenth century Malayalam work Yuktibhasa
contains a proof for the expansion of sin (A + B). Exact expression for sines or
cosines of 18°, 36°, 54°, 72°, etc., were given by Bhaskara II.
The symbols sin–1 x, cos–1 x, etc., for arc sin x, arc cos x, etc., were suggested
by the astronomer Si r Jo hn F. W. He rsehel (181 3) The name of Thales
(about 60 B.C.) is invariably associated with height and distance problems. He
is credited with the determination of the height of a great pyramid in Egypt by
measuring shadows of the pyramid and an auxiliary staff (or gnomon) of known
 INVERS TRIGONM ETIR C FUNCTIONS 5

height, and comparing the ratios:

H h
= = tan (sun’ s altitude)
S s
Thales is also said to have calculated the distance of a ship at sea through
the proportionality of sides of similar triangles. Problems on height and distance
using the similarity property are also found in ancient Indian works.

—v —
56 MATHEMATICS

Chapter 3
MATRICES

v The essence of Mathematics lies in its freedom. — CANTOR v

3.1 Introduction
The knowledge of matrices is necessary in various branches of mathematics. Matrices
are one of the most powerful tools in mathematics. This mathematical tool simplifies
our work to a great extent when compared with other straight forward methods. The
evolution of concept of matrices is the result of an attempt to obtain compact and
simple methods of solving system of linear equations. Matrices are not only used as a
representation of the coefficients in system of linear equations, but utility of matrices
far exceeds that use. Matrix notation and operations are used in electronic spreadsheet
programs for personal computer, which in turn is used in different areas of business
and science like budgeting, sales projection, cost estimation, analysing the results of an
experiment etc. Also, many physical operations such as magnification, rotation and
reflection through a plane can be represented mathematically by matrices. Matrices
are also used in cryptography. This mathematical tool is not only used in certain branches
of sciences, but also in genetics, economics, sociology, modern psychology and industrial
management.
In this chapter, we shall find it interesting to become acquainted with the
fundamentals of matrix and matrix algebra.
3.2 Matrix
Suppose we wish to express the information that Radha has 15 notebooks. We may
express it as [15] with the understanding that the number inside [ ] is the number of
notebooks that Radha has. Now, if we have to express that Radha has 15 notebooks
and 6 pens. We may express it as [15 6] with the understanding that first number
inside [ ] is the number of notebooks while the other one is the number of pens possessed
by Radha. Let us now suppose that we wish to express the information of possession
 MATRICES 5

of notebooks and pens by Radha and her two friends au ia and Simran which
is as follows
Radha has 15 notebooks and 6 pens,
au ia has 1 notebooks and pens,
Simran has 1 notebooks and 5 pens.
Now this could be arranged in the tabular form as follows
Notebooks Pens
Radha 15 6
au ia 1
Simran 1 5
and this can be expressed as

or
Radha Fauzia Simran
Notebooks 15 1 1
ens 6 5
which can be expressed as

In the first arrangement the entries in the first column represent the number of
note books possessed by Radha, au ia and Simran, respectively and the entries in the
second column represent the number of pens possessed by Radha, au ia and Simran,
5 MATHEMATICS

respectively. Similarly, in the second arrangement, the entries in the first row represent
the number of notebooks possessed by Radha, au ia and Simran, respectively. The
entries in the second row represent the number of pens possessed by Radha, au ia
and Simran, respectively. An arrangement or display of the above kind is called a
matrix. ormally, we define matrix as
Definition 1 A matrix is an ordered rectangular array of numbers or functions. The
numbers or functions are called the elements or the entries of the matrix.
We denote matrices by capital letters. The following are some examples of matrices

é 1ù
é 5ù ê +i - ú
ê ú ê ú é1 + x x ù
A=ê 5ú , = ê .5 1 ú, C=ê ú
êë 6 úû ê 5 ú ëcos x sin x + tan x û
ê 5 ú
ë û

In the above examples, the hori ontal lines of elements are said to constitute, rows
of the matrix and the vertical lines of elements are said to constitute, columns of the
matrix. Thus A has rows and columns, has rows and columns while C has
rows and columns.
3.2.1 Order of a matrix
A matrix having m rows and n columns is called a matrix of order m n or simply m n
matrix read as an m by n matrix . So referring to the above examples of matrices, we
have A as matrix, as matrix and C as matrix. We observe that A has
6 elements, and C have and 6 elements, respectively.
In general, an m n matrix has the following rectangular array

or A [aij]m n, 1£ i £ m, 1£ j £ n i, j Î N
Thus the ith row consists of the elements ai1, ai , ai ,..., ain, while the jth column
consists of the elements a1j, a j, a j,..., amj ,
In general aij, is an element lying in the ith row and jth column. We can also call
it as the i, j th element of A. The number of elements in an m n matrix will be
equal to mn.
 MATRICES 5

ANote In this chapter

1. We shall follow the notation, namely A [aij]m n
to indicate that A is a matrix
of order m n.
. We shall consider only those matrices whose elements are real numbers or
functions taking real values.

We can also represent any point x, y in a plane by a matrix column or row as

é xù
ê y ú or [x, y] . or example point , 1 as a matrix representation may be given as
ë û

é ù
= ê ú or [ 1].
ë1 û
bserve that in this way we can also express the vertices of a closed rectilinear
figure in the form of a matrix. or example, consider a quadrilateral A C with vertices
A 1, , , , C 1, , 1, .
Now, quadrilateral A C in the matrix form, can be represented as

A C Aé 1 ù
é1 1 -1ù ê ú
=ê ú or = ê ú
ë û ´
Cê 1 ú
ê ú
ë-1 û ´

Thus, matrices can be used as representation of vertices of geometrical figures in

a plane.
Now, let us consider some examples.
Example 1 Consider the following information regarding the number of men and women
workers in three factories I, II and III
Men workers Women workers
I 5
II 5 1
III 6
Represent the above information in the form of a matrix. What does the entry
in the third row and second column represent
6 MATHEMATICS

Solution The information is represented in the form of a matrix as follows

é 5ù
A = êê 5 1úú
êë 6 úû
The entry in the third row and second column represents the number of women
workers in factory III.
Example 2 If a matrix has elements, what are the possible orders it can have
Solution We know that if a matrix is of order m n, it has mn elements. Thus, to find
all possible orders of a matrix with elements, we will find all ordered pairs of natural
numbers, whose product is .
Thus, all possible ordered pairs are 1, , , 1 , , , ,
Hence, possible orders are 1 , 1, ,
1
Example 3 Construct a matrix whose elements are given by aij = i- j .

é a11 a1 ù
Solution In general a matrix is given by A = ê a 1 a ú .
ê ú
êë a 1 a úû
1
Now aij = i- j ,i 1, , and j 1, .

1 1 5
Therefore a11 = 1 - ´1 = 1 a1 = 1- ´ =

1 1 1
a1= - ´1 = a = - ´ =

1 1
a1= - ´1 = a = - ´ =

é1 5ù
ê ú
ê1 ú
Hence the required matrix is given by A = ê ú.
ê ú
ê ú
ë û
 MATRICES 61

3.3 Types of Matrices

In this section, we shall discuss different types of matrices.
i Column matrix
A matrix is said to be a column matrix if it has only one column.

é ù
ê ú
ê ú
or example, A = ê -1 ú is a column matrix of order 1.
ê ú
ëê1 ûú
In general, A [aij] m 1
is a column matrix of order m 1.
ii Row matrix
A matrix is said to be a row matrix if it has only one row.

é 1 ù
or example, = ê- 5 úû is a row matrix.
ë 1´

In general, [bij] 1 n
is a row matrix of order 1 n.
iii Square matrix
A matrix in which the number of rows are equal to the number of columns, is
said to be a square matrix. Thus an m n matrix is said to be a square matrix if
m n and is known as a square matrix of order n .

é -1 ù
ê ú
or example A = ê 1 ú is a square matrix of order .
ê ú
ê -1úû
ë
In general, A [aij] m m
is a square matrix of order m.

ANote If A [aij] is a square matrix of order n, then elements entries a11, a , ..., ann

é1 - 1ù
are said to constitute the diagonal, of the matrix A. Thus, if A = êê -1úú .
êë 5 6 úû
Then the elements of the diagonal of A are 1, , 6.
6 MATHEMATICS

iv Diagonal matrix
A square matrix [bij] m m is said to be a diagonal matrix if all its non
diagonal elements are ero, that is a matrix [bij] m m is said to be a diagonal
matrix if bij , when i ¹ j.

é -1.1 ù
é -1 ù ê ú
or example, A [ ], =ê ú, C=ê ú , are diagonal matrices
ë û êë úû
of order 1, , , respectively.
v Scalar matrix
A diagonal matrix is said to be a scalar matrix if its diagonal elements are equal,
that is, a square matrix [bij] n n is said to be a scalar matrix if
bij , when i ¹ j
bij k, when i j, for some constant k.
or example

é ù
é -1 ù ê ú
A [ ], =ê , C=ê ú
ë -1úû ê ú
ë û
are scalar matrices of order 1, and , respectively.
vi Identity matrix
A square matrix in which elements in the diagonal are all 1 and rest are all ero
is called an identity matrix. In other words, the square matrix A [aij] n n is an
ì1 if i = j
identity matrix, if aij = í .
î if i ¹ j
We denote the identity matrix of order n by In. When order is clear from the
context, we simply write it as I.
é1 ù
é1 ù ê 1 ú
or example [1], ê ú, ê ú are identity matrices of order 1, and ,
ë 1û ê 1úû
ë
respectively.
bserve that a scalar matrix is an identity matrix when k 1. ut every identity
matrix is clearly a scalar matrix.
 MATRICES 6

vii Zero matrix

A matrix is said to be zero matrix or null matrix if all its elements are ero.
é ù é ù
or example, [ ], ê ú, ê ú , [ , ] are all ero matrices. We denote
ë û ë û
ero matrix by . Its order will be clear from the context.
3.3.1 Equality of matrices
Definition 2 Two matrices A [aij] and [bij] are said to be equal if
i they are of the same order
ii each element of A is equal to the corresponding element of , that is aij bij for
all i and j.
é ù é ù é ù é ù
or example, ê ú and ê ú are equal matrices but ê ú and ê ú are
ë 1û ë 1û ë 1û ë 1û
not equal matrices. Symbolically, if two matrices A and are equal, we write A .

é x y ù é-1.5 ù
ê ú
If êê z a úú = ê 6 ú , then x 1.5, y ,z ,a 6,b ,c
êëb c úû êë úû

éx + z+ y- ù é 6 y- ù
ê -6 a -1 ú = ê- 6 - c + úú
Example 4 If ê ú ê
êëb - - 1 úû êë b + - 1 úû
ind the values of a, b, c, x, y and z.
Solution As the given matrices are equal, therefore, their corresponding elements
must be equal. Comparing the corresponding elements, we get
x , z 6, y y
a 1 , c b b ,
Simplifying, we get
a ,b ,c 1, x ,y 5, z
Example 5 ind the values of a, b, c, and d from the following equation
é a+b a- b ù é - ù
ê5c - d ú =ê ú
ë c + d û ë11 û
6 MATHEMATICS

Solution y equality of two matrices, equating the corresponding elements, we get

a b 5c d 11
a b c d
Solving these equations, we get
a 1, b ,c and d

EXERCISE 3.1

é 5 1 - ù
ê 5 ú
1. In the matrix A = ê 5 - 1 ú , write
ê ú
ê ú
ë 1 -5 1 û
i The order of the matrix, ii The number of elements,
iii Write the elements a1 , a 1, a , a , a .
2. If a matrix has elements, what are the possible orders it can have What, if it
has 1 elements
3. If a matrix has 1 elements, what are the possible orders it can have What, if it
has 5 elements
4. Construct a matrix, A [aij], whose elements are given by

i+ j i i+ j
i aij = ii aij = iii aij =
j
5. Construct a matrix, whose elements are given by
1
i aij = - i+ j ii aij = i - j

6. ind the values of x, y and z from the following equations

éx + y + zù é ù
é ù é y zù éx + y ù é6 ù ê x + z ú = ê5 ú
i ê x 5ú = ê 1 5ú ii ê5 + z = ú iii
ë û ë û ë xy úû êë 5 û
ê ú ê ú
êë y + z úû êë úû
7. ind the value of a, b, c and d from the equation
é a -b a + c ù é -1 5 ù
ê a -b =
ë c + d úû êë 1 úû
 MATRICES 65

8. A [aij]m n\ is a square matrix, if

A m n m n C m n None of these
9. Which of the given values of x and y make the following pair of matrices equal
é x+ 5 ù é y- ù
ê y +1 ú
- xû ë
, ê ú
ë û
-1
A x= , y= Not possible to find

- -1 -
C y , x= x= , y=
10. The number of all possible matrices of order with each entry or 1 is
A 1 C 1 51
3.4 Operations on Matrices
In this section, we shall introduce certain operations on matrices, namely, addition of
matrices, multiplication of a matrix by a scalar, difference and multiplication of matrices.
3.4.1 Addition of matrices
Suppose atima has two factories at places A and . Each factory produces sport
shoes for boys and girls in three different price categories labelled 1, and . The
quantities produced by each factory are represented as matrices given below

Suppose atima wants to know the total production of sport shoes in each price
category. Then the total production
In category 1 for boys , for girls 6 5
In category for boys 5 , for girls 65 55
In category for boys 5 , for girls 5 5
é + 6 +5 ù
This can be represented in the matrix form as ê 5 + 65 + 55 úú .
ê
êë + 5 5 + 5 úû
66 MATHEMATICS

This new matrix is the sum of the above two matrices. We observe that the sum of
two matrices is a matrix obtained by adding the corresponding elements of the given
matrices. urthermore, the two matrices have to be of the same order.

éa11 a1 a1 ù éb11 b1 b1 ù
Thus, if A = ê ú is a matrix and =ê is another
ëa 1 a a û ëb 1 b b úû

éa11 + b11 a1 + b1 a1 + b1 ù
matrix. Then, we define A =ê ú.
ëa 1 + b 1 a + b a +b û
In general, if A [aij] and [bij] are two matrices of the same order, say m n.
Then, the sum of the two matrices A and is defined as a matrix C [cij]m n, where
cij aij bij, for all possible values of i and j.

é é 5 1ù
1 - 1ù
Example 6 iven A = ê ú and =ê ú
1 ú , find A
ë û ê-
êë úû

Since A, are of the same order . Therefore, addition of A and is defined

and is given by

é + 1 + 5 1 - 1ù é + 1+ 5 ù
A =ê ú ê
1ú = ê
ú
1ú
ê - + + 6
êë úû êë úû

A Note
1. We emphasise that if A and are not of the same order, then A is not

é ù é1 ù
defined. or example if A = ê ú, =ê , then A is not defined.
ë1 û ë1 1 úû

. We may observe that addition of matrices is an example of binary operation

on the set of matrices of the same order.

3.4.2 Multiplication of a matrix by a scalar

Now suppose that atima has doubled the production at a factory A in all categories
refer to . .1 .
 MATRICES 6

reviously quantities in standard units produced by factory A were

Revised quantities produced by factory A are as given below

oys irls
1é ´ ´6 ù
ê ´ 5 ´ 65 úú
ê
êë ´ ´ 5 úû

é16 1 ù
This can be represented in the matrix form as êê15 1 ú . We observe that
ú
êë1 1 úû
the new matrix is obtained by multiplying each element of the previous matrix by .
In general, we may define multiplication of a matrix by a scalar as follows if
A [aij] m n is a matrix and k is a scalar, then kA is another matrix which is obtained
by multiplying each element of A by the scalar k.
In other words, kA k [aij] m n
[k aij ] m n, that is, i, j th
element of kA is kaij
for all possible values of i and j.

é 1 1.5ù
ê ú
or example, if A ê 5 - ú , then
ê 5 úû
ë

é 1 1.5ù é .5ù
ê ú ê ú
A ê 5 - ú=ê 5 1 - ú
ê 5 úû êë 6 15 úû
ë
Negative of a matrix The negative of a matrix is denoted by A. We define
A 1 A.
6 MATHEMATICS

é 1ù
or example, let A ê -5 x ú , then A is given by
ë û

é 1ù é- -1 ù
A 1 A = -1 ê ú =ê ú
ë -5 x û ë 5 - x û
Difference of matrices If A [aij], [bij] are two matrices of the same order,
say m n, then difference A is defined as a matrix [dij], where dij aij bij,
for all value of i and j. In other words, A A 1 , that is sum of the matrix
A and the matrix .
é1 ù é -1 ù
Example 7 If A = ê and =ê ú , then find A .
ë 1úû ë -1 û
Solution We have
é1 ù é -1 ù
A ê -
ë 1úû êë -1 ú
û
é 6ù é - 1 - ù
ê +
ë 6 úû êë 1 - úû

é - + 1 6 - ù é -1 5 ù
ê +1 6 + =
ë - úû êë 5 6 ú
û
3.4.3 Properties of matrix addition
The addition of matrices satisfy the following properties
i Commutative Law If A [aij], [bij] are matrices of the same order, say
m n, then A A.
Now A [aij] [bij] [aij bij]
[bij aij] addition of numbers is commutative
[bij] [aij] A
ii Associative Law or any three matrices A [aij], [bij], C [cij] of the
same order, say m n, A C A C.
Now A C [aij] [bij] [cij]
[aij bij] [cij] [ aij bij cij]
[aij bij cij ] Why
[aij] [ bij cij ] [aij] [bij] [cij] A C
 MATRICES 6

iii Existence of additive identity Let A [a ij ] be an m n matrix and

be an m n ero matrix, then A A A. In other words, is the
additive identity for matrix addition.
iv The existence of additive inverse Let A [aij]m n
be any matrix, then we
have another matrix as A [ aij]m n such that A A A A . So
A is the additive inverse of A or negative of A.
3.4.4 Properties of scalar multiplication of a matrix
If A [aij] and [bij] be two matrices of the same order, say m n, and k and l are
scalars, then
i kA kA k , ii k lA kA lA
ii k A k [aij] [bij]
k [aij bij] [k aij bij ] [ k aij k bij ]
[k aij] [k bij] k [aij] k [bij] kA k
iii k l A k l [aij]
[k l aij] [k aij] [l aij] k [aij] l [aij] kA lA

é ù é - ù
Example 8 If A = êê - úú and ê
=ê ú , then find the matrix
ú , such that
êë 6 úû êë -5 1 úû
A 5 .

Solution We have A 5
or A A 5 A
or A A 5 A Matrix addition is commutative
or 5 A A is the additive inverse of A
or 5 A is the additive identity
1
or 5 A

æ é - ù é ùö æ é 1 -1 ù é -16 ùö
1ç ê ú ê ÷ 1 çê ú+ ê - ú÷
or = ç5 ê ú- ê - úú ÷ çê 1 ú ê ú÷
ç ê-5 1 ú êë 6 úû ÷ø ç ê- 5 5 úû êë -6 -1 úû ÷ø
è ë û èë
 MATHEMATICS

é -1 ù
ê- ú
é 1 - 16 -1 + ù é - 6 -1 ù ê ú
1ê ú 1ê ú ê 1 ú
ê - 1 + ú ê1 1 ú ê ú
êë - 5 - 6 5 - 1 úû êë - 1 - úû ê ú
ê- 1 - ú
êë úû

é5 ù é 6ù
Example 9 ind and , if + =ê ú and - =ê .
ë û ë -1úû

é5 ù é 6ù
Solution We have + + - =ê ú+ê .
ë û ë -1úû

é ù é ù
or ê ú Þ =ê ú
ë û ë û

1é ù é ù
or ê ú =ê ú
ë û ë û

é5 ù é 6ù
Also ê ú-ê -1úû
ë û ë

é5 - - 6ù é - ù
or ê Þ =ê
ë + 1 úû ë 1 úû

1é - ù é1 - ù
or ê =
ë 1 úû êë 5 úû
Example 10 ind the values of x and y from the following equation

éx 5 ù é - ù é 6ù
ê +
ë y - úû êë1 ú
û
ê15 1 ú
ë û
Solution We have

éx 5 ù é - ù é 6ù é x 1 ù é - ù é 6ù
ê + ê15 1 ú Þ ê +ê =ê
ë y - úû êë1 ú
û ë û ë1
ú
y - 6 û ë1 ú ú
û ë15 1 û
 MATRICES 1

é x+ 1 - ù é 6ù é x+ 6 ù é 6ù
ê1 +1 ê15 1 ú Þ ê 15 =ê
y - 6 + úû
or
ë ë û ë y - û ë15 1 úû
ú

or x and y 1 Why
or x and y 1
1
or x and y
i.e. x and y .

Example 11 Two farmers Ramkishan and urcharan Singh cultivates only three
varieties of rice namely asmati, ermal and Naura. The sale in Rupees of these
varieties of rice by both the farmers in the month of September and ctober are given
by the following matrices A and .

i ind the combined sales in September and ctober for each farmer in each
variety.
ii ind the decrease in sales from September to ctober.
iii If both farmers receive profit on gross sales, compute the profit for each
farmer and for each variety sold in ctober.
Solution
i Combined sales in September and ctober for each farmer in each variety is
given by
 MATHEMATICS

ii Change in sales from September to ctober is given by

iii of ´ .
1

Thus, in ctober Ramkishan receives Rs 1 , Rs and Rs 1 as profit in the

sale of each variety of rice, respectively, and rucharan Singh receives profit of Rs
, Rs and Rs in the sale of each variety of rice, respectively.
3.4.5 Multiplication of matrices
Suppose Meera and Nadeem are two friends. Meera wants to buy pens and 5 story
books, while Nadeem needs pens and 1 story books. They both go to a shop to
enquire about the rates which are quoted as follows
en Rs 5 each, story book Rs 5 each.
How much money does each need to spend Clearly, Meera needs Rs 5 5 5
that is Rs 6 , while Nadeem needs 5 5 1 Rs, that is Rs 5 . In terms of
matrix representation, we can write the above information as follows
Requirements Prices per piece (in Rupees) Money needed (in Rupees)

é 5ù é5ù é 5´ + 5´ 5 ù é 6 ù
ê 1 úû ê5 ú ê ´ 5 + 1 ´ 5 ú = ê5 ú
ë ë û ë û ë û
Suppose that they enquire about the rates from another shop, quoted as follows
pen Rs each, story book Rs each.
Now, the money required by Meera and Nadeem to make purchases will be
respectively Rs 5 Rs and Rs 1 Rs
 MATRICES

Again, the above information can be represented as follows

Requirements Prices per piece (in Rupees) Money needed (in Rupees)

é 5ù é ù é ´ + ´5 ù é ù
ê 1 úû ê ú ê ´ +1 ´ ú = ê ú
ë ë û ë û ë û
Now, the information in both the cases can be combined and expressed in terms of
matrices as follows
Requirements Prices per piece (in Rupees) Money needed (in Rupees)

é 5ù é5 ù é 5´ + 5´ 5 ´ + ´5 ù
ê 1 úû ê5 ú ê ´5 + 1 ´5 ´ + 1 ´ úû
ë ë û ë

é 6 ù
ê5 ú
ë û
The above is an example of multiplication of matrices. We observe that, for
multiplication of two matrices A and , the number of columns in A should be equal to
the number of rows in . urthermore for getting the elements of the product matrix,
we take rows of A and columns of , multiply them element wise and take the sum.
ormally, we define multiplication of matrices as follows
The product of two matrices A and is defined if the number of columns of A is
equal to the number of rows of . Let A [aij] be an m n matrix and [bjk ] be an
n p matrix. Then the product of the matrices A and is the matrix C of order m p.
To get the i, k th element cik of the matrix C, we take the ith row of A and kth column
of , multiply them elementwise and take the sum of all these products. In other words,
if A [aij]m n, [bjk ]n p, then the ith row of A is [ai1 ai ... ain] and the kth column of

é b1k ù
êb ú n
ê kú
is ê .. ú , then cik ai1 b1k ai b k
ai b k ... ain bnk å aij b jk .
j =1
ê . ú
êb ú
ë nk û
The matrix C [cik]m p
is the product of A and .

é ù
é1 -1 ù
or example, if C = ê ú and = ê-1 1 úú , then the product C is defined
ê
ë û êë 5 - úû
 MATHEMATICS

é ù
é1 -1 ù ê-1 1 ú
and is given by C = ê ú ê ú . This is a matrix in which each
ë û êë 5 - úû

entry is the sum of the products across some row of C with the corresponding entries
down some column of . These four computations are

é1 - ù
Thus C = ê
ë1 -1 úû

é6 ù é 6 ù
Example 12 ind A , if A = ê ú and =ê ú.
ë û ë û

Solution The matrix A has columns which is equal to the number of rows of .
Hence A is defined. Now

é6 + 66 + 6 + ù
A =ê ú
ë + 6 + + û

é1 + 6 6+ 1 + ù é 5 11 ù
ê + 1 1 + + ú ê 5 ú
ë û ë û
 MATRICES 5

Remark If A is defined, then A need not be defined. In the above example, A is

defined but A is not defined because has column while A has only and not
rows. If A, are, respectively m n, k l matrices, then both A and A are defined
if and only if n k and l m. In particular, if both A and are square matrices of the
same order, then both A and A are defined.
Non-commutativity of multiplication of matrices
Now, we shall see by an example that even if A and A are both defined, it is not
necessary that A A.

é ù
é 1 - ù
Example 13 If A = ê and = ê 5úú , then find A ,
ê A. Show that
ë- 5 úû
ëê 1ûú
A ¹ A.
Solution Since A is a matrix and is matrix. Hence A and A are both
defined and are matrices of order and , respectively. Note that

é ù
é 1 - ù ê ú é - +6 -1 + ù é - ù
A =ê 5 ê- + + 1 =
ë- 5 úû ê ú ë -1 + 1 + 5 úû êë1 ú
û
êë 1úû

é ù é -1 - + 6 6 + 15 ù é -1 1ù
é1- ù ê ê ú
and A = êê 5úú ê = - - + 1 1 + 5úú = ê -16
- 5 úû ê ú
êë 1úû ë êë - - + 6 + 5 úû êë - - 11úû
Clearly A ¹ A
In the above example both A and A are of different order and so A ¹ A. ut
one may think that perhaps A and A could be the same if they were of the same
order. ut it is not so, here we give an example to show that even if A and A are of
same order they may not be same.

é1 ù é 1ù é 1ù
Example 14 If A = ê and =ê , then A = ê ú.
ë -1úû ë1
ú
û ë -1 û

é -1ù
and A=ê ú . Clearly A ¹ A.
ë1 û
Thus matrix multiplication is not commutative.
 6 MATHEMATICS

A Note This does not mean that A ¹ A for every pair of matrices A,
which A and A, are defined. or instance,
for

é1 ù é ù é ù
If A = ê ú, = ê ú , then A A ê ú
ë û ë û ë û
bserve that multiplication of diagonal matrices of same order will be commutative.
Zero matrix as the product of two non zero matrices
We know that, for real numbers a, b if ab , then either a or b . This need
not be true for matrices, we will observe this through an example.

é -1ù é 5ù
Example 15 ind A , if A = ê ú and =ê ú.
ë û ë û

é -1 ù é 5 ù é ù
Solution We have A = ê úê ú=ê ú.
ë ûë û ë û
Thus, if the product of two matrices is a ero matrix, it is not necessary that one of
the matrices is a ero matrix.
3.4.6 Properties of multiplication of matrices
The multiplication of matrices possesses the following properties, which we state without
proof.
1. The associative law or any three matrices A, and C. We have
A C A C , whenever both sides of the equality are defined.
. The distributive law or three matrices A, and C.
i A C A AC
ii A C AC C, whenever both sides of equality are defined.
. The existence of multiplicative identity or every square matrix A, there
exist an identity matrix of same order such that IA AI A.
Now, we shall verify these properties by examples.

é1 1 -1ù é1 ù
ê ú, ú and C = é1 - ù
Example 16 If A = ê = êê ê , find
ú ú
ë - 1úû
êë -1 úû êë-1 úû
A C , A C and show that A C A C.
 MATRICES

é1 1 -1ù é 1 ù é1 + + 1 + - ù é 1ù
Solution We have A = ê ú ê ú = ê + - 6 + + 1 ú = ê-1 1 ú
ê ú ê ú ê ú ê ú
ëê -1 úû êë-1 ûú ëê + - - + úû êë 1 15ûú

é 1ù é + + 6- - +1 ù
é1 - ù ê
A C = ê-1 1 úú ê
ê = -1 + 6 - + - - 6 + 1 úú
- 1úû ê
êë 1 15úû ë êë 1 + + - - + 15úû

é - ù
ê 5 - - ú
ê ú
êë 1 - 11úû

é 1 ù é 1+ 6 + -6 - + ù
ê ú é1 - ù ê
Now C
úê = + + - + úú
ê - 1úû ê
êë-1 úû ë êë -1 + - + - - + úû

é - -1 ù
ê - ú
ê ú
êë - -11 úû

é1 1 -1 ù é - -1 ù
Therefore A C ê ú ê - ú
ê ú ê ú
êë -1 úû êë - -11 úû

é + - + + - - + 11 -1 + - ù
ê1 + + 1 + - 6 -6 + - - + + úú
ê
êë 1 - + 1 6 + - - + - - - + 16 ûú

é - ù
ê 5 - - ú
ê ú . Clearly, A C A C
êë 1 - 11úû
 MATHEMATICS

é 6 ù é 1 1ù é ù
ê
Example 17 If A = ê - 6 ú, ê
= ê1 ú ê ú
ú ú , C = ê- ú
êë - úû êë1 úû êë úû
Calculate AC, C and A C. Also, verify that A C AC C

é ù
ê
= ê-5 1 úú
Solution Now, A
êë -6 úû

é ù é ù é -1 + ù é1 ù
ê-5 1 úú ê- ú = ê-1 + + ú=ê ú
So A C ê ê ú ê ú ê ú
êë -6 úû êë úû êë 16 + 1 + úû êë úû

é 6 ù é ù é -1 + 1 ù é ù
ê-6 ú ê- ú = ê-1 + + ú = ê1 ú
urther AC ê ú ê ú ê ú ê ú
êë - úû êë úû êë 1 + 16 + úû êë úû

é 1 1ù é ù é - + ù é 1 ù
ê1 ú ê- ú = ê + + 6 ú = ê ú
and C ê ú ê ú ê ú ê ú
êë1 úû êë úû êë - + úû êë- úû

é ù é1 ù é1 ù
So AC C ê1 ú+ê ú=ê ú
ê ú ê ú ê ú
êë úû êë- úû êë úû
Clearly, A C AC C
é1 ù
ê 1úú , then show that A
Example 18 If A = ê - A I
êë 1úû

é1 ù é1 ù é1 ù
Solution We have A = A.A = ê - 1úú êê - 1úú = êê1 1 ú
ê ú
êë 1úû êë 1úû êë1 6 15 úû
 MATRICES

é1 ù é1 ù é6 6 6 ù
So A AA ê - 1úú êê1 1 ú = ê6 -6 ú
ê ú ê ú
êë 1úû êë1 6 15 úû êë 6 6 úû
Now

é6 6 6 ù é1 ù é1 ù
ê6 -6 ú ê - 1 úú ê 1 úú
A A I ê ú ê ê
ëê 6 6 ûú ëê 1 ûú ëê 1 ûú

é6 6 6 ù é- - 6 -6 ù é- ù
ê6 -6 ú + ê -6 6 - úú + êê - ú
ê ú ê ú
êë 6 6 úû êë - - 6 - úû êë - úû

é6 - - 6- 6+ 6 -6 + ù
ê6 - 6 + -6 + 6 - - + ú
ê ú
êë - + 6- 6+ 6 - - úû

é ù
ê ú=
ê ú
êë úû

Example 19 In a legislative assembly election, a political group hired a public relations

firm to promote its candidate in three ways telephone, house calls, and letters. The
cost per contact in paise is given in matrix A as
Cost per contact
é ù Telephone
ê 1 ú Housecall
A ê ú
ëê 5 ûú Letter
The number of contacts of each type made in two cities and is given by
Telephone Housecall Letter
é1 5 5 ù®
=ê ú® . ind the total amount spent by the group in the two
ë 1 1 , û
cities and .
 MATHEMATICS

Solution We have
é , +5 , + 5 , ù®
A ê1 , ú®
ë 1 , 5 , û
é , ù®
ê , ú®
ë û
So the total amount spent by the group in the two cities is , paise and
, paise, i.e., Rs and Rs , respectively.

EXERCISE 3.2

é ù é1 ù é- 5ù
1. Let A = ê ú , = ê- ú ,C = ê ú
ë û ë 5û ë û
ind each of the following
i A ii A iii A C
iv A v A
2. Compute the following
éa bù éa bù éa + b b + c ù é ab bc ù
i ê-b + ii ê ú+ê
ë a úû êë b a úû êë a + c
ú
a + b úû ë- ac - ab û
é-1 -6ù é1 6ù
ê ú ê écos x sin x ù é sin x cos x ù
iii ê 5 16 ú + ê 5 úú iv ê ú+ê ú
êë 5 úû êë úû êë sin x cos x úû êëcos x sin x úû
3. Compute the indicated products.
é1 ù
éa b ù éa -b ù ê ú é1 - ù é1 ù
i ê-b ii ê ú[ ] iii
ë a úû êëb a úû êë úû
ê
ë
úê
ûë 1úû

é ù é1 - 5ù é 1ù
ê ê úé1 1ù
iv 5 úú ê ú v ú ê-1
ê ê ú ê 1úû
êë 5 6 úû êë 5 úû êë-1 1 úû ë

é - ù
é -1 ùê ú
vi ê-1 ú ê1 ú
ë ûê 1 úû
ë
 MATRICES 1

é1 - ù é -1 ù é 1 ù
ê ú, = êê ú ê ú
4. If A = ê5 ú 5 ú and C = ê ú , then compute
êë1 -1 1 úû êë úû êë1 - úû
A and C . Also, verify that A C A C.

é 5ù é ù
ê 1 ú ê5 1ú
5
ê ú ê ú
1 1
5. If A = êê ú and
ú
=ê
ê5
ú , then compute A 5 .
5 5ú
ê ú ê ú
ê ú ê 6 ú
ëê ûú ëê 5 5 5 ûú

é cos q sin q ù é sin q - cos q ù

6. Simplify cosq ê ú sinq ê
ë - sin q cos q û ë cos q sin qúû
7. ind and , if
é ù é ù
i =ê and =ê
ë 5 úû ë
ú
û

é ù é - ù
ii =ê ú and + =ê ú
ë û ë -1 5 û

é ù é 1 ù
8. ind , if ê1 ú and ê- ú
ë û ë û

é1 ù éy ù é5 6 ù
9. ind x and y, if ê + ú = ê1 ú
ë x úû êë 1 û ë û

éx zù é 1 -1 ù é 5ù
10. Solve the equation for x, y, z and t, if êy ú + ê ú = ê
ë tû ë û ë 6 úû

é ù é-1 ù é1 ù
11. If x ê ú + y ê ú = ê ú , find the values of x and y.
ë û ë 1 û ë5 û

éx yù é x 6 ù é x + yù
12. iven êz = + ú , find the values of x, y, z and w.
ë w úû êë -1 w úû êë z + w û
 MATHEMATICS

écos x - sin x ù
13. If x = êê sin x cos x ú , show that
ú
x y x y.
êë 1 úû
14. Show that
é 5 -1ù é 1ù é 1 ù é 5 -1ù
i ê6 úê ú¹ê ú ê6 ú
ë ûë û ë ûë û

é1 ù é-1 1 ù é -1 1 ù é1 ù
ê 1 úê -1 1 úú ¹ êê -1 1 úú êê 1 ú
ii ê úê ú
êë1 1 úû êë úû êë úû êë1 1 úû

é 1ù
15. ind A 5A 6I, if A = êê 1 ú
ú
êë1 -1 úû

é1 ù
16. If A = êê 1 úú , prove that A 6A A I
êë úû

é - ù é1 ù
17. If A = ê ú and I ê ú , find k so that A kA I
ë - û ë 1û

é aù
ê - tan ú
18. If A = ê ú and I is the identity matrix of order , show that
ê tan a ú
êë úû

é cos a - sin a ù
I A I A ê
ë sin a cos a úû
19. A trust fund has Rs , that must be invested in two different types of bonds.
The first bond pays 5 interest per year, and the second bond pays interest
per year. sing matrix multiplication, determine how to divide Rs , among
the two types of bonds. If the trust fund must obtain an annual total interest of
a Rs 1 b Rs
 MATRICES

20. The bookshop of a particular school has 1 do en chemistry books, do en

physics books, 1 do en economics books. Their selling prices are Rs , Rs 6
and Rs each respectively. ind the total amount the bookshop will receive
from selling all the books using matrix algebra.
Assume , , , W and are matrices of order n, k, p, n and p k,
respectively. Choose the correct answer in Exercises 1 and .
21. The restriction on n, k and p so that W will be defined are
A k ,p n k is arbitrary, p
C p is arbitrary, k k ,p
22. If n p, then the order of the matrix 5 is
A p n C n p n
3.5. Transpose of a Matrix
In this section, we shall learn about transpose of a matrix and special types of matrices
such as symmetric and skew symmetric matrices.
Definition 3 If A [aij] be an m n matrix, then the matrix obtained by interchanging
the rows and columns of A is called the transpose of A. Transpose of the matrix A is
denoted by A¢ or AT . In other words, if A [aij]m n, then A¢ [aji]n m. or example,

é 5ù é ù
ê ú ê ú
if A = ê 1ú , then A¢ =
ê5 1 -1 ú
ê -1 ú êë 5 úû
ê ú ´
ë 5û ´

3.5.1 Properties of transpose of the matrices

We now state the following properties of transpose of matrices without proof. These
may be verified by taking suitable examples.
or any matrices A and of suitable orders, we have
i A¢ ¢ A, ii kA ¢ kA¢ where k is any constant
iii A ¢ A¢ ¢ iv A ¢ ¢ A¢

é ù é -1 ù
Example 20 If A = ê ú and =ê ú , verify that
ë û ë1 û
i A¢ ¢ A, ii A ¢ A¢ ¢,
iii k ¢ k ¢, where k is any constant.
 MATHEMATICS

Solution
i We have

é ù
é ù ê ú ¢ é ù
A ê ú Þ A¢ = ê ú Þ A¢ = ê ú=A
ë û ê ú ë û
ë û
Thus A¢ ¢ A
ii We have
é ù é -1 ù é5 -1 ù
A ê ú, ê1 úÞA+ =ê ú
ë û ë û ë5 û

é 5 5ù
ê ú
Therefore A ¢ ê -1 ú
ê ú
ë û

é ù é 1ù
ê ú ê ú
Now A¢ ê ú , ¢ = ê-1 ú ,
ê ú êë úû
ë û

é 5 5ù
ê ú
So A¢ ¢ ê -1 ú
ê ú
ë û
Thus A ¢ A¢ ¢
iii We have

é -1 ù é k -k kù
k =kê ú = êk k úû
ë1 û ë k

é k kù é 1ù
ê- k k ú = k ê-1 ú = k ¢
Then k ¢ ê ú ê ú
êë k k úû êë úû

Thus k ¢ k ¢
 MATRICES 5

é- ù
ê ú
Example 21 If A = ê ú , = 1 -6 , verify that A ¢ ¢A¢.
êë 5 úû
Solution We have

é- ù
ê ú, = 1 -6
A ê ú
ëê 5 ûú

é- ù é- -6 1 ù
ê ú 1 ê 1 - úú
then A ê ú -6 ê
êë 5 úû êë 5 15 - úû

é 1ù
Now A¢ [ 5] , ¢= ê ú
ê ú
êë- 6 úû

é 1ù é- 5ù
ê ú - 5 = êê -6 1 15 úú = A ¢
¢A¢ ê ú
êë- 6 úû êë1 - - úû
Clearly A ¢ ¢A¢

3.6 Symmetric and Skew Symmetric Matrices

Definition 4 A square matrix A [aij] is said to be symmetric if A¢ A, that is,
[aij] [aji] for all possible values of i and j.

é ù
ê ú
or example A = ê -1.5 -1 ú is a symmetric matrix as A¢ A
êë -1 1 úû

Definition 5 A square matrix A [aij ] is said to be skew symmetric matrix if

A¢ A, that is aji aij for all possible values of i and j. Now, if we put i j, we
have aii aii. Therefore aii or aii for all i s.
This means that all the diagonal elements of a skew symmetric matrix are ero.
 6 MATHEMATICS

é e fù
or example, the matrix = êê -e g úú is a skew symmetric matrix as ¢
êë- f -g úû

Now, we are going to prove some results of symmetric and skew symmetric
matrices.
Theorem 1 or any square matrix A with real number entries, A A¢ is a symmetric
matrix and A A¢ is a skew symmetric matrix.
Proof Let A A¢, then
¢ A A¢ ¢
A¢ A¢ ¢ as A ¢ A¢ ¢
A¢ A as A¢ ¢ A
A A¢ as A A

Therefore A A¢ is a symmetric matrix

Now let C A A¢
C¢ A A¢ ¢ A¢ A¢ ¢ Why
A¢ A Why
A A¢ C
Therefore C A A¢ is a skew symmetric matrix.
Theorem 2 Any square matrix can be expressed as the sum of a symmetric and a
skew symmetric matrix.
Proof Let A be a square matrix, then we can write
1 1
A= A + A¢ + A - A¢

rom the Theorem 1, we know that A A¢ is a symmetric matrix and A A¢ is

1
a skew symmetric matrix. Since for any matrix A, kA ¢ kA¢, it follows that A + A¢

1
is symmetric matrix and A - A ¢ is skew symmetric matrix. Thus, any square
matrix can be expressed as the sum of a symmetric and a skew symmetric matrix.
 MATRICES

é - - ù
Example 22 Express the matrix ê
= ê-1 ú as the sum of a symmetric and a
ú
êë 1 - - úû
skew symmetric matrix.
Solution Here
é -1 1ù
¢ ê- - úú
ê
êë- - úû

é - - ù
ê ú
é - - ù ê ú
1 1ê
¢ = - ú ê- 1 ú,
Let ê 6 ú ê ú
êë - -6 úû ê ú
ê- 1 - ú
- - ù ëê ûú
é
ê ú
ê ú
Now ¢ ê- 1ú
ê ú
ê ú
ê- 1 - ú
ëê ûú
1
Thus ¢ is a symmetric matrix.

é -1 -5 ù
ê ú
é -1 -5ù ê ú
1 1 1
Also, let ¢ = ê1 6 úú = ê ú
ê ê ú
êë5 -6 úû ê ú
ê5 - ú
êë úû
é 1 5ù
ê ú
ê ú
Then ¢ ê -1 - ú=-
ê ú
ê ú
ê -5 ú
ëê ûú
 MATHEMATICS

1
Thus ¢ is a skew symmetric matrix.

é - - ù é -1 -5 ù
ê ú ê ú
ê ú ê ú é - - ù
- 1 ú = ê-1 ú=
Now =ê 1 ú+ê
ê ú ê ú ê ú
ê ú ê ú êë 1 - - úû
ê- 1 - ú ê
5
- ú
êë úû êë úû

Thus, is represented as the sum of a symmetric and a skew symmetric matrix.

EXERCISE 3.3
1. ind the transpose of each of the following matrices
é5ù
ê1ú é -1 5 6 ù
é1 -1 ù ê ú
i ê ú ii ê ú iii 5 6ú
ê ú ë û ê
ê-1 ú ê -1úû
ë û ë

é -1 ù é - 1 -5ù
ê
2. If A = 5 ú ê ú , then verify that
ê ú and = ê 1 ú
êë - 1 1 úû êë 1 1úû
i A ¢ A¢ ¢, ii A ¢ A¢ ¢

é ù
é -1 1ù
3. If A¢ = ê-1 úú and
ê =ê ú , then verify that
êë 1 úû ë 1 û

i A ¢ A¢ ¢ ii A ¢ A¢ ¢
é- ù é -1 ù
4. If A ¢ = ê ú and = ê ú , then find A ¢
ë1 û ë 1 û
5. or the matrices A and , verify that A ¢ ¢A¢, where
é1 ù é ù
i A = êê- ú ,
ú = -1 1 ii A = êê1 úú , = 1 5
êë úû êë úû
 MATRICES

é cos a sin a ù
6. If i A=ê ú , then verify that A¢ A I
ë - sin a cos a û

é sin a cos a ù
ii If A = ê ú , then verify that A¢ A I
ë - cos a sin a û

é1 -1 5ù
7. i Show that the matrix A = êê-1 1úú is a symmetric matrix.
êë 5 1 úû

é 1 -1 ù
ii Show that the matrix A = ê -1 1 úú is a skew symmetric matrix.
ê
ëê 1 -1 úû

é1 5 ù
8. or the matrix A = ê ú , verify that
ë6 û
i A A¢ is a symmetric matrix
ii A A¢ is a skew symmetric matrix

é a bù
1 1 ê
9. ind A + A¢ and A - A¢ , when A = - a
ê c úú
êë -b -c úû

10. Express the following matrices as the sum of a symmetric and a skew symmetric
matrix

é 6 - ù
é 5ù ê-
i ê1 -1ú ii ê -1 úú
ë û êë úû
-1

é -1ù
ê- é 1 5ù
iii ê - 1úú iv ê -1 ú
ë û
êë - -5 úû
 MATHEMATICS

Choose the correct answer in the Exercises 11 and 1 .

11. If A, are symmetric matrices of same order, then A A is a
A Skew symmetric matrix Symmetric matrix
C ero matrix Identity matrix
é cos a - sin a ù
12. If A = ê , then A A¢ I, if the value of a is
ësin a cos a úû
p p
A
6
p
C p

3.7 Elementary Operation (Transformation) of a Matrix

There are six operations transformations on a matrix, three of which are due to rows
and three due to columns, which are known as elementary operations or
transformations.
i The interchange of any two rows or two columns. Symbolically the interchange
of ith and jth rows is denoted by Ri « Rj and interchange of ith and jth column is
denoted by Ci « Cj.
é1 1ù é-1 1ù
ê ú ê ú
or example, applying R1 « R to A = ê-1 1 ú , we get ê1 1ú .
ê5 6 ú ê5 6 ú
ë û ë û
ii The multiplication of the elements of any row or column by a non zero
number. Symbolically, the multiplication of each element of the ith row by k,
where k ¹ is denoted by Ri ® k Ri.
The corresponding column operation is denoted by Ci ® kCi
é 1ù
é 1 1ù ê 1 ú
or example, applying C ® 1 C , to =ê ú , we get ê ú
ë -1 1û ê -1 1ú
êë úû

iii The addition to the elements of any row or column, the corresponding
elements of any other row or column multiplied by any non zero number.
Symbolically, the addition to the elements of ith row, the corresponding elements
of jth row multiplied by k is denoted by Ri ® Ri kRj.
 MATRICES 1

The corresponding column operation is denoted by Ci ® Ci kCj.

é1 ù é1 ù
or example, applying R ® R R1, to C = ê ú , we get ê .
ë -1û ë -5 úû
3.8 Invertible Matrices
Definition 6 If A is a square matrix of order m, and if there exists another square
matrix of the same order m, such that A A I, then is called the inverse
matrix of A and it is denoted by A 1. In that case A is said to be invertible.
é ù é - ù
or example, let A ê1 ú and ê -1 ú be two matrices.
ë û ë û
é ùé - ù
Now A ê1 ú ê -1 ú
ë ûë û

é - -6 + 6 ù é 1 ù
ê - = =I
ë - + úû êë 1 úû

é1 ù
Also A ê 1 ú = I . Thus is the inverse of A, in other
ë û
words A 1 and A is inverse of , i.e., A 1

A Note
1. A rectangular matrix does not possess inverse matrix, since for products A
and A to be defined and to be equal, it is necessary that matrices A and
should be square matrices of the same order.
. If is the inverse of A, then A is also the inverse of .

Theorem 3 niqueness of inverse Inverse of a square matrix, if it exists, is unique.

Proof Let A [aij] be a square matrix of order m. If possible, let and C be two
inverses of A. We shall show that C.
Since is the inverse of A
A A I ... 1
Since C is also the inverse of A
AC CA I ...
Thus I AC A C IC C
Theorem 4 If A and are invertible matrices of the same order, then A 1 1
A 1.
 MATHEMATICS

Proof rom the definition of inverse of a matrix, we have

A A 1
1
or A1 A A 1
A 1I re multiplying both sides by A 1
or A 1A A 1
A 1
Since A 1 I A1
or I A 1
A 1

or A 1
A 1

or 1
A 1 1
A 1

or I A 1 1
A 1

Hence A 1 1
A 1

3.8.1 Inverse of a matrix by elementary operations

Let , A and be matrices of, the same order such that A . In order to apply a
sequence of elementary row operations on the matrix equation A , we will apply
these row operations simultaneously on and on the first matrix A of the product A
on RHS.
Similarly, in order to apply a sequence of elementary column operations on the
matrix equation A , we will apply, these operations simultaneously on and on the
second matrix of the product A on RHS.
In view of the above discussion, we conclude that if A is a matrix such that A 1
exists, then to find A 1 using elementary row operations, write A IA and apply a
sequence of row operation on A IA till we get, I A. The matrix will be the
inverse of A. Similarly, if we wish to find A using column operations, then, write
1

A AI and apply a sequence of column operations on A AI till we get, I A .

Remark In case, after applying one or more elementary row column operations on
A IA A AI , if we obtain all eros in one or more rows of the matrix A on L.H.S.,
then A 1 does not exist.
Example 23 y using elementary operations, find the inverse of the matrix
é1 ù
A ê -1ú .
ë û
Solution In order to use elementary row operations we may write A IA.
é1 ù é1 ù é1 ù é 1 ù
or ê ú =ê ú A, then ê = A applying R ® R R1
ë -1û ë 1 û ë -5 úû êë - 1 úû
 MATRICES

é1 ù
é1 ù ê 1
or ê 1ú ê -1úú A applying R ® R
ë û 5
ë5 5û
é1 ù
é1 ù ê5 5ú
or ê 1ú = ê ú A applying R1 ® R1 R
ë û ê -1 ú
êë 5 5 úû
é1 ù
ê5 5 ú
Thus A1 ê ú
ê -1 ú
êë 5 5 úû
Alternatively, in order to use elementary column operations, we write A AI, i.e.,
é1 ù é1 ù
ê Aê
ë -1úû ú
ë 1û
Applying C ® C C1, we get
é1 ù é1 - ù
ê Aê
ë -5 úû ë 1 úû
1
Now applying C ® - C , we have
5
é ù
é1 ù ê1 5ú
ê 1ú Aê ú
ë û ê -1 ú
êë 5 úû
inally, applying C1 ® C1 C , we obtain
é1 ù
é1 ù ê5 5ú
ê 1ú Aê ú
ë û ê -1 ú
êë 5 5 úû
é1 ù
ê5 5ú
Hence A1 ê ú
ê -1ú
ëê 5 5 ûú
 MATHEMATICS

Example 24 btain the inverse of the following matrix using elementary operations
é 1 ù
A = êê1 ú.
ú
êë 1 1 úû

é 1 ù é1 ù
ê ú ê 1 úA
Solution Write A I A, i.e., ê1 ú ê ú
êë 1 1 úû ëê 1 ûú

é1 ù é 1 ù
or ê 1 ú = ê1 úA
applying R1 « R
ê ú ê ú
êë 1 1 úû êë 1 úû

é1 ù é 1 ù
or ê 1 ú = ê1 úA
applying R ® R R1
ê ú ê ú
ëê -5 - ûú êë - ú
1û

é1 -1 ù é- 1 ù
or ê 1 ú = ê ú A applying R ® R R
ê ú ê1 ú 1 1

êë -5 - úû êë - 1 úû

é1 -1 ù é- 1 ù
or ê 1 ú = ê ú A applying R ® R 5R
ê ú ê1 ú
ëê úû êë 5 - 1 úû

é- 1 ù
é1 -1 ù ê1 úA
ê 1 ú 1
or ê ú applying R ® R
ê ú ê5 - 1ú
êë 1 úû ê ú
ë û

é 1 -1 1ù
é1 ù ê ú
ê 1 ú = ê1 ú
or
ê ú ê ú A applying R1 ® R1 R
êë 1 úû ê 5 - 1ú
ê ú
ë û
 MATRICES 5

é 1 -1 1ù
é1 ù ê ú
ê 1 ú ê ú
or ê ú = ê- -1ú A applying R ® R R
êë 1 úû ê5 - 1ú
ê ú
ë û
é 1 -1 1ù
ê ú
ê ú
Hence A 1 ê- -1 ú
ê5 - 1ú
ê ú
ë û
Alternatively, write A AI, i.e.,

é 1 ù é1 ù
ê1 ú A ê 1 úú
ê
ê ú
êë 1 1 ûú ëê 1úû

é1 ù é 1 ù
ê 1 ú A êê1 ú
or ê ú ú C1 « C
ëê1 1 ûú êë 1úû

é1 ù é 1 ù
ê 1 -1ú ê - úú
or ê ú A ê1 C ®C C1
êë1 -1 úû êë 1 úû

é1 ù é 1 1ù
ê 1 ú A êê1 - úú
or ê ú C ®C C
êë1 úû êë 1 úû

é 1ù
é1 ù ê 1 ú
ê 1 ú ê ú 1
or ê ú A ê1 -1ú C ® C
êë1 1 úû ê 1ú
ê ú
ë û
 6 MATHEMATICS

é 1ù
é 1 ù ê- 1 ú
ê ê ú
or ê 1 úú Aê 1 -1ú C1 ® C1 C
êë-5 1 úû ê 1ú
ê ú
ë û

é 1 1ù
ê 1 ú
é1 ù
ê 1 ú ê ú
or ê ú A ê- -1 ú C1 ® C1 5C
ê 5 1ú
ëê 1ûú
ê ú
ë û

é 1 -1 1ù
é1 ù ê ú
ê 1 ú ê ú
or ê ú A ê- -1 ú C ® C C
êë 1úû ê 5 - 1ú
ê ú
ë û

é1 -1 1ù
ê ú
ê ú
Hence A1 ê- -1 ú
ê 5 - 1ú
ê ú
ë û

é1 - ù
Example 25 ind 1
, if it exists, given =ê ú.
ë -5 1 û

é1 - ù é1 ù
Solution We have I , i.e., ê ú=ê 1úû
.
ë -5 1 û ë

é -1ù é1 ù
or ê1 5ú ê1 ú applying R1 ®
1
R
ê ú ê ú 1 1
ë-5 1û ë 1û
 MATRICES

é -1 ù é1 ù
ê1 ê1 ú
or 5ú ê ú applying R ® R 5R1
ê ú ê1
ë û 1ú
êë úû

We have all eros in the second row of the left hand side matrix of the above
e t on There ore, 1 does not exist.

EXERCISE 3.4
sing elementary transformations, find the inverse of each of the matrices, if it exists
in Exercises 1 to 1 .

é1 -1ù é 1ù é1 ù
1. ê ú 2. ê ú 3. ê ú
ë û ë 1 1û ë û

é ù é 1ù é 5ù
4. ê5 ú 5. ê ú 6. ê ú
ë û ë û ë1 û

é 1ù é 5ù é 1 ù
7. ê5 ú 8. ê ú 9. ê ú
ë û ë û ë û

é -1ù é -6 ù é 6 - ù
10. 11. ê ú 12. ê
ê-
ë
ú
û ë1 - û ë- 1 úû

é - ù
é - ù é 1ù ê ú
13. ê -1 ú 14. ê ú. 15. ê ú
ë û ë û êë úû
-

é1 - ù é -1 ù
ê- -5úú ê5 1 ú
16. ê 17. ê ú
êë 5 úû êë 1 úû
18. Matrices A and will be inverse of each other only if
A A A A A
C A , A I A A I
 MATHEMATICS

Miscellaneous Examples

é cos q sin q ù é cos nq sin nq ù

Example 26 If A = ê ú , then prove that A n = ê ú , n Î N.
ë - sin q cos q û ë - sin nq cos nq û

Solution We shall prove the result by using principle of mathematical induction.

é cos q sin q ù é cos nq sin nq ù
We have n If A = ê ú , then A n = ê ú,nÎN
ë - sin q cos q û ë - sin nq cos nq û

é cos q sin q ù é cos q sin q ù

1 A=ê ú , so A1 = ê ú
ë - sin q cos q û ë - sin q cos q û
Therefore, the result is true for n 1.
Let the result be true for n k. So

é cos q sin q ù k é cos k q sin k q ù

k A=ê ú , then A = ê - sin k q cos k q ú
ë - sin q cos q û ë û
Now, we prove that the result holds for n k 1

é cos q sin q ù é cos k q sin k q ù

Now Ak 1 A × Ak = ê úê ú
ë - sin q cos q û ë - sin k q cos k q û

é cos q cos k q sin q sin k q cos q sin k q + sin q cos k q ù

ê- sin q cos k q + cos q sin k q - sin q sin k q + cos q cos k q ú
ë û

é cos q + k q sin q + k q ù é cos k + 1 q sin k + 1 q ù

ê- sin q + k q =
ë cos q + k q úû êë- sin k + 1 q cos k + 1 qúû
Therefore, the result is true for n k 1. Thus by principle of mathematical induction,
é cos n q sin n q ù
we have A n = ê , holds for all natural numbers.
ë- sin n q cos n q úû

Example 27 If A and are symmetric matrices of the same order, then show that A
is symmetric if and only if A and commute, that is A A.
Solution Since A and are both symmetric matrices, therefore A¢ A and ¢ .
Let A be symmetric, then A ¢ A
 MATRICES

ut A ¢ ¢A¢ A Why
Therefore A A
Conversely, if A A, then we shall show that A is symmetric.
Now A ¢ ¢A¢
A as A and are symmetric
A
Hence A is symmetric.

é -1ù é5 ù é 5ù
Example 28 Let A = ê ú, =ê ú,C=ê ú . ind a matrix such that
ë û ë û ë û
C A .
Solution Since A, , C are all square matrices of order , and C A is well
defined, must be a square matrix of order .
éa b ù
Let ê c d ú . Then C A gives
ë û

é 5ù é a b ù é -1ù é 5 ù
or ê ú êc d ú - ê úê ú
ë ûë û ë ûë û

é a + 5c b + 5d ù é ù é ù
or ê a+ c -
ë b + d úû êë ú
û
ê
ë
ú
û

é a + 5c - b + 5d ù é ù
or ê a+ c- ú ê ú
ë b+ d - û ë û
y equality of matrices, we get
a 5c ... 1
a c ...
b 5d ...
and b d ...
Solving 1 and , we get a 1 1, c . Solving and , we get b 11 ,
d .
é a b ù é -1 1 -11 ù
Therefore êc d ú = ê ú
ë û ë û
1 MATHEMATICS

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 3

é 1ù
1. Let A = ê ú , show that aI bA n
an I nan 1
bA, where I is the identity
ë û
matrix of order and n Î N.

é1 1 1ù é n -1 n -1 n -1
ù
ê ú ê n -1 n -1 n -1
ú
2. If A = ê1 1 1ú , prove that A = ê
n
ú , n Î N.
êë1 1 1úû ê n -1 n -1 n -1 ú
ë û

é - ù é1 + n - n ù
3. If A = ê ú , then prove that A n = ê , where n is any positive
ë1 -1û ë n 1 - n úû
integer.
4. If A and are symmetric matrices, prove that A A is a skew symmetric
matrix.
5. Show that the matrix ¢A is symmetric or skew symmetric according as A is
symmetric or skew symmetric.

é y zù
6. ind the values of x, y, z if the matrix A = ê x y - z úú satisfy the equation
ê
êë x - y z úû
A¢A I.

é1 ù é ù
7. or what values of x 1 1 êê 1 úú ê ú
ê ú
êë1 úû êë x úû

é 1ù
8. If A = ê ú , show that A 5A I .
ë-1 û

é1 ù éxù
9. ind x, if x -5 -1 êê 1úú êê úú =
êë úû êë1 úû
 MATRICES 1 1

10. A manufacturer produces three products x, y, z which he sells in two markets.

Annual sales are indicated below
Market Products
I 1 , , 1 ,
II 6, , ,
a If unit sale prices of x, y and z are Rs .5 , Rs 1.5 and Rs 1. , respectively,
find the total revenue in each market with the help of matrix algebra.
b If the unit costs of the above three commodities are Rs . , Rs 1. and 5
paise respectively. ind the gross profit.

é1 ù é- - - ù
11. ind the matrix so that ê =
ë 5 6 úû êë 6 úû
12. If A and are square matrices of the same order such that A A, then prove
by induction that A n n
A. urther, prove that A n An n
for all n Î N.
Choose the correct answer in the following questions

éa b ù
13. If A ê g -a úû
is such that A I, then
ë
A 1 a bg 1 a bg
C 1 a bg 1 a bg
14. If the matrix A is both symmetric and skew symmetric, then
A A is a diagonal matrix A is a ero matrix
C A is a square matrix None of these
15. If A is square matrix such that A A, then I A A is equal to
A A I A C I A

Summary
® A matrix is an ordered rectangular array of numbers or functions.
® A matrix having m rows and n columns is called a matrix of order m n.
® [aij]m 1
is a column matrix.
® [aij]1 n
is a row matrix.
® An m n matrix is a square matrix if m n.
® A [aij]m m
is a diagonal matrix if aij , when i ¹ j.
1 MATHEMATICS

® A [aij ]n n is a scalar matrix if aij , when i ¹ j, aij k, k is some

constant , when i j.
® A [aij]n n
is an identity matrix, if aij 1, when i j, aij , when i ¹ j.
® A ero matrix has all its elements as ero.
® A [aij] [bij] if i A and are of same order, ii aij bij for all
possible values of i and j.
® kA k[aij]m n
[k aij ]m n

® A 1A
® A A 1
® A A
® A C A C , where A, and C are of same order.
® kA kA k , where A and are of same order, k is constant.
® k l A kA lA, where k and l are constant.
n
® If A [aij]m n
and [bjk ]n p
, then A C [cik]m p, where cik = å aij b jk
j =1

® i A C A C, ii A C A AC, iii A C AC C
® If A [aij]m n, then A¢ or A T
[aji]n m

® i A¢ ¢ A, ii kA ¢ kA¢, iii A ¢ A¢ ¢, iv A ¢ ¢A¢

® A is a symmetric matrix if A¢ A.
® A is a skew symmetric matrix if A¢ A.
® Any square matrix can be represented as the sum of a symmetric and a
skew symmetric matrix.
® Elementary operations of a matrix are as follows
i Ri « Rj or Ci « Cj
ii Ri ® kRi or Ci ® kCi
iii Ri ® Ri kRj or Ci ® Ci kCj
® If A and are two square matrices such that A A I, then is the
inverse matrix of A and is denoted by A 1 and A is the inverse of .
® Inverse of a square matrix, if it exists, is unique.

—v—
 Chapter 4
DETERMINANTS

v All Mathematical truths are relative and conditional. — C.P. STEINMETZ v

4.1 Introduction
In the previous chapter, we have studied about matrices
and algebra of matrices. We have also learnt that a system
of algebraic equations can be expressed in the form of
matrices. This means, a system of linear equations like
a1 x + b1 y = c 1
a2 x + b2 y = c 2
éa b ù éxù éc ù
can be represented as ê 1 1 ú ê ú = ê 1 ú . Now, this
ë a2 b2 û ë y û ë c2 û
system of equations has a unique solution or not, is
determined by the number a1 b2 – a2 b1. (Recall that if
a1 b1 P.S. Laplace
¹ or, a1 b2 – a2 b1 ¹ 0, then the system of linear
a2 b2 (1749-1827)
equations has a unique solution). The number a1 b2 – a2 b1
éa b ù
which determines uniqueness of solution is associated with the matrix A = ê 1 1 ú
ë a2 b2 û
and is called the determinant of A or det A. Determinants have wide applications in
Engineering, Science, Economics, Social Science, etc.
In this chapter, we shall study determinants up to order three only with real entries.
Also, we will study various properties of determinants, minors, cofactors and applications
of determinants in finding the area of a triangle, adjoint and inverse of a square matrix,
consistency and inconsistency of system of linear equations and solution of linear
equations in two or three variables using inverse of a matrix.
4.2 Determinant
To every square matrix A = [aij] of order n, we can associate a number (real or
complex) called determinant of the square matrix A, where aij = (i, j)th element of A.
10 MAT EMATI S

This may be thought of as a function which associates each square matrix with a
unique number (real or complex). If M is the set of square matrices, is the set of
numbers (real or complex) and f M ® is defined by f (A) = k, where A Î M and
k Î , then f (A) is called the determinant of A. It is also denoted by A or det A or D.
éa b ù a b
If A = ê ú , then determinant of A is written as A = = det (A)
ëc d û c d
Remarks
(i) or matrix A, A is read as determinant of A and not modulus of A.
(ii) nly square matrices have determinants.
4.2.1 Determinant of a matrix of order one
et A = [a ] be the matrix of order 1, then determinant of A is defined to be equal to a
4.2.2 Determinant of a matrix of order two
é a11 a12 ù
et A= ê ú be a matrix of order 2 2,
ë a21 a22 û
then the determinant of A is defined as

det (A) = A = D = = a11a22 – a21a12

2
Example 1 Evaluate .
–1 2

2
Solution We have = 2 (2) – (–1) = + = .
–1 2

x x +1
Example 2 Evaluate
x –1 x
Solution We have
x x +1
= x (x) – (x + 1) (x – 1) = x2 – (x2 – 1) = x2 – x2 + 1 = 1
x –1 x

4.2.3 Determinant of a matrix of order 3 × 3

Determinant of a matrix of order three can be determined by expressing it in terms of
second order determinants. This is known as expansion of a determinant along
a row (or a column). There are six ways of expanding a determinant of order
 DETERMINANTS 10

corresponding to each of three rows (R1, R2 and R ) and three columns ( 1, 2

and
) giving the same value as shown below.
onsider the determinant of square matrix A = [aij]

a11 a12 a13

i.e., A = a21 a22 a2
a1 a2 a
Expansion along first Row (R1)
Step 1 Multiply first element a11 of R1 by (–1)(1 + 1) [(–1)sum of suffixes in a11] and with the
second order determinant obtained by deleting the elements of first row (R1) and first
column ( 1) of A as a11 lies in R1 and 1,
a22 a2
i.e., (–1)1 + 1 a11
a2 a
Step 2 Multiply 2nd element a12 of R1 by (–1)1 + 2 [(–1)sum of suffixes in a12] and the second
order determinant obtained by deleting elements of first row (R1) and 2nd column ( 2)
of A as a12 lies in R1 and 2,
a21 a2
i.e., (–1)1 + 2 a12 a a
1

Step 3 Multiply third element a1 of R1 by (–1)1 + [(–1)sum of suffixes in a ] and the second
1

order determinant obtained by deleting elements of first row (R1) and third column ( )
of A as a1 lies in R1 and ,
a21 a22
i.e., (–1)1 + a1 a1 a2
Step 4 Now the expansion of determinant of A, that is, A written as sum of all three
terms obtained in steps 1, 2 and above is given by
a22 a2 a21 a2
det A = A = (–1)1 + 1 a11 a + (–1)1 + 2 a12
2 a a1 a

1+ a21 a22
+ (–1) a1
a 1 a2
or A = a11 (a22 a – a 2 a2 ) – a12 (a21 a – a 1 a2 )
+ a1 (a21 a 2 – a 1 a22 )
10 MAT EMATI S

= a11 a22 a – a11 a 2 a2 – a12 a21 a + a12 a 1 a2 + a1 a21 a 2

– a1 a 1 a22 ... (1)

ANote We shall apply all four steps together.

Expansion along second row (R2)
a 11 a12 a1
A = a 21 a 22 a 23
a 1 a 2 a
Expanding along R2, we get

2 +1 a12 a1 a11 a1
A = (–1) a21 + (–1) 2 + 2 a22
a2 a a1 a

a11 a12
+ (–1) 2 + a2
a 1 a 2

= – a21 (a12 a – a 2 a1 ) + a22 (a11 a – a 1 a1 )

– a2 (a11 a 2 – a 1 a12 )
A = – a21 a12 a + a21 a 2 a1 + a22 a11 a – a22 a 1 a1 – a2 a11 a 2
+ a2 a 1 a12
= a11 a22 a – a11 a2 a 2 – a12 a21 a + a12 a2 a 1 + a1 a21 a 2
– a1 a 1 a22 ... (2)
Expansion along first Column (C1)
a11 a12 a1
A = a21 a22 a2
a31 a2 a
y expanding along 1
, we get

1 + 1 a22 a2 a12 a1
A = a11 (–1) + a21 ( -1) 2 + 1
a2 a a 2 a

+1 a 12 a1
+ a 1 (–1) a22 a2
= a11 (a22 a – a2 a 2) – a21 (a12 a – a1 a 2) + a 1 (a12 a2 – a1 a22)
 DETERMINANTS 10

A = a11 a22 a – a11 a2 a 2 – a21 a12 a + a21 a1 a 2 + a 1 a12 a2

– a 1 a1 a22
= a11 a22 a – a11 a2 a 2 – a12 a21 a + a12 a2 a 1 + a1 a21 a 2
– a1 a 1 a22 ... ( )
learly, values of A in (1), (2) and ( ) are equal. It is left as an exercise to the
reader to verify that the values of A by expanding along R , 2 and are equal to the
value of A obtained in (1), (2) or ( ).
ence, expanding a determinant along any row or column gives same value.
Remarks
(i) or easier calculations, we shall expand the determinant along that row or column
which contains maximum number of eros.
(ii) While expanding, instead of multiplying by (–1) i + j, we can multiply by +1 or –1
according as (i + j) is even or odd.

é2 2ù é1 1ù
(iii) et A = ê ú and = ê ú . Then, it is easy to verify that A = 2 . Also
ë 0û ë2 0û
A = 0 – = – and = 0 – 2 = – 2.
bserve that, A = (– 2) = 22 or A = 2n , where n = 2 is the order of
square matrices A and .
In general, if A = k where A and are square matrices of order n, then A = kn
, where n = 1, 2,
1 2
Example 3 Evaluate the determinant D = –1 0 .
1 0

Solution Note that in the third column, two entries are ero. So expanding along third
column ( ), we get

–1 1 2 1 2
D= –0 +0
1 1 –1
= (–1 – 12) – 0 + 0 = – 2

0 sin a – cos a
Example 4 Evaluate D = – sin a 0 sin b .
cos a – sin b 0
10 MAT EMATI S

Solution Expanding along R1, we get

0 sin b – sin a sin b – sin a 0

D= 0 – sin a – cos a
– sin b 0 cos a 0 cos a – sin b
= 0 – sin a (0 – sin b cos a) – cos a (sin a sin b – 0)
= sin a sin b cos a – cos a sin a sin b = 0
x 2
Example 5 ind values of x for which = .
x 1 1

x 2
Solution We have =
x 1 1
i.e. – x2 = –
i.e. x2 =

ence x= ±2 2

EXERCISE 4.1
Evaluate the determinants in Exercises 1 and 2.
2
1.
– –1

cos q – sin q x2 – x + 1 x – 1
2. (i) (ii)
sin q cos q x +1 x +1

é1 2 ù
3. If A = ê , then show that 2A = A
ë 2 úû

é1 0 1ù
ê ú
4. If A = ê 0 1 2 ú , then show that A =2 A
êë 0 0 úû
5. Evaluate the determinants
–1 –2 –
(i) 0 0 –1 (ii) 1 1 –2
– 0 2 1
 DETERMINANTS 10

0 1 2 2 –1 –2
(iii) –1 0 – (iv) 0 2 –1
–2 0 – 0

é 1 1 –2 ù
ê ú
6. If A = ê 2 1 – ú , find A
ëê – úû
7. ind values of x, if
2 2x 2 x
(i) = (ii) =
1 x 2x
x 2 2
8. If = , then x is equal to
1 x 1
(A) ( ) ( ) – (D) 0
4.3 Properties of Determinants
In the previous section, we have learnt how to expand the determinants. In this section,
we will study some properties of determinants which simplifies its evaluation by obtaining
maximum number of eros in a row or a column. These properties are true for
determinants of any order. owever, we shall restrict ourselves upto determinants of
order only.
Property 1 The value of the determinant remains unchanged if its rows and columns
are interchanged.
a1 a2 a
Verification et D = b1 b2 b
c1 c2 c
Expanding along first row, we get
b2 b b b b1 b2
D = a1 - a2 1 +a
c2 c c1 c c1 c2
= a1 (b2 c – b c2) – a2 (b1 c – b c1) + a (b1 c2 – b2 c1)
y interchanging the rows and columns of D, we get the determinant
a1 b1 c1
D1 = a2 b2 c2
a b c
110 MAT EMATI S

Expanding D1 along first column, we get

D1 = a1 (b2 c – c2 b ) – a2 (b1 c – b c1) + a (b1 c2 – b2 c1)
ence D = D 1
Remark It follows from above property that if A is a square matrix, then
det (A) = det (A¢), where A¢ = transpose of A.

A Note If R = ith row and

i
= ith column, then for interchange of row and
columns, we will symbolically write « R
i

i i

et us verify the above property by example.

2 –
Example 6 erify roperty 1 for D = 0
1 –
Solution Expanding the determinant along first row, we have
0 0
D= 2 – (– ) +
– 1 – 1
= 2 (0 – 20) + (– 2 – ) + ( 0 – 0)
=– 0–1 +1 0=–2
y interchanging rows and columns, we get
2 1
D1 = – 0 (Expanding along first column)
–
0 1 1
= 2 – (– ) +
– – 0
= 2 (0 – 20) + (– 2 – ) + ( 0 – 0)
=– 0–1 +1 0=–2
learly D = D1
ence, roperty 1 is verified.
Property 2 If any two rows (or columns) of a determinant are interchanged, then sign
of determinant changes.
a1 a2 a
Verification et D = b1 b2 b
c1 c2 c
 DETERMINANTS 111

Expanding along first row, we get

D = a1 (b2 c – b c2) – a2 (b1 c – b c1) + a (b1 c2 – b2 c1)
Interchanging first and third rows, the new determinant obtained is given by
c1 c2 c
D1 = b1 b2 b
a1 a2 a

Expanding along third row, we get

D1 = a1 (c2 b – b2 c ) – a2 (c1 b – c b1) + a (b2 c1 – b1 c2)
= – [a1 (b2 c – b c2) – a2 (b1 c – b c1) + a (b1 c2 – b2 c1)]
learly D1 = – D
Similarly, we can verify the result by interchanging any two columns.

ANote We can denote the interchange of rows by R « R and interchange of

i j
columns by i
« j
.

2 –
Example 7 erify roperty 2 for D = 0 .
1 –

2 –
Solution D = 0 = – 2 (See Example )
1 –

Interchanging rows R2 and R i.e., R2 « R , we have

2 –
D1 = 1 –
0
Expanding the determinant D1 along first row, we have
– 1 – 1
D1 = 2 – (– ) +
0 0
= 2 (20 – 0) + ( + 2) + (0 – 0)
= 0+1 –1 0=2
112 MAT EMATI S

learly D1 = – D
ence, roperty 2 is verified.
Property 3 If any two rows (or columns) of a determinant are identical (all corresponding
elements are same), then value of determinant is ero.
Proof If we interchange the identical rows (or columns) of the determinant D, then D
does not change. owever, by roperty 2, it follows that D has changed its sign
Therefore D=–D
or D=0
et us verify the above property by an example.
2
Example 8 Evaluate D = 2 2
2
Solution Expanding along first row, we get
D= ( – )–2( – )+ ( – )
= 0 – 2 (– ) + (–2) = – =0
ere R1 and R are identical.
Property 4 If each element of a row (or a column) of a determinant is multiplied by a
constant k, then its value gets multiplied by k.

a1 b1 c1
Verification et D = a2 b2 c2
a b c

and D1 be the determinant obtained by multiplying the elements of the first row by k.
Then
k a1 k b1 k c1
D1 = a2 b2 c2
a b c

Expanding along first row, we get

D1 = k a1 (b2 c – b c2) – k b1 (a2 c – c2 a ) + k c1 (a2 b – b2 a )
= k [a1 (b2 c – b c2) – b1 (a2 c – c2 a ) + c1 (a2 b – b2 a )]
=k D
 DETERMINANTS 11

k a1 k b1 k c1 a1 b1 c1
ence a2 b2 c2 = k a2 b2 c2
a b c a b c

Remarks
(i) y this property, we can take out any common factor from any one row or any
one column of a given determinant.
(ii) If corresponding elements of any two rows (or columns) of a determinant are
proportional (in the same ratio), then its value is ero. or example

a1 a2 a
D= b1 b2 b = 0 (rows R1 and R2 are proportional)
k a1 k a2 ka

102 1
Example 9 Evaluate 1
1

102 1 (1 ) ( ) ( ) 1
Solution Note that 1 = 1 = 1 =0
1 1 1

( sing roperties and )

Property 5 If some or all elements of a row or column of a determinant are expressed
as sum of two (or more) terms, then the determinant can be expressed as sum of two
(or more) determinants.

a1 + l1 a2 + l 2 a +l a1 a2 a l1 l 2 l
or example, b1 b2 b = b1 b2 b + b1 b2 b
c1 c2 c c1 c2 c c1 c2 c

a1 + l1 a2 + l 2 a +l
Verification . .S. = b1 b2 b
c1 c2 c
11 MAT EMATI S

Expanding the determinants along the first row, we get

D = (a1 + l1) (b2 c – c2 b ) – (a2 + l2) (b1 c – b c1)
+ (a + l ) (b1 c2 – b2 c1)
= a1 (b2 c – c2 b ) – a2 (b1 c – b c1) + a (b1 c2 – b2 c1)
+ l1 (b2 c – c2 b ) – l2 (b1 c – b c1) + l (b1 c2 – b2 c1)
(by rearranging terms)

a1 a 2 a l1 l 2 l
= b1 b2 b + b1 b2 b = R. .S.
c1 c2 c c1 c2 c
Similarly, we may verify roperty for other rows or columns.

a b c
Example 10 Show that a + 2 x b + 2 y c + 2 z = 0
x y z

a b c a b c a b c
Solution We have a + 2 x b + 2 y c + 2 z = a b c + 2x 2 y 2 z
x y z x y z x y z
(by roperty )
=0+0=0 ( sing roperty and roperty )
Property 6 If, to each element of any row or column of a determinant, the equimultiples
of corresponding elements of other row (or column) are added, then value of determinant
remains the same, i.e., the value of determinant remain same if we apply the operation
Ri ® Ri + kRj or i ® i + k j .
Verification
a1 a2 a a1 + k c1 a2 + k c2 a + kc
et D = b1 b2 b and D1 = b1 b2 b ,
c1 c2 c c1 c2 c

where D1 is obtained by the operation R1 ® R1 + kR .

ere, we have multiplied the elements of the third row (R ) by a constant k and
added them to the corresponding elements of the first row (R1).
Symbolically, we write this operation as R1 ® R1 + k R .
 DETERMINANTS 11

Now, again
a1 a2 a k c1 k c2 kc
D1 = b1 b2 b + b1 b2 b ( sing roperty )
c1 c2 c c1 c2 c

=D+0 (since R1 and R are proportional)

ence D = D1
Remarks
(i) If D1 is the determinant obtained by applying Ri ® kRi or i
®k i
to the
determinant D, then D1 = kD.
(ii) If more than one operation like Ri ® Ri + kRj is done in one step, care should be
taken to see that a row that is affected in one operation should not be used in
another operation. A similar remark applies to column operations.

a a+b a+b+c
Example 11 rove that 2a a + 2b a + b + 2c = a .
a a + b 10a + b + c

Solution Applying operations R2 ® R2 – 2R1 and R ® R – R1 to the given

determinant D, we have

a a+b a+b+c
D= 0 a 2a + b
0 a a+ b
Now applying R ® R – R2 , we get
a a+b a+b+c
D= 0 a 2a + b
0 0 a

Expanding along 1
, we obtain

a 2a + b
D= a +0+0
0 a

= a (a2 – 0) = a (a2) = a
11 MAT EMATI S

Example 12 Without expanding, prove that

x+ y y+z z+x
D= z x y =0
1 1 1
Solution Applying R1 ® R1 + R2 to D, we get
x+ y+z x+y+z x+ y+z
D= z x y
1 1 1
Since the elements of R1 and R are proportional, D = 0.
Example 13 Evaluate
1 a bc
D = 1 b ca
1 c ab
Solution Applying R2 ® R2 – R1 and R ® R – R1, we get
1 a bc
D = 0 b - a c ( a - b)
0 c - a b (a - c)
Taking factors (b – a) and (c – a) common from R2 and R , respectively, we get
1 a bc
D = (b - a ) (c - a ) 0 1 – c
0 1 –b
= (b – a) (c – a) [(– b + c)] (Expanding along first column)
= (a – b) (b – c) (c – a)
b+c a a
Example 14 rove that b c+a b = abc
c c a+b

b+c a a
Solution et D = b c+a b
c c a+b
 DETERMINANTS 11

Applying R1 ® R1 – R2 – R to D, we get
0 –2c –2b
D= b c +a b
c c a+b
Expanding along R1, we obtain
c+a b b b b c+a
D= 0 – (–2 c) + (–2b)
c a+b c a+b c c
= 2 c (a b + b2 – bc) – 2 b (b c – c2 – ac)
= 2 a b c + 2 cb2 – 2 bc2 – 2 b2c + 2 bc2 + 2 abc
= abc
x x2 1+ x
Example 15 If x, y, z are different and D = y y2
1 + y = 0 , then
z z2 1+ z
show that 1 + xyz = 0
Solution We have
x x2 1+ x
D= y y2 1 + y
z z2 1+ z

x x2 1 x x2 x
2 2
= y y 1+ y y y ( sing roperty )
2 2
z z 1 z z z

1 x x2 1 x x2
2
= ( -1) 1 y y 2 + xyz 1 y y2 ( sing « 2
and then 1
« 2
)
1 z z2 1 z z2

1 x x2
= 1 y y 2 (1 + xyz )
1 z z2
11 MAT EMATI S

1 x x2
= 1 + xyz 0 y-x y2 - x2 ( sing R2 ® R2–R1 and R ® R – R1)
0 z-x z 2 - x2
Taking out common factor (y – x) from R2 and (z – x) from R , we get

1 x x2
D = (1+xyz ) (y –x) (z –x ) 0 1 y+x
0 1 z+x

= (1 + xyz) (y – x) (z – x) (z – y) (on expanding along 1)

Since D = 0 and x, y, z are all different, i.e., x – y ¹ 0, y – z ¹ 0, z – x ¹ 0, we get
1 + xyz = 0
Example 16 Show that
1+ a 1 1
æ 1 1 1ö
1 1+ b 1 = abc ç1 + + + ÷ = abc + bc + ca + ab
è a b cø
1 1 1+ c
Solution Taking out factors a,b,c common from R1, R2 and R , we get

1 1 1
+1
a a a
1 1 1
. .S. = abc +1
b b b
1 1 1
+1
c c c

Applying R1® R1 + R2 + R , we have

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1+ + + 1+ + + 1+ + +
a b c a b c a b c
1 1 1
D = abc +1
b b b
1 1 1
+1
c c c
 DETERMINANTS 11

1 1 1
æ 1 1 1ö 1 1 1
= abc ç1+ + + ÷ +1
è a b cø b b b
1 1 1
+1
c c c
Now applying 2 ® 2 – 1, ® – 1, we get
1 0 0
æ 1 1 1ö 1
D = abc ç 1+ + + ÷ 1 0
è a b cø b
1
0 1
c
æ 1 1 1ö
= abc ç1 + + + ÷ ëé1 1 – 0 ûù
è a b cø
æ 1 1 1ö
= abc ç1+ + + ÷ = abc + bc + ca + ab = R. .S.
è a b cø

A®Note –Alternately
a .
try by applying 1
® 1
– 2
and ® – 2
, then apply
1 1

EXERCISE 4.2
sing the property of determinants and without expanding in Exercises 1 to , prove
that
x a x+a a -b b-c c-a
1. y b y +b = 0 2. b-c c-a a -b =0
z c z +c c-a a -b b-c

2 1 bc a b + c
3. =0 4. 1 ca b c + a = 0
1 ab c a + b

b+c q+r y+z a p x

5. c+a r+ p z+ x = 2 b q y
a+b p+q x+ y c r z
120 MAT EMATI S

0 a -b -a 2 ab ac
6. -a 0 -c = 0 7. ba -b 2 bc = a 2 b2 c 2
b c 0 ca cb -c 2
y using properties of determinants, in Exercises to 1 , show that
1 a a2
2
8. (i) 1 b b = a - b b - c c - a
1 c c2

1 1 1
(ii) a b c = a -b b -c c -a a +b +c
a b c

x x2 yz
9. y y2 zx = (x – y) (y – z) (z – x) (xy + yz + zx)
2
z z xy

x+ 2x 2x
2x = x + -x
2
10. (i) 2x x+
2x 2x x+

y+k y y
(ii) y y+k y =k2 y+k
y y y+k

a -b -c 2a 2a
11. (i) 2b b-c-a 2b = a + b + c
2c 2c c-a-b

x + y + 2z x y
(ii) z y + z + 2x y =2 x+ y+ z
z x z + x + 2y
 DETERMINANTS 121

1 x x2
2
12. x2 1 x = 1- x
x x2 1

1 + a2 - b2 2ab -2b
2 2
13. 2ab 1- a + b 2a = 1 + a 2 + b2
2b -2a 1 - a 2 - b2

a2 + 1 ab ac
14. ab b2 + 1 bc =1 + a 2 + b 2 + c 2
ca cb c2 + 1

hoose the correct answer in Exercises 1 and 1 .

15. et A be a square matrix of order , then kA is equal to
(A) k A ( ) k A2
( ) k A (D) k A
16. Which of the following is correct
(A) Determinant is a square matrix.
( ) Determinant is a number associated to a matrix.
( ) Determinant is a number associated to a square matrix.
(D) None of these
4.4 Area of a Triangle
In earlier classes, we have studied that the area of a triangle whose vertices are
1
(x1, y1), (x2, y2) and (x , y ), is given by the expression [x (y –y ) + x2 (y –y1) +
2 1 2
x (y1–y2)]. Now this expression can be written in the form of a determinant as
x1 y1 1
1
D= x2 y2 1 ... (1)
2
x y 1
Remarks
(i) Since area is a positive quantity, we always take the absolute value of the
determinant in (1).
122 MAT EMATI S

(ii) If area is given, use both positive and negative values of the determinant for
calculation.
(iii) The area of the triangle formed by three collinear points is ero.
Example 17 ind the area of the triangle whose vertices are ( , ), (– , 2) and ( , 1).
Solution The area of triangle is given by
1
1
D= – 2 1
2
1 1
1
= é 2 –1 – – – + 1 – – 10 ûù
2ë
1 1
= + 2 –1 =
2 2
Example 18 ind the equation of the line joining A(1, ) and (0, 0) using determinants
and find k if D(k, 0) is a point such that area of triangle A D is sq units.
Solution et (x, y) be any point on A . Then, area of triangle A is ero (Why ). So
0 0 1
1
1 1 =0
2
x y 1
1
This gives y – x = 0 or y = x,
2
which is the equation of required line A .
Also, since the area of the triangle A D is sq. units, we have
1 1
1
0 0 1 =
2
k 0 1
- k
This gives, = ± , i.e., k = m 2.
2

EXERCISE 4.3
1. ind area of the triangle with vertices at the point given in each of the following
(i) (1, 0), ( , 0), ( , ) (ii) (2, ), (1, 1), (10, )
(iii) (–2, – ), ( , 2), (–1, – )
 DETERMINANTS 12

2. Show that points

A (a, b + c), (b, c + a), (c, a + b) are collinear.
3. ind values of k if area of triangle is sq. units and vertices are
(i) (k, 0), ( , 0), (0, 2) (ii) (–2, 0), (0, ), (0, k)
4. (i) ind equation of line joining (1, 2) and ( , ) using determinants.
(ii) ind equation of line joining ( , 1) and ( , ) using determinants.
5. If area of triangle is sq units with vertices (2, – ), ( , ) and (k, ). Then k is
(A) 12 ( ) –2 ( ) –12, –2 (D) 12, –2
4.5 Minors and Cofactors
In this section, we will learn to write the expansion of a determinant in compact form
using minors and cofactors.
Definition 1 Minor of an element aij of a determinant is the determinant obtained by
deleting its ith row and jth column in which element aij lies. Minor of an element aij is
denoted by Mij.
Remark Minor of an element of a determinant of order n(n ³ 2) is a determinant of
order n – 1.
1 2
Example 19 ind the minor of element in the determinant D =

Solution Since lies in the second row and third column, its minor M 2 is given by

1 2
M2 = = – 1 = – (obtained by deleting R2 and in D).

Definition 2 ofactor of an element aij , denoted by Aij is defined by

Aij = (–1)i + j Mij , where Mij is minor of aij .

1 –2
Example 20 ind minors and cofactors of all the elements of the determinant

Solution Minor of the element aij is Mij

ere a11 = 1. So M11 = Minor of a11=
M12 = Minor of the element a12 =
M21 = Minor of the element a21 = –2
12 MAT EMATI S

M22 = Minor of the element a22 = 1

Now, cofactor of aij is Aij. So
A11 = (–1)1 + 1 M11 = (–1)2 ( ) =
A12 = (–1)1 + 2 M12 = (–1) ( ) = –
A21 = (–1)2 + 1 M21 = (–1) (–2) = 2
A22 = (–1)2 + 2 M22 = (–1) (1) = 1
Example 21 ind minors and cofactors of the elements a11, a21 in the determinant

a11 a12 a1
D = a21 a22 a2
a1 a2 a

Solution y definition of minors and cofactors, we have

a22 a2
Minor of a11 = M11 = a a = a22 a – a2 a 2
2

ofactor of a11 = A11 = (–1)1+1 M11 = a22 a – a2 a 2

a12 a1
Minor of a21 = M21 = = a12 a – a1 a 2
a2 a
ofactor of a21 = A21 = (–1)2+1 M21 = (–1) (a12 a – a1 a 2) = – a12 a + a1 a 2
Remark Expanding the determinant D, in Example 21, along R1, we have
a22 a2 a21 a2 a21 a22
D = (–1) a11 a
1+1
a + (–1) a12 a
1+2
a + (–1) a1 a 1 a 2
1+
2 1

= a11 A11 + a12 A12 + a1 A1 , where Aij is cofactor of aij

= sum of product of elements of R1 with their corresponding cofactors
Similarly, D can be calculated by other five ways of expansion that is along R2, R ,
1
, 2
and .
ence D = sum of the product of elements of any row (or column) with their
corresponding cofactors.

ANote If elements of a row (or column) are multiplied with cofactors of any
other row (or column), then their sum is ero. or example,
 DETERMINANTS 12

D = a11 A21 + a12 A22 + a1 A2

a12 a1 a11 a1 a a
= a11 (–1)1+1 + a12 (–1)1+2 + a1 (–1)1+ 11 12
a2 a a1 a a1 a2
a11 a12 a1
= a11 a12 a1 = 0 (since R1 and R2 are identical)
a1 a2 a
Similarly, we can try for other rows and columns.

Example 22 ind minors and cofactors of the elements of the determinant

2 –
0 and verify that a111 A 1 + a12 A 2 + a1 A = 0
1 –

0
Solution We have M11 = – = 0 –20 = –20 A11 = (–1)1+1 (–20) = –20

M12 = 1 – =– 2– =– A12 = (–1)1+2 (– )=

0
M1 = = 0–0= 0 A1 = (–1)1+ ( 0) = 0
1

–
M21 = = 21 – 2 = – A21 = (–1)2+1 (– ) =
–

2
M22 = 1 – = –1 – = –1 A22 = (–1)2+2 (–1 ) = –1

2 –
M2 = 1 = 10 + =1 A2 = (–1)2+ (1 ) = –1

–
M1= 0 = –12 – 0 = –12 A 1 = (–1) +1 (–12) = –12
12 MAT EMATI S

2
M2= = – 0 = –22 A 2 = (–1) +2 (–22) = 22

2 –
and M = =0+1 =1 A = (–1) + (1 ) = 1
0
Now a11 = 2, a12 = – , a1 = A 1 = –12, A 2 = 22, A = 1
So a11 A 1 + a12 A 2 + a1 A
= 2 (–12) + (– ) (22) + (1 ) = –2 – + 0=0

EXERCISE 4.4
Write Minors and ofactors of the elements of following determinants
2 – a c
1. (i) (ii)
0 b d

1 0 0 1 0
2. (i) 0 1 0 (ii) –1
0 0 1 0 1 2

3. sing ofactors of elements of second row, evaluate D = 2 0 1 .

1 2
1 x yz
4. sing ofactors of elements of third column, evaluate D = 1 y zx .
1 z xy

a11 a12 a1
5. If D = a21 a22 a2 and Aij is ofactors of aij , then value of D is given by
a1 a2 a
(A) a11 A 1+ a12 A 2 + a1 A ( ) a11 A11+ a12 A21 + a1 A 1
( ) a21 A11+ a22 A12 + a2 A1 (D) a11 A11+ a21 A21 + a 1 A 1
4.6 Adjoint and Inverse of a Matrix
In the previous chapter, we have studied inverse of a matrix. In this section, we shall
discuss the condition for existence of inverse of a matrix.
To find inverse of a matrix A, i.e., A–1 we shall first define adjoint of a matrix.
 DETERMINANTS 12

4.6.1 Adjoint of a matrix

Definition 3 The adjoint of a square matrix A = [aij]n n is defined as the transpose of
the matrix [Aij]n n, where Aij is the cofactor of the element aij . Adjoint of the matrix A
is denoted by adj A.

é a11 a12 a1 ù
et A = êêa21 a22 a2 úú
êë a 1 a 2 a úû

é A11 A12 A1 ù é A11 A 21 A 1ù

Then adj A = Transpose of êêA 21 A 22 A 2 úú = êê A12 A 22 A 2 úú
êë A 1 A 2 A úû êë A1 A2 A úû

é2 ù
Example 23 ind adj A for A = ê ú
ë1 û
Solution We have A11 = , A12 = –1, A21 = – , A22 = 2
é A11 A 21 ù é – ù
ence adj A = ê ú =ê ú
ë A12 A 22 û ë –1 2 û
Remark or a square matrix of order 2, given by
é a11 a12 ù
A = êa ú
ë 21 a22 û
The adj A can also be obtained by interchanging a11 and a22 and by changing signs
of a12 and a21, i.e.,

We state the following theorem without proof.

Theorem 1 If A be any given square matrix of order n, then

A(adj A) = (adj A) A = ,
where I is the identity matrix of order n
12 MAT EMATI S

Verification

é a11 a12 a1 ù é A11 A 21 A 1ù

êa ú ê
et A = ê 21 a22 a2 ú , then adj A = ê A12 A 22 A 2 úú
êë a 1 a 2 a úû êë A1 A2 A úû
Since sum of product of elements of a row (or a column) with corresponding
cofactors is equal to A and otherwise ero, we have

éA 0 0ù é 1 0 0ù
ê ú
A (adj A) = ê 0 A 0 ú = A ê 0 1 0ú = A I
ê ú
êë 0 0 A úû êë0 0 1 úû

Similarly, we can show (adj A) A = A I

ence A (adj A) = (adj A) A = A I

Definition 4 A square matrix A is said to be singular if A = 0.

é1 2ù
or example, the determinant of matrix A = ê ú is ero
ë û
ence A is a singular matrix.
Definition 5 A square matrix A is said to be non singular if A ¹ 0

é1 2ù 1 2
et A= ê ú . Then A = = – = – 2 ¹ 0.
ë û
ence A is a nonsingular matrix
We state the following theorems without proof.
Theorem 2 If A and are nonsingular matrices of the same order, then A and A
are also nonsingular matrices of the same order.
Theorem 3 The determinant of the product of matrices is equal to product of their
respective determinants, that is, A = A , where A and are square matrices of
the same order
éA 0 0ù
ê ú
Remark We know that (adj A) A = A I = ê 0 A 0ú
êë 0 0 A úû
 DETERMINANTS 12

Writing determinants of matrices on both sides, we have

A 0 0
( adj A) A = 0 A 0
0 0 A

1 0 0
i.e. (adj A) A = A 0 1 0 (Why )
0 0 1
i.e. (adj A) A = A (1)
i.e. (adj A) = A 2
In general, if A is a square matrix of order n, then adj (A) = A n–1
.
Theorem 4 A square matrix A is invertible if and only if A is nonsingular matrix.
Proof et A be invertible matrix of order n and I be the identity matrix of order n.
Then, there exists a square matrix of order n such that A = A = I
Now A = I. So A = I or A =1 (since I =1, A = A )

This gives A ¹ 0. ence A is nonsingular..

onversely, let A be nonsingular. Then A ¹ 0

Now A (adj A) = (adj A) A = A I (Theorem 1)

æ 1 ö æ 1 ö
or Aç adj A ÷ = ç adj A ÷ A = I
è A ø è A ø
1
or A = A = I, where = adj A
A
1
Thus A is invertible and A–1 = adj A
A

é1 ù
ê ú
Example 24 If A = ê1 ú , then verify that A adj A = A I. Also find A .
–1

êë1 úû

Solution We have A = 1 (1 – ) – ( – ) + ( – )=1¹0

1 0 MAT EMATI S

Now A11 = , A12 = –1, A1 = –1, A21 = – , A22 = 1,A2 = 0, A 1 = – , A 2 = 0,

A =1
é - - ù
ê -1 1 0 úú
Therefore adj A = ê
êë -1 0 1 úû

é1 ù é - - ù
ê ú ê -1 1 0 úú
Now A (adj A) = ê1 ú ê
êë1 úû êë -1 0 1 úû

é - - - + +0 - +0+ ù
ê - + + 0 - + 0 + úú
= ê - -
ëê - - - + + 0 - + 0 + ûú

é 1 0 0ù é 1 0 0ù
ê ú ê 0 1 0ú
= ê0 1 0ú = (1) ê ú = A .I
êë0 0 1 úû êë0 0 1 úû

é - - ù é - - ù
1 1ê ú ê -1 1 0 ú
Also A –1
= a d j A = ê -1 1 0 ú = ê ú
A 1
êë -1 0 1 úû êë -1 0 1úû

é2 ù é 1 -2 ù
Example 25 If A = ê ú and =ê ú , then verify that (A ) =
–1 –1
A–1.
ë1 - û ë -1 û
é2 ù é 1 -2 ù é -1 ù
Solution We have A = ê ú ê -1 ú=ê -1 úû
ë1 - û ë û ë
Since, A = –11 ¹ 0, (A )–1 exists and is given by

1 1 é -1 - ù 1 é1 ù
adj (A ) = - ê = ê
(A )–1 =
A 11 ë - ú
-1û 11 ë 1 úû

urther, A = –11 ¹ 0 and = 1 ¹ 0. Therefore, A–1 and –1

both exist and are given by

1 é- - ù é 2ù
A–1 = - , = ê
-1

11 ë - 1 2 úû
ê ú
ë1 1 û
 DETERMINANTS 1 1

1 é 2ù é - - ù 1 é -1 - ù 1 é1 ù
Therefore -1
A -1 = - ê ú ê ú =- ê ú = ê
11 ë1 1 û ë -1 2 û 11 ë - -1û 11 ë 1 úû
ence (A )–1 = –1
A–1

é2 ù
Example 26 Show that the matrix A = ê ú satisfies the equation A2 – A + I = ,
ë 1 2û
where I is 2 2 identity matrix and is 2 2 ero matrix. sing this equation, find A–1.

é 2 ù é2 ù é 12 ù
Solution We have A 2 = A.A = ê úê ú =ê ú
ë1 2 û ë1 2û ë û
é 12 ù é 12 ù é1 0 ù é 0 0 ù
ence A2 - A + I = ê ú- ê ú + ê0 1 ú = ê 0 0 ú =
ë û ë û ë û ë û
Now A2 – A + I =
Therefore AA– A = – I
or A A (A–1) – A A–1 = – I A–1 ( ost multiplying by A–1 because A ¹ 0)
or A (A A–1) – I = – A–1
or AI – I = – A–1
é 0 ù é2 ù é2 - ù
or A–1 = I–A = ê ú -ê ú = ê ú
ë 0 û ë 1 2û ë -1 2 û
é2 - ù
ence A -1 = ê ú
ë-1 2 û

EXERCISE 4.5
ind adjoint of each of the matrices in Exercises 1 and 2.
é 1 -1 2ù
é1 2 ù ê ú
1. ê ú 2. ê 2 ú
ë û êë -2 0 1úû
erify A (adj A) = (adj A) A = A I in Exercises and
é1 -1 2 ù
é2 ù ê 0 -2úú
3. ê- - úû
4. ê
ë êë1 0 úû
1 2 MAT EMATI S

ind the inverse of each of the matrices (if it exists) given in Exercises to 11.
é1 2 ù
é 2 -2ù é -1 ù ê ú
5. ê ú 6. ê ú 7. ê0 2 ú
ë û ë - 2û êë0 0 úû
é1 0 0 ù é2 1 ù é1 -1 2 ù
ê 0 úú ê
8. ê 9. ê -1 0ú ê
10. ê0 2 - ú
ú
ú
êë 2 -1úû êë - 2 1úû êë -2 úû

é1 0 0 ù
ê0 cos a sin a úú
11. ê
êë0 sin a - cos a úû
é ù é ù
12. et A = ê ú and = ê ú . erify that (A ) =
–1 –1
A–1.
ë2 û ë û

é 1ù
13. If A = ê ú , show that A2 – A + I = . ence find A–1.
ë -1 2 û
é 2ù
14. or the matrix A = ê ú , find the numbers a and b such that A + aA + bI = .
2

ë1 1 û

é1 1 1 ù
15. or the matrix A = êê1 2 - úú
êë2 -1 úû
Show that A – A2 + A + 11 I = . ence, find A–1.
é 2 -1 1 ù
ê ú
16. If A = ê -1 2 -1ú
êë 1 -1 2 úû
erify that A – A2 + A – I = and hence find A–1
17. et A be a nonsingular square matrix of order . Then adj A is equal to
(A) A ( ) A 2
( ) A (D) A
18. If A is an invertible matrix of order 2, then det (A ) is equal to
–1

1
(A) det (A) ( ) det (A) ( ) 1 (D) 0
 DETERMINANTS 1

4.7 Applications of Determinants and Matrices

In this section, we shall discuss application of determinants and matrices for solving the
system of linear equations in two or three variables and for checking the consistency of
the system of linear equations.
Consistent system A system of equations is said to be consistent if its solution (one
or more) exists.
Inconsistent system A system of equations is said to be inconsistent if its solution
does not exist.

A Note In this chapter, we restrict ourselves to the system of linear equations

having unique solutions only.
4.7.1 Solution of system of linear equations using inverse of a matrix
et us express the system of linear equations as matrix equations and solve them using
inverse of the coefficient matrix.
onsider the system of equations
a1 x + b1 y + c1 z = d1
a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = d 2
a x+b y+c z=d
é a1 b1 c1 ù éxù é d1 ù
ê a b c ú , = ê y ú and = ê d ú
et A = ê 2 2 2ú ê ú ê 2ú
êë a b c úû êë z úû êë d úû
Then, the system of equations can be written as, A = , i.e.,
é a1 b1 c1 ù éxù é d1 ù
êa b2 c2 úú êyú ê ú
ê 2 ê ú = êd 2 ú
êë a b c úû êë z úû êë d úû
Case I If A is a nonsingular matrix, then its inverse exists. Now
A =
or A (A )
–1
= A–1 (premultiplying by A–1)
or (A–1A) = A–1 (by associative property)
or I =A –1

or = A–1
This matrix equation provides unique solution for the given system of equations as
inverse of a matrix is unique. This method of solving system of equations is known as
Matrix Method.
1 MAT EMATI S

Case II If A is a singular matrix, then A = 0.

In this case, we calculate (adj A) .
If (adj A) ¹ , ( being ero matrix), then solution does not exist and the
system of equations is called inconsistent.
If (adj A) = , then system may be either consistent or inconsistent according
as the system have either infinitely many solutions or no solution.
Example 27 Solve the system of equations
2x + y = 1
x + 2y =
Solution The system of equations can be written in the form A = , where
é2 ù éxù é1 ù
A= ê ú , = ê ú and =ê ú
ë 2û ë yû ë û
Now, A = –11 ¹ 0, ence, A is nonsingular matrix and so has a unique solution.
1é2 - ù
Note that A–1 = -
11 êë - 2 úû

1é2 - ù é 1ù
Therefore = A–1 =–
11 êë - 2 úû êë úû

éxù 1 é- ù é ù
i.e. ê yú = - ê ú = ê -1ú
ë û 11 ë 11 û ë û
ence x= ,y=–1
Example 28 Solve the following system of equations by matrix method.
x – 2y + z =
2x + y – z = 1
x – y + 2z =
Solution The system of equations can be written in the form A = , where
é -2 ù é xù é ù
A = ê2 1 -1úú ,
ê = êê y úú and = êê1úú
êë - 2 úû êë z úû êë úû
We see that
A = (2 – ) + 2( + ) + (– – )=–1 ¹0
 DETERMINANTS 1

ence, A is nonsingular and so its inverse exists. Now

A11 = –1, A12 = – , A1 = –10
A21 = – , A22 = – , A2 = 1
A 1 = –1, A2= , A =

é -1 - -1ù
1 ê ú
Therefore A = - ê-
–1 -
ú
1
ëê -10 1 ûú

é -1 - -1ù é ù
1 ê ú ê1 ú
So = A
–1
=- ê- - ú ê ú
1
êë-10 1 úû êë úû

éxù é-1 ù é1 ù
ê yú 1 ê ú ê ú
i.e. ê ú = - 1 ê- ú = ê2ú
êë z úû êë - 1úû êë úû
ence x = 1, y = 2 and z = .
Example 29 The sum of three numbers is . If we multiply third number by and add
second number to it, we get 11. y adding first and third numbers, we get double of the
second number. Represent it algebraically and find the numbers using matrix method.
Solution et first, second and third numbers be denoted by x, y and z, respectively.
Then, according to given conditions, we have
x+y+z=
y + z = 11
x + z = 2y or x – 2y + z = 0
This system can be written as A = , where
é 1 1 1ù é xù é ù
ê ú ê ú ê ú
A = ê0 1 ú, = ê y ú and = ê11ú
êë1 –2 1úû êë z úû êë 0 úû

ere A = 1 1 + – (0 – ) + 0 – 1 = ¹ 0 . Now we find adj A

A11 = 1 (1 + ) = , A12 = – (0 – ) = , A1 = – 1
A21 = – (1 + 2) = – , A22 = 0, A2 = – (– 2 – 1) =
A 1 = ( – 1) = 2, A 2 = – ( – 0) = – , A = (1 – 0) = 1
1 MAT EMATI S

é – 2ù
ê 0 – úú
ence adj A = ê
êë –1 1 úû

é – 2ù
1 1ê
Thus A –1 = adj (A) = ê 0 – úú
A
êë –1 1 úû
Since = A–1
é – 2 ùé ù
1ê
= ê 0 – úú êê11úú
êë –1 1 úû êë 0 úû

é xù é 2 - + 0ù é ù é 1ù
ê yú 1 ê 1 + 0 + 0 ú 1 ê1 ú ê ú
or ê ú = ê ú = ê ú = ê 2ú
êë z úû êë - + + 0 úû êë2 úû êë úû
Thus x = 1, y = 2, z =

EXERCISE 4.6
Examine the consistency of the system of equations in Exercises 1 to .
1. x + 2y = 2 2. 2x – y = 3. x + y =
2x + y = x+y= 2x + y =
4. x + y + z = 1 5. x–y – 2z = 2 6. x – y + z =
2x + y + 2z = 2 2y – z = –1 2x + y + z = 2
ax + ay + 2az = x– y= x – 2y + z = –1
Solve system of linear equations, using matrix method, in Exercises to 1 .
7. x + 2y = 8. 2x – y = –2 9. x – y =
x+ y= x+ y= x– y=
10. x + 2y = 11. 2x + y + z = 1 12. x – y + z =
x + 2y = x – 2y – z = 2x + y – z = 0
2
y– z= x+y+z=2
13. 2x + y + z = 14. x – y + 2z =
x – 2y + z = – x+ y– z=–
x – y – 2z = 2x – y + z = 12
 DETERMINANTS 1

é2 – ù
ê 2 – úú , find A –1. sing A–1 solve the system of equations
15. If A = ê
êë1 1 –2 úû

2x – y + z = 11
x + 2y – z = –
x + y – 2z = –
16. The cost of kg onion, kg wheat and 2 kg rice is Rs 0. The cost of 2 kg onion,
kg wheat and kg rice is Rs 0. The cost of kg onion 2 kg wheat and kg
rice is Rs 0. ind cost of each item per kg by matrix method.

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 30 If a, b, c are positive and unequal, show that value of the determinant
a b c
D = b c a is negative.
c a b
Solution Applying 1
® 1
+ 2
+ to the given determinant, we get
a+b+c b c 1 b c
D = a + b + c c a = (a + b + c) 1 c a
a+b+c a b 1 a b

1 b c
= (a + b + c) 0 c – b a – c (Applying R2® R2–R1,and R ®R –R1)
0 a–b b– c
= (a + b + c) [(c – b) (b – c) – (a – c) (a – b)] (Expanding along 1
)
= (a + b + c)(– a2 – b2 – c2 + ab + bc + ca)
–1
= (a + b + c) (2a2 + 2b2 + 2c2 – 2ab – 2bc – 2ca)
2

–1
= (a + b + c) [(a – b)2 + (b – c)2 + (c – a)2]
2
which is negative (since a + b + c 0 and (a – b)2 + (b – c)2 + (c – a)2 0)
1 MAT EMATI S

Example 31 If a, b, c, are in A. , find value of

2y + y+ y+a
y+ y+ y+b
y+ y+ 10 y + c

Solution Applying R1 ® R1 + R – 2R2 to the given determinant, we obtain

0 0 0
y+ y+ y+b =0 (Since 2b = a + c)
y+ y+ 10 y + c
Example 32 Show that
2
y+ z xy zx
2
D= xy x+ z yz = 2xyz (x + y + z)
x+ y
2
xz yz

Solution Applying R1 ® xR1, R2 ® yR2 , R ® z R to D and dividing by xyz, we get

x y+ z
2
x2 y x2 z
1 2
D= xy 2 y x+ z y2 z
xyz
z x+ y
2
xz 2 yz 2

Taking common factors x, y, z from 1 2

and , respectively, we get

y+ z
2
x2 x2
xyz
x+ z
2

D= y2 y2
xyz 2
z2 z2 x+ y

Applying 2
® 2
– 1
, ® – 1
, we have

2 2 2
y+z x2 – y + z x2 - y + z
2
D= y2 x+z - y2 0
2
z2 0 x+ y – z2
 DETERMINANTS 1

Taking common factor (x + y + z) from 2

and , we have

y+z x– y+ z x– y+ z
2

D = (x + y + z) 2 y2 x+ z – y 0
z2 0 x+ y – z

Applying R1 ® R1 – (R2 + R ), we have

2 yz –2z –2 y
D = (x + y + z)2 y2 x- y+z 0
z2 0 x+ y –

1 æ 1 ö
Applying ®( + ) and ®ç + ÷ø , we get
2 2
y 1
è z
1

2 yz 0 0
y2
D = (x + y + z)2 y2 x+ z
z
z2
z2 x+ y
y
inally expanding along R1, we have
D = (x + y + z)2 (2yz) [(x + z) (x + y) – yz] = (x + y + z)2 (2yz) (x2 + xy + xz)
= (x + y + z) (2xyz)

é1 –1 2 ù é –2 0 1 ù
ê ú ê 2 – úú to solve the system of equations
Example 33 se product ê0 2 – ú ê
êë –2 úû êë 1 –2úû
x – y + 2z = 1
2y – z = 1
x – 2y + z = 2
é1 –1 2 ù é –2 0 1 ù
Solution onsider the product êê 0 2 – úú êê 2 – úú
êë –2 úû êë 1 – 2 úû
1 0 MAT EMATI S

é - 2 - + 12 0 - 2 + 2 1 + - ù é1 0 0ù
ê 0 +1 -1 0+ - ú
0 - + ú = ê 0 1 0ú
= ê ê ú
êë - - 1 + 2 0 - + + - úû ëê0 0 1ûú
–1
é1 –1 2 ù é –2 0 1 ù
ence ê 0 2 – ú = ê 2 – ú
ê ú ê ú
êë –2 úû êë 1 –2úû
Now, given system of equations can be written, in matrix form, as follows
é1 –1 2 ù é x ù é1 ù
ê0 2 – ú ê y ú ê ú
ê ú ê ú = ê1 ú
êë –2 úû ëê z ûú êë2 úû

-1
é xù é1 -1 2 ù é1 ù é –2 0 1 ù é1ù
ê yú ê
or ê ú = ê0 2 - úú êê1 úú = êê 2 – úú êê1úú
êë z úû êë -2 úû êë 2úû êë 1 –2úû êë 2úû

é -2 + 0 + 2ù é0ù
ê ú ê ú
= ê + 2- ú = ê ú
êë + 1 - úû ëê ûú
ence x = 0, y = and z =
Example 34 rove that
a + bx c + dx p + qx a c p
2
D = ax + b cx + d px + q = (1 - x ) b d q
u v w u v w

Solution Applying R1 ® R1 – x R2 to D, we get

a (1 - x 2 ) c (1 - x 2 ) p (1 - x 2 )
D= ax + b cx + d px + q
u v w

a c p
2
= (1 - x ) ax + b cx + d px + q
u v w
 DETERMINANTS 1 1

Applying R2 ® R2 – x R1, we get

a c p
2
D = (1 - x ) b d q
u v w

Miscellaneous Exercises on Chapter 4

x sin q cos q
1. rove that the determinant – sin q – x 1 is independent of q.
cos q 1 x
a a2 bc 1 a2 a
2. Without expanding the determinant, prove that b b 2 ca = 1 b2 b .
c c2 ab 1 c2 c

cos a cos b cos a sin b – sin a

3. Evaluate – sin b cos b 0 .
sin a cos b sin a sin b cos a
4. If a, b and c are real numbers, and

b+ c c+ a a+ b
D = c + a a + b b + c = 0,
a+ b b+ c c+ a
Show that either a + b + c = 0 or a = b = c.
x+a x x
5. Solve the equation x x+a x = 0, a ¹ 0
x x x+a
a2 bc ac + c 2
rove that a + ab b2 ac =
2
6. a2b2c2
ab b + bc
2
c2
é –1 1ù é 1 2 –2ù
ê – úú and = êê –1 0 úú , find A
–1

7. If A = ê –1
–1

êë –2 2 úû êë 0 –2 1 úû
1 2 MAT EMATI S

é 1 –2 1ù
ê 1úú . erify that
8. et A = ê –2
ëê 1 1 úû
(i) [adj A] = adj (A–1)
–1
(ii) (A–1)–1 = A
x y x+ y
9. Evaluate y x+ y x
x+ y x y

1 x y
10. Evaluate 1 x + y y
1 x x+ y
sing properties of determinants in Exercises 11 to 1 , prove that

a a2 b+g
11. b b2 g + a = (b – g) (g – a) (a – b) (a + b + g)
g g2 a +b

x x 2 1 + px
12. y y 2 1 + py = (1 + pxyz) (x – y) (y – z) (z – x), where p is any scalar..
z z 2 1 + pz

a – a+ b – a+ c
13. –b+ a b – b + c = (a + b + c) (ab + bc + ca)
–c + a – c+ b c

1 1+ p 1+ p+ q sin a cos a cos a + d

14. 2 +2p + p+ 2q = 1 15. sin b cos b cos b + d = 0
+ p 10 + p + q sin g cos g cos g + d
16. Solve the system of equations
2 10
+ + =
x y z
 DETERMINANTS 1

– + =1
x y z

20
+ – =2
x y z
hoose the correct answer in Exercise 1 to 1 .
17. If a, b, c, are in A. , then the determinant

x+2 x+ x + 2a
x+ x+ x + 2b is
x+ x+ x + 2c

(A) 0 ( ) 1 ( ) x (D) 2x

é x 0 0ù
18. If x, y, z are non ero real numbers, then the inverse of matrix A = êê0 y 0úú is
êë0 0 z úû

é x -1 0 0 ù é x -1 0 0 ù
ê ú ê ú
(A) ê 0 y -1 0 ú ( ) xyz ê 0 y -1 0 ú
ê ú ê ú
ë 0 0 z -1 û ë 0 0 z -1 û

é x 0 0ù é 1 0 0ù
1 ê
0 y 0úú
1 ê
( ) (D) 0 1 0úú
xyz ê xyz ê
êë0 0 z úû êë0 0 1úû

é 1 sin q 1 ù
ê- sin q 1 sin q úú , where 0 £ q £ 2p. Then
19. et A = ê
êë -1 - sin q 1 úû

(A) Det (A) = 0 ( ) Det (A) Î (2, ¥)

( ) Det (A) Î (2, ) (D) Det (A) Î [2, ]
1 MAT EMATI S

Summary
® Determinant of a matrix A = [a11]1 1
is given by a11 = a11

éa a12 ù
® Determinant of a matrix A = ê 11 is given by
ë a21 a 22 úû

a11 a12
A =
a21 a22 = a11 a22 – a12 a21

é a1 b1 c1 ù
® Determinant of a matrix A = êê a2 b2 c2 úú is given by (expanding along R1)
êë a b c úû

a1 b1 c1
b c2 a2 c2 a2 b2
A = a2 b2 c2 = a1 2 - b1 + c1
b c a c a b
a b c
For any square matrix A, the |A| satisfy following properties.
® A¢ = A , where A¢ = transpose of A.
® If we interchange any two rows (or columns), then sign of determinant
changes.
® If any two rows or any two columns are identical or proportional, then value
of determinant is ero.
® If we multiply each element of a row or a column of a determinant by constant
k, then value of determinant is multiplied by k.
® Multiplying a determinant by k means multiply elements of only one row
(or one column) by k.
® If A = [aij ] ´ , then k .A = k A
® If elements of a row or a column in a determinant can be expressed as sum
of two or more elements, then the given determinant can be expressed as
sum of two or more determinants.
® If to each element of a row or a column of a determinant the equimultiples of
corresponding elements of other rows or columns are added, then value of
determinant remains same.
 DETERMINANTS 1

® Area of a triangle with vertices (x1, y1), (x2, y2) and (x , y ) is given by
x1 y1 1
1
D= x2 y2 1
2
x y 1
® Minor of an element aij of the determinant of matrix A is the determinant
o ta n d d t n ith row and jth column and denoted by Mij.
® ofactor of aij of given by Aij = (– 1)i + j Mij
® alue of determinant of a matrix A is obtained by sum of product of elements
of a row (or a column) with corresponding cofactors. or example,
A = a111 A11 + a12 A12 + a1 A1 .
® If elements of one row (or column) are multiplied with cofactors of elements
of any other row (or column), then their sum is ero. or example, a11 A21 + a12
A22 + a1 A2 = 0
é a11 a12 a1 ù é A11 A 21 A 1 ù
êa ú,
® If A = ê 21 22 a a 2 ú then adj A = êê A12 A 22 A 2 úú , where A ij is
êë a 1 a 2 a úû êë A1 A2 A úû
cofactor of aij
® A (adj A) = (adj A) A = A I, where A is square matrix of order n.
® A square matrix A is said to be singular or non singular according as
A = 0 or A ¹ 0.
® If A = A = I, where is square matrix, then is called inverse of A.
Also A–1 = or –1 = A and hence (A–1)–1 = A.
® A square matrix A has inverse if and only if A is non singular.
1
® A –1 = ( adj A)
A
® If a1 x + b1 y + c1 z = d1
a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = d2
a x+ b y + c z = d ,
then these equations can be written as A = , where
é a1 b1 c1 ù éxù é d1 ù
A = êêa2 b2 c2 ú , = ê y ú and = êêd 2 úú
ú ê ú

ëê a b c ûú êë z ûú ëê d ûú
1 MAT EMATI S

® nique solution of equation A = is given by = A–1 , where A ¹ 0 .

® A system of equation is consistent or inconsistent according as its solution
exists or not.
® or a square matrix A in matrix equation A =
(i) A ¹ 0, there exists unique solution
(ii) A = 0 and (adj A) ¹ 0, then there exists no solution
(iii) A = 0 and (adj A) = 0, then system may or may not be consistent.

Historical Note
The hinese method of representing the coefficients of the unknowns of
several linear equations by using rods on a calculating board naturally led to the
discovery of simple method of elimination. The arrangement of rods was precisely
that of the numbers in a determinant. The hinese, therefore, early developed the
idea of subtracting columns and rows as in simplification of a determinant
Mikami, China, pp 0, .
Seki owa, the greatest of the apanese Mathematicians of seventeenth
century in his work Kai Fukudai no Ho in 1 showed that he had the idea of
determinants and of their expansion. ut he used this device only in eliminating a
quantity from two equations and not directly in the solution of a set of simultaneous
linear equations. T. ayashi, The Fakudoi and Determinants in Japanese
Mathematics, in the proc. of the Tokyo Math. Soc., .
endermonde was the first to recognise determinants as independent functions.
e may be called the formal founder. aplace (1 2), gave general method of
expanding a determinant in terms of its complementary minors. In 1 agrange
treated determinants of the second and third orders and used them for purpose
other than the solution of equations. In 1 01, auss used determinants in his
theory of numbers.
The next great contributor was acques hilippe Marie inet, (1 12) who
stated the theorem relating to the product of two matrices of m columns and n
rows, which for the special case of m = n reduces to the multiplication theorem.
Also on the same day, auchy (1 12) presented one on the same subject. e
used the word determinant in its present sense. e gave the proof of multiplication
theorem more satisfactory than inet s.
The greatest contributor to the theory was arl ustav acob acobi, after
this the word determinant received its final acceptance.
 Chapter 5
CONTINUITY AND
DIFFERENTIABILITY
v The whole of science is nothing more than a refinement
of everyday thinking.” — ALBERT EINSTEIN v

5.1 Introduction
This chapter is essentially a continuation of our study of
differentiation of functions in Class XI. We had learnt to
differentiate certain functions like polynomial functions and
trigonometric functions. In this chapter, we introduce the
very important concepts of continuity, differentiability and
relations between them. We will also learn differentiation
of inverse trigonometric functions. Further, we introduce a
new class of functions called exponential and logarithmic
functions. These functions lead to powerful techniques of
differentiation. We illustrate certain geometrically obvious
conditions through differential calculus. In the process, we
will learn some fundamental theorems in this area.
Sir Issac Newton
5.2 Continuity (1642-1727)
We start the section with two informal examples to get a feel of continuity. Consider
the function
ì1, if x £ 0
f ( x) = í
î 2, if x > 0
This function is of course defined at every
point of the real line. Graph of this function is
given in the Fig 5.1. One can deduce from the
graph that the value of the function at nearby
points on x-axis remain close to each other
except at x = 0. At the points near and to the
left of 0, i.e., at points like – 0.1, – 0.01, – 0.001,
the value of the function is 1. At the points near
and to the right of 0, i.e., at points like 0.1, 0.01, Fig 5.1
148 MATHEM ATICS

0.001, the value of the function is 2. Using the language of left and right hand limits, we
may say that the left (respectively right) hand limit of f at 0 is 1 (respectively 2). In
particular the left and right hand limits do not coincide. We also observe that the value
of the function at x = 0 concides with the left hand limit. Note that when we try to draw
the graph, we cannot draw it in one stroke, i.e., without lifting pen from the plane of the
paper, we can not draw the graph of this function. In fact, we need to lift the pen when
we come to 0 from left. This is one instance of function being not continuous at x = 0.
Now, consider the function defined as
ì1, if x ¹ 0
f ( x) = í
î2, if x = 0
This function is also defined at every point. Left and the right hand limits at x = 0
are both equal to 1. But the value of the
function at x = 0 equals 2 which does not
coincide with the common value of the left
and right hand limits. Again, we note that we
cannot draw the graph of the function without
lifting the pen. This is yet another instance of
a function being not continuous at x = 0.
Naively, we may say that a function is
continuous at a fixed point if we can draw the
graph of the function around that point without
Fig 5.2
lifting the pen from the plane of the paper.
Mathematically, it may be phrased precisely as follows:
Definition 1 Suppose f is a real function on a subset of the real numbers and let c be
a point in the domain of f. Then f is continuous at c if
lim f ( x ) = f (c)
x®c

More elaborately, if the left hand limit, right hand limit and the value of the function
at x = c exist and equal to each other, then f is said to be continuous at x = c. Recall that
if the right hand and left hand limits at x = c coincide, then we say that the common
value is the limit of the function at x = c. Hence we may also rephrase the definition of
continuity as follows: a function is continuous at x = c if the function is defined at
x = c and if the value of the function at x = c equals the limit of the function at
x = c. If f is not continuous at c, we say f is discontinuous at c and c is called a point
of discontinuity of f.
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 49

Example 1 Check the continuity of the function f given by f (x) = 2x + 3 at x = 1.

Solution First note that the function is defined at the given point x = 1 and its value is 5.
Then find the limit of the function at x = 1. Clearly
lim f ( x ) = lim (2 x + 3) =2 (1) +35 =
x ®1 x ®1

Thus lim f ( x ) = 5 = f (1)

x ®1

Hence, f is continuous at x = 1.
Example 2 Examine whether the function f given by f (x) = x2 is continuous at x = 0.
Solution First note that the function is defined at the given point x = 0 and its value is 0.
Then find the limit of the function at x = 0. Clearly

lim f ( x ) = lim x 2 = 0 2 = 0
x® 0 x® 0

Thus lim f ( x ) = 0 = f (0)

x® 0

Hence, f is continuous at x = 0.
Example 3 Discuss the continuity of the function f given by f(x) = | x | at x = 0.
Solution By definition

ì - x, if x < 0
f (x) = í
î x, if x ³ 0
Clearly the function is defined at 0 and f (0) = 0. Left hand limit of f at 0 is
lim f ( x ) = lim- (– x) = 0
x® 0 - x® 0

Similarly, the right hand limit of f at 0 is

lim f ( x ) = lim+ x = 0
x® 0 + x® 0

Thus, the left hand limit, right hand limit and the value of the function coincide at
x = 0. Hence, f is continuous at x = 0.
Example 4 Show that the function f given by

ïì x + 3, if x ¹0
3

f (x) = í
ïî1, if x = 0

is not continuous at x = 0.
150 MATHEM ATICS

Solution The function is defined at x = 0 and its value at x = 0 is 1. When x ¹ 0, the

function is given by a polynomial. Hence,
lim f ( x ) = lim ( x 3 + 3) =0 +3 =
x® 0 x®0
Since the limit of f at x = 0 does not coincide with f (0), the function is not continuous
at x = 0. It may be noted that x = 0 is the only point of discontinuity for this function.
Example 5 Check the points where the constant function f (x) = k is continuous.
Solution The function is defined at all real numbers and by definition, its value at any
real number equals k. Let c be any real number. Then
lim f ( x) = lim k = k
x®c x®c

Since f (c) = k = lim

x ® c f (x) for any real number c, the function f is continuous at
every real number.
Example 6 Prove that the identity function on real numbers given by f (x) = x is
continuous at every real number.
Solution The function is clearly defined at every point and f (c) = c for every real
number c. Also,
lim f ( x) = lim x = c
x®c x ®c

Thus, lim f (x) = c = f (c) and hence the function is continuous at every real number..
x® c
aH ving defined continuity of a function at a given point, now we make a natural
extension of this definition to discuss continuity of a function.
Definition 2 A real function f is said to be continuous if it is continuous at every point
in the domain of f.
This definition requires a bit of elaboration. Suppose f is a function defined on a
closed interval [ a, b], then for f to be continuous, it needs to be continuous at every
point in [ a, b] including the end points a and b. Continuity of f at a means
lim f ( x ) = f (a)
x®a +

and continuity of f at b means

lim f ( x) = f(b)
x ®b –

Observe that lim- f ( x ) and lim+ f ( x) do not make sense. As a consequence

x® a x®b

of this definition, if f is defined only at one point, it is continuous there, i.e., if the
domain of f is a singleton, f is a continuous function.
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 51

Example 7 Is the function defined by f (x) = | x |, a continuous function?

Solution We may rewrite f as
ì- x, if x < 0
f (x) = í
î x, if x ³ 0
By Example 3, we know that f is continuous at x = 0.
Let c be a real number such that c < 0. Then f (c) = – c. Also
lim f ( x ) = lim ( - x) = – c (Why?)
x® c x®c

Since lim f ( x ) = f (c) , f is continuous at all negative real numbers.

x®c

Now, let c be a real number such that c > 0. Then f (c) = c. Also
lim f ( x ) = lim x = c (Why?)
x® c x® c

Since lim f ( x) = f (c) , f is continuous at all positive real numbers. Hence, f

x®c

is continuous at all points.

Example 8 Discuss the continuity of the function f given by f (x) = x3 + x2 – 1.
Solution Clearly f is defined at every real number c and its value at c is c3 + c2 – 1. We
also know that
lim f ( x ) = lim ( x 32 + x - 1)
32
=c + c -1
x® c x®c

Thus lim f ( x) = f (c) , and hence f is continuous at every real number. This means
x®c

f is a continuous function.
1
Example 9 Discuss the continuity of the function f defined by f (x) = , x ¹ 0.
x
Solution Fix any non zero real number c, we have
1 1
lim f ( x ) = lim =
x®c x ®c x c
1
Also, since for c ¹ 0, f (c) = , we have lim f ( x) = f (c) and hence, f is continuous
c x® c

at every point in the domain of f. Thus f is a continuous function.

152 MATHEM ATICS

We take this opportunity to explain the concept of infinity. This we do by analysing

1
the function f (x) = near x = 0. To carry out this analysis we follow the usual trick of
x
finding the value of the function at real numbers close to 0. Essentially we are trying to
find the right hand limit of f at 0. We tabulate this in the following (Table 5.1).
Table 5.1

x 1 0.30.2 0.1 = 10 –1
0.01 = 10–2 0.001 = 10–3 10 –n
f (x) 1 3.3... 5 10 100 = 10 2
1000 = 103 10n
We observe that as x gets closer to 0 from the right, the value of f (x) shoots up
higher. This may be rephrased as: the value of f (x) may be made larger than any given
number by choosing a positive real number very close to 0. In symbols, we write
lim f ( x ) = + ¥
x ® 0+

(to be read as: the right hand limit of f (x) at 0 is plus infinity). We wish to emphasise
that + ¥ is NOT a real number and hence the right hand limit of f at 0 does not exist (as
a real number).
Similarly, the left hand limit of f at 0 may be found. The following table is self
explanatory.
Table 5.2

x –1 – 0.3 – 0.2 – 10–1 – 10–2 – 10–3 – 10–n

f (x) – 1 – 3.3... –5 – 10 – 102 – 103 – 10n

From the Table 5.2, we deduce that the

value of f (x) may be made smaller than any
given number by choosing a negative real
number very close to 0. In symbols,
we write
lim f ( x) = - ¥
x® 0 -

(to be read as: the left hand limit of f (x) at 0 is

minus infinity). Again, we wish to emphasise
that – ¥ is NOT a real number and hence the
left hand limit of f at 0 does not exist (as a real
number). The graph of the reciprocal function
given in Fig 5.3 is a geometric representation
of the above mentioned facts. Fig 5.3
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 53

Example 10 Discuss the continuity of the function f defined by

ì x + 2, if x £ 1
f (x) = í
î x - 2, if x > 1
Solution The function f is defined at all points of the real line.
Case 1 If c < 1, then f (c) = c + 2. Therefore, lim f ( x ) = lim( x + 2) = c + 2
x® c x® c
Thus, f is continuous at all real numbers less than 1.
Case 2 If c > 1, then f (c) = c – 2. Therefore,
lim f ( x) = lim (x – 2) = c – 2 = f (c)
x ®c x ®c

Thus, f is continuous at all points x > 1.

Case 3 If c = 1, then the left hand limit of f at
x = 1 is
lim f ( x ) = lim– ( x + 2) = 1 + 2 = 3
x ®1– x ®1

The right hand limit of f at x = 1 is

lim f ( x) = lim+ ( x - 2) = 1 - 2 = -1
x®1+ x®1
iS nce the left and right hand limits of f at x = 1 Fig 5.4
do not coincide, f is not continuous at x = 1. Hence
x = 1 is the only point of discontinuity of f. The graph of the function is given in Fig 5.4.
Example 11 Find all the points of discontinuity of the function f defined by
ì x + 2, if x < 1
ï
f (x) = í 0, if x = 1
ï x - 2, if x > 1
î
Solution As in the previous example we find that f
is continuous at all real numbers x ¹ 1. The left
hand limit of f at x = 1 is
lim- f ( x) = lim– ( x + 2) = 1 + 2 = 3
x ®1 x ®1
The right hand limit of f at x = 1 is
lim+ f ( x) = lim+ ( x - 2) = 1 - 2 = -1
x®1 x®1

Since, the left and right hand limits of f at x = 1

do not coincide, f is not continuous at x = 1. Hence
x = 1 is the only point of discontinuity of f. The
graph of the function is given in the Fig 5.5. Fig 5.5
154 MATHEM ATICS

Example 12 Discuss the continuity of the function defined by

ì x + 2, if x < 0
f (x) = í
î- x + 2, if x > 0

Solution Observe that the function is defined at all real numbers except at 0. Domain
of definition of this function is
D 1
ÈD 2
where D 1
= { x Î R : x < 0} and
D 2
= { x Î R : x > 0}
Case 1 If c Î D 1
, then lim f ( x ) = lim (x + 2)
x ®c x ®c
= c + 2 = f (c) and hence f is continuous in D 1
.
Case 2 If c Î D 2
, then lim f ( x) = lim (– x + 2)
x ®c x ®c
= – c + 2 = f (c) and hence f is continuous in D 2.
Since f is continuous at all points in the domain of f,
we deduce that f is continuous. Graph of this
function is given in the Fig 5.6. Note that to graph Fig 5.6
this function we need to lift the pen from the plane
of the paper, but we need to do that only for those points where the function is not
defined.
Example 13 Discuss the continuity of the function f given by

ìï x, if x ³ 0
f (x) = í 2
ïî x , if x < 0
Solution Clearly the function is defined at
every real number. Graph of the function is
given in Fig 5.7. By inspection, it seems prudent
to partition the domain of definition of f into
three disjoint subsets of the real line.
Let D 1
= { x Î R : x < 0}, D 2
= {0} and
Fig 5.7
D 3
= { x Î R : x > 0}
Case 1 At any point in D 1
, we have f (x) = x2 and it is easy to see that it is continuous
there (see Example 2).
Case 2 At any point in D 3
, we have f (x) = x and it is easy to see that it is continuous
there (see Example 6).
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 55

Case 3 Now we analyse the function at x = 0. The value of the function at 0 is f (0) = 0.
The left hand limit of f at 0 is
lim f ( x ) = lim- x 2 = 02 = 0
x ®0 – x ®0
The right hand limit of f at 0 is
lim f ( x) = lim+ x = 0
x ®0+ x ®0

Thus lim f ( x) = 0 = f (0) and hence f is continuous at 0. This means that f is

x ®0
continuous at every point in its domain and hence, f is a continuous function.
Example 14 Show that every polynomial function is continuous.
Solution Recall that a function p is a polynomial function if it is defined by
p(x) = a0 + a1 x + ... + an xn for some natural number n, an ¹ 0 and ai Î R. Clearly this
function is defined for every real number. For a fixed real number c, we have
lim p ( x) = p (c )
x ®c
By definition, p is continuous at c. Since c is any real number, p is continuous at
every real number and hence p is a continuous function.
Example 15 Find all the points of discontinuity of the greatest integer function defined
by f (x) = [ x], where [ x] denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to x.
Solution First observe that f is defined for all real numbers. Graph of the function is
given in Fig 5.8. From the graph it looks like that f is discontinuous at every integral
point. Below we explore, if this is true.

Fig 5.8
156 MATHEM ATICS

Case 1 Let c be a real number which is not equal to any integer. It is evident from the
graph that for all real numbers close to c the value of the function is equal to [ c]; i.e.,
lim f ( x) = lim [] x = c . Also f (c) = [ c] and hence the function is continuous at all real
x ®c x ®c

numbers not equal to integers.

Case 2 Le t c be an integer. Then we can find a sufficiently small real number
r > 0 such that [ c – r] = c – 1 whereas [ c + r] = c.
This, in terms of limits mean that
lim f (x) = c – 1, lim+ f (x) = c
x®c - x®c

Since these limits cannot be equal to each other for any c, the function is
discontinuous at every integral point.
5.2.1 Algebra of continuous functions
In the previous class, after having understood the concept of limits, we learnt some
algebra of limits. Analogously, now we will study some algebra of continuous functions.
Since continuity of a function at a point is entirely dictated by the limit of the function at
that point, it is reasonable to expect results analogous to the case of limits.
Theorem 1 Suppose f and g be two real functions continuous at a real number c.
Then
(1) f + g is continuous at x = c.
(2) f – g is continuous at x = c.
(3) f . g is continuous at x = c.
æfö
(4) ç g ÷ is continuous at x = c, (provided g (c) ¹ 0).
è ø
Proof We are investigating continuity of (f + g) at x = c. Clearly it is defined at
x = c. We have

lim( f + g ) ( x) = lim [( f) x +( g)] x (by definition of f + g)

x ®c x ®c

= lim f ( x ) + lim g ( x) (by the theorem on limits)

x ®c x ®c

= f (c) + g(c) (as f and g are continuous)

= (f + g) (c) (by definition of f + g)
Hence, f + g is continuous at x = c.
Proofs for the remaining parts are similar and left as an exercise to the reader.
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 57

Remarks
(i) As a special case of (3) above, if f is a constant function, i.e., f (x) = l for some
real number l, then the function (l . g) defined by (l . g) (x) = l . g(x) is also
continuous. In particular if l = – 1, the continuity of f implies continuity of – f.
(ii) As a special case of (4) above, if f is the constant function f (x) = l, then the
l l l
function defined by ( x) = is also continuous wherever g (x) ¹ 0. In
g g g ( x)
1
particular, the continuity of g implies continuity of .
g
The above theorem can be exploited to generate many continuous functions. They
also aid in deciding if certain functions are continuous or not. The following examples
illustrate this:
Example 16 Prove that every rational function is continuous.
Solution Recall that every rational function f is given by
p ( x)
f ( x) = , q ( x) ¹ 0
q ( x)
where p and q are polynomial functions. The domain of f is all real numbers except
points at which q is zero. Since polynomial functions are continuous (Example 14), f is
continuous by (4) of Theorem 1.
Example 17 Discuss the continuity of sine function.
Solution To see this we use the following facts
lim sin x = 0
x ®0
We have not proved it, but is intuitively clear from the graph of sin x near 0.
Now, observe that f (x) = sin x is defined for every real number. Let c be a real
number. Put x = c + h. If x ® c we know that h ® 0. Therefore
lim f ( x) = lim sin x
x ®c x ®c

= lim sin( c + h)
h ®0

= lim [sin ccos h +cos csin h]

h ®0

= lim [sin ccos h]lim+ [cos sin c ] h

h ®0 h ®0
= sin c + 0 = sin c = f (c)
Thus lim f (x) = f (c) and hence f is a continuous function.
x ®c
158 MATHEM ATICS

Remark A similar proof may be given for the continuity of cosine function.
Example 18 Prove that the function defined by f (x) = tan x is a continuous function.

sin x
Solution The function f (x) = tan x = . This is defined for all real numbers such
cos x
p
that cos x ¹ 0, i.e., x ¹ (2n +1) . We have just proved that both sine and cosine
2
functions are continuous. Thus tan x being a quotient of two continuous functions is
continuous wherever it is defined.
An interesting fact is the behaviour of continuous functions with respect to
composition of functions. Recall that if f and g are two real functions, then
(f o g) (x) = f (g (x))
is defined whenever the range of g is a subset of domain of f. The following theorem
(stated without proof) captures the continuity of composite functions.
Theorem 2 Suppose f and g are real valued functions such that (f o g) is defined at c.
If g is continuous at c and if f is continuous at g (c), then (f o g) is continuous at c.
The following examples illustrate this theorem.
Example 19 Show that the function defined by f (x) = sin (x2) is a continuous function.
Solution Observe that the function is defined for every real number. The function
f may be thought of as a composition g o h of the two functions g and h, where
g (x) = sin x and h (x) = x2. Since both g and h are continuous functions, by Theorem 2,
it can be deduced that f is a continuous function.
Example 20 Show that the function f defined by
f (x) = |1 – x + | x |,
where x is any real number, is a continuous function.
Solution Define g by g (x) = 1 – x + | x| and h by h (x) = | x| for all real x. Then
(h o g) (x) = h (g (x))
= h (1– x + | x |)
= |1 – x + | x | = f (x)
In Example 7, we have seen that h is a continuous function. Hence g being a sum
of a polynomial function and the modulus function is continuous. But then f being a
composite of two continuous functions is continuous.
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 59

EXERCISE 5.1
1. rP ove that the function f (x) = 5x – 3 is continuous at x = 0, at x = – 3 and at x = 5.
2. x E amine the continuity of the function f (x) = 2x2 – 1 at x = 3.
3. x E amine the following functions for continuity.
1
(a) f (x) = x – 5 (b) f (x) = ,x¹5
x-5
x 2 - 25
(c) f (x) = , x ¹ –5 (d) f (x) = | x – 5 |
x+5
4. Prove that the function f (x) = xn is continuous at x = n, where n is a positive
integer.
5. Is the function f defined by
ì x, if x £ 1
f ( x) = í
î5, if x >1
continuous at x = 0? At x = 1? At x = 2?
Find all points of discontinuity of f, where f is defined by

ì|3, xif + 3 x£-

ì 2 x + 3, if x £2 ï
6. f ( x) = í 7. f ( x ) = í -2 x, if - 3< < x
î 2 x - 3, if x>2 ï62,x if+
î 3 x³

ì| x ì x
ï , if x ¹ 0 ï , if x < 0
8. f ( x) = í x 9. f ( x) = í| x
ïî 0, if x = 0 ï -1, if x ³ 0
î

ìï x + 1, if x ³ 1 ïì x - 3, if x £2
3
10. f ( x) = í 2 11. f ( x) = í 2
ïî x + 1, if x < 1 ïî x + 1, if x > 2

ïì x - 1, if x £ 1
10
12. f ( x) = í
2
ïî x , if x > 1
13. Is the function defined by
ì x + 5, if x £ 1
f ( x) = í
î x - 5, if x > 1
a continuous function?
160 MATHEM ATICS

Discuss the continuity of the function f, where f is defined by

ì3, if 0 £ x £1 ì2 x, if x < 0
ï ï
14. f ( x) = í4, if 1 < x <3 15. f ( x) = í0, if 0 £ x £ 1
ï5, if 310£ x £ ï4, xif >1x
î î

ì-2, if x £ - 1
ï
16. f ( x) = í2 x, if - 1 < x £ 1
ï2, if x > 1
î
17. Find the relationship between a and b so that the function f defined by
ìax + 1, if x £ 3
f ( x) = í
îbx + 3, if x >3
is continuous at x = 3.
18. For what value of l is the function defined by
ìïl ( x 2 - 2 x), if x £ 0
f ( x) = í
ïî41,x + if 0x >
continuous at x = 0? What about continuity at x = 1?
19. Show that the function defined by g (x) = x – [ x] is discontinuous at all integral
points. Here [ x] denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to x.
20. Is the function defined by f (x) = x2 – sin x + 5 continuous at x = p?
21. Discuss the continuity of the following functions:
(a) f (x) = sin x + cos x (b) f (x) = sin x – cos x
(c) f (x) = sin x . cos x
22. Discuss the continuity of the cosine, cosecant, secant and cotangent functions.
23. Find all points of discontinuity of f, where
ì sin x
ï , if x < 0
f ( x) = í x
ïî x + 1, if x ³ 0
24. eD termine if f defined by
ì 2 1
ï x sin , if x ¹ 0
f ( x) = í x
ïî0, if x = 0
is a continuous function?
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 61

25. Examine the continuity of f, where f is defined by

ìsin x - cos x, if x ¹ 0
f ( x) = í
î -1, if x = 0
Find the values of k so that the function f is continuous at the indicated point in Exercises
26 to 29.
ì k cos x p
ïï p - 2 x , if x ¹ 2 p
26. f ( x) = í at x =
ï3, p 2
if x =
ïî 2

ïìkx2 , if x £ 2
27. f ( x) = í at x = 2
ïî3, if x >2

ìkx + 1, if x £ p
28. f ( x) = í at x = p
îcos x, if x > p
ì kx + 1, if x £ 5
29. f ( x) = í at x = 5
î35,x -if 5x >
30. Find the values of a and b such that the function defined by
ì5, if x £ 2
ï
f ( x) = íax + b, if 2 < x < 10
ï21, if x ³ 10
î
is a continuous function.
31. Show that the function defined by f (x) = cos (x2) is a continuous function.
32. Show that the function defined by f (x) = |cos x | is a continuous function.
33. Examine that sin | x | is a continuous function.
34. Find all the points of discontinuity of f defined by f (x) = | x | – | x + 1 |.
5.3. Differentiability
Recall the following facts from previous class. We had defined the derivative of a real
function as follows:
Suppose f is a real function and c is a point in its domain. The derivative of f at c is
defined by
f (c + h) - f (c )
lim
h ®0 h
162 MATHEM ATICS

d
provided this limit exists. Derivative of f at c is denoted by f ¢(c) or ( f ( x )) | c . The
dx
function defined by
f ( x + h) - f ( x )
f ¢( x) = lim
h ®0 h
wherever the limit exists is defined to be the derivative of f. The derivative of f is
d dy
denoted by f ¢ (x) or ( f ( x)) or if y = f (x) by or y¢. The process of finding
dx dx
derivative of a function is called differentiation. We also use the phrase differentiate
f (x) with respect to x to mean find f ¢(x).
The following rules were established as a part of algebra of derivatives:
(1) (u ± v)¢ = u¢ ± v¢
(2) (uv)¢ = u¢v + uv¢ (Leibnitz or product rule)

(3) æ u ö¢ u¢v - uv¢ , wherever v ¹ 0 (Quotient rule).

ç ÷ =
èvø v2
The following table gives a list of derivatives of certain standard functions:
Table 5.3
f (x) xn sin x cos x tan x

f ¢(x) nx n – 1 cos x – sin x sec2 x

Whenever we defined derivative, we had put a caution provided the limit exists.
N w the natural question is; what if it doesn ’ t? The question is quite pertinent and so is
o
f (c + h) - f (c )
its answer. If lim does not exist, we say that f is not differentiable at c.
h ®0 h
In other words, we say that a function f is differentiable at a point c in its domain if both
f (c + h) - f ( c) f (c + h) - f (c )
lim– and lim+ are finite and equal. A function is said
h ®0 h h ®0 h
to be differentiable in an interval [ a, b] if it is differentiable at every point of [ a, b]. As
in case of continuity, at the end points a and b, we take the right hand limit and left hand
limit, which are nothing but left hand derivative and right hand derivative of the function
at a and b respectively. Similarly, a function is said to be differentiable in an interval
(a, b) if it is differentiable at every point of (a, b).
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 63

Theorem 3 If a function f is differentiable at a point c, then it is also continuous at that

point.
Proof Since f is differentiable at c, we have
f ( x ) - f ( c)
lim = f ¢(c )
x ®c x -c
But for x ¹ c, we have
f ( x ) - f (c )
f (x) – f (c) = . ( x - c)
x -c
é f ( x) - f (c) ù
Therefore lim [( f) x -( f)] c = lim ê . ( x - c) ú
x ®c x ®c ë x-c û

x [(- )]
lim [( f )]lim f c é f ( x) - f (c) ù
or = lim úû . lim [( x - c)]
x ®c x ®c x ®c ê
ë x-c x® c

= f ¢(c) . 0 = 0
or lim f ( x) = f (c)
x ®c
Hence f is continuous at x = c.
Corollary 1 Every differentiable function is continuous.
We remark that the converse of the above statement is not true. Indeed we have
seen that the function defined by f (x) = | x | is a continuous function. Consider the left
hand limit
f (0 + h) - f (0) - h
lim– = = -1
h ®0 h h
The right hand limit
f (0 + h) - f (0) h
lim+ = =1
h ®0 h h
f (0 + h) - f (0)
Since the above left and right hand limits at 0 are not equal, lim
h h ®0

does not exist and hence f is not differentiable at 0. Thus f is not a differentiable
function.
5.3.1 Derivatives of composite functions
To study derivative of composite functions, we start with an illustrative example. Say,
we want to find the derivative of f, where
f (x) = (2x + 1) 3
164 MATHEM ATICS

One way is to expand (2x + 1) 3 using binomial theorem and find the derivative as
a polynomial function as illustrated below.
d d
f ( x) = éë(2 x + 1)3 ùû
dx dx
d
= (812x 32 + 61)x + x +
dx
= 24 x2 + 24 x + 6
= 6 (2 x + 1) 2
Now, observe that f (x) = (h o g) (x)
where g(x) = 2x + 1 and h(x) = x3 . Put t = g(x) = 2x + 1. Then f(x) = h(t) = t3 . Thus
df dh dt
= 6 (2 x + 1) 2
= 3(2 x + 1) 2
. 2 = 3 t2 . 2 = ×
dx dt dx
The advantage with such observation is that it simplifies the calculation in finding
the derivative of, say, (2x + 1) 100. We may formalise this observation in the following
theorem called the chain rule.
Theorem 4 (Chain Rule) Let f be a real valued function which is a composite of two
dt dv
functions u and v ; i.e., f = v o u. Suppose t = u (x) and if both and exist, we have
dx dt
df dv dt
= ×
dx dt dx
We skip the proof of this theorem. Chain rule may be extended as follows. Suppose
f is a real valued function which is a composite of three functions u, v and w ; i.e.,
f = (w o u) o v. If t = v (x) and s = u (t), then

df d ( w o u ) dt dw ds dt
= × = × ×
dx dt dx ds dt dx
provided all the derivatives in the statement exist. Reader is invited to formulate chain
rule for composite of more functions.

Example 21 Find the derivative of the function given by f (x) = sin (x2).

Solution Observe that the given function is a composite of two functions. Indeed, if
t = u(x) = x2 and v(t) = sin t, then
f (x) = (v o u) (x) = v(u(x)) = v(x2) = sin x2
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 65

dv dt
Put t = u(x) = x2. Observe that = cos t and = 2 x exist. Hence, by chain rule
dt dx
df dv dt
= × = cos t × 2 x
dx dt dx
It is normal practice to express the final result only in terms of x. Thus
df
= cos t × 2 x = 2 x cos x 2
dx
Alternatively, We can also directly proceed as follows:
dy d
y = sin (x2) Þ = (sin x2)
dx dx
d 2
= cos x2 (x ) = 2x cos x2
dx
Example 22 Find the derivative of tan (2x + 3).
Solution Let f (x) = tan (2x + 3), u (x) = 2x + 3 and v(t) = tan t. Then
(v o u) (x) = v(u(x)) = v(2x + 3) = tan (2 x + 3) = f (x)
dv
Thus f is a composite of two functions. Put t = u(x) = 2x + 3. Then = sec 2 t and
dt
dt
= 2 exist. Hence, by chain rule
dx
df dv dt
= × = 2sec 2 (2 x + 3)
dx dt dx
Example 23 Differentiate sin (cos ( x2)) with respect to x.
Solution The function f (x) = sin (cos (x2)) is a composition f (x) = (w o v o u) (x) of the
three functions u, v and w, where u(x) = x2, v(t) = cos t and w(s) = sin s. Put
dw ds dt
t = u(x) = x2 and s = v(t) = cos t. Observe that = cos s, = - sin t and = 2x
ds dt dx
exist for all real x. Hence by a generalisation of chain rule, we have

df dw ds dt
= × × = (cos s) . (– sin t) . (2x) = – 2x sin x2 . cos (cos x2)
dx ds dt dx
166 MATHEM ATICS

Alternatively, we can proceed as follows:

y = sin (cos x2)
dy d d
Therefore = sin (cos x2) = cos (cos x2) (cos x2)
dx dx dx
d
= cos (cos x2) (– sin x2) (x2)
dx
= – sin x2 cos (cos x2) (2x)
= – 2x sin x2 cos (cos x2)

EXERCISE 5.2
Differentiate the functions with respect to x in Exercises 1 to 8.
1. sin (x2 + 5) 2. cos (sin x) 3. sin (ax + b)
sin ( ax + b)
4. sec (tan ( x )) 5. cos (cx + d ) 6. cos x3 . sin2 (x5)

7. 2 cot x 2 8. cos x
9. Prove that the function f given by
f (x) = | x – 1 |, x Î R
is not differentiable at x = 1.
10. Prove that the greatest integer function defined by
f (x) = [ x], 0 < x<3
is not differentiable at x = 1 and x = 2.

5.3.2 Derivatives of implicit functions

Until now we have been differentiating various functions given in the form y = f (x).
But it is not necessary that functions are always expressed in this form. For example,
consider one of the following relationships between x and y:
x–y–p=0
x + sin xy – y = 0
In the first case, we can solve for y and rewrite the relationship as y = x – p. In
the second case, it does not seem that there is an easy way to solve for y. Nevertheless,
there is no doubt about the dependence of y on x in either of the cases. When a
relationship between x and y is expressed in a way that it is easy to solve for y and
write y = f (x), we say that y is given as an explicit function of x. In the latter case it
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 67

is implicit that y is a function of x and we say that the relationship of the second type,
above, gives function implicitly. In this subsection, we learn to differentiate implicit
functions.
dy
Example 24 Find if x – y = p.
dx
Solution One way is to solve for y and rewrite the above as
y=x–p
dy
But then =1
dx
Alternatively, directly differentiating the relationship w.r.t., x, we have
d dp
( x - y) =
dx dx
dp
Recall that means to differentiate the constant function taking value p
dx
everywhere w.r.t., x. Thus
d d
( x) - ( y) = 0
dx dx
which implies that
dy dx
= =1
dx dx

dy
Example 25 Find , if y + sin y = cos x.
dx
Solution We differentiate the relationship directly with respect to x, i.e.,
dy d d
+ (sin y ) = (cos x)
dx dx dx
which implies using chain rule
dy dy
+ cos y × = – sin x
dx dx
dy sin x
This gives = -
dx 1 + cos y
where y ¹ (2n + 1) p
168 MATHEM ATICS

5.3.3 Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions

We remark that inverse trigonometric functions are continuous functions, but we will
not prove this. Now we use chain rule to find derivatives of these functions.
Example 26 Find the derivative of f given by f (x) = sin–1 x assuming it exists.
Solution Let y = sin–1 x. Then, x = sin y.
Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we get

dy
1 = cos y
dx

dy 1 1
which implies that = =
dx cos y cos (sin -1 x)

p p
Observe that this is defined only for cos y ¹ 0, i.e., sin–1 x ¹ - , , i.e., x ¹ – 1, 1,
2 2
i.e., x Î (– 1, 1).
To make this result a bit more attractive, we carry out the following manipulation.
Recall that for x Î (– 1, 1), sin (sin–1 x) = x and hence
cos2 y = 1 – (sin y)2 = 1 – (sin (sin–1 x))2 = 1 – x2

æ p pö
Also, since y Î ç - , ÷ , cos y is positive and hence cos y = 1 - x2
è 2 2ø
Thus, for x Î (– 1, 1),
dy 1 1
= =
dx cos y 1 - x2

Example 27 Find the derivative of f given by f (x) = tan–1 x assuming it exists.

Solution Let y = tan–1 x. Then, x = tan y.
Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we get

dy
1 = sec2 y
dx
which implies that
dy 1 1 1 1
= = = -1
=
dx sec y 1 + tan y 1 + (tan (tan x)) 1 + x 2
2 2 2
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 69

Finding of the derivatives of other inverse trigonometric functions is left as exercise.

The following table gives the derivatives of the remaining inverse trigonometric functions
(Table 5.4):
Table 5.4

f (x) cos –1 x cot –1 x sec –1 x cosec –1x

-1 -1 1 -1
f ¢(x)
1 - x2 1 + x2 x x2 - 1 x x2 - 1
Domain of f ¢ (–1, 1) R (–¥, –1) È (1, ¥) (–¥, –1) È (1, ¥)

EXERCISE 5.3
dy
Find in the following:
dx
1. 2x + 3 y = sin x 2. 2x + 3 y = sin y 3. ax + by2 = cos y
4. xy + y2 = tan x + y 5. x2 + xy + y2 = 100 6. x3 + x2y + xy2 + y3 = 81

æ 2x ö
7. sin2 y + cos xy = k 8. sin2 x + cos2 y = 1 9. y = sin–1 ç ÷
è1 + x2 ø

æ 3 x - x3 ö 1 1
10. y = tan–1 ç ÷, - < x<
è 1 - 3 x2 ø 3

æ 1 - x2 ö
11. y = cos -1 ç ÷, 0 < x < 1
è 1 + x2 ø

æ 1 - x2 ö
12. y = sin -1 ç ÷, 0 < x < 1
è 1 + x2 ø

æ 2x ö,
13. y = cos -1 ç ÷ -1 < x < 1
è 1 + x2 ø
1 1
14. y = sin -1 2 x 1 - x 2 , - <x<
2 2

æ 1 ö, 1
15. y = sec -1 ç 2 ÷ 0< x<
è 2 x -1 ø 2
170 MATHEM ATICS

5.4 Exponential and Logarithmic Functions

Till now we have learnt some aspects of different classes of functions like polynomial
functions, rational functions and trigonometric functions. In this section, we shall
learn about a new class of (related)
functions called exponential functions and
logarithmic functions. It needs to be
emphasized that many statements made
in this section are motivational and precise
proofs of these are well beyond the scope
of this text.
The Fig 5.9 gives a sketch of
y = f1(x) = x, y = f2(x) = x2, y = f3 (x) = x3
and y = f4 (x) = x4 . Observe that the curves
get steeper as the power of x increases.
Steeper the curve, faster is the rate of
growth. What this means is that for a fixed
increment in the value of x (> 1), the Fig 5.9
increment in the value of y = fn (x) increases as n increases for n = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is
conceivable that such a statement is true for all positive values of n, where fn (x) = xn.
Essentially, this means that the graph of y = fn (x) leans more towards the y-axis as n
increases. For example, consider f10(x) = x10 and f15(x) = x15. If x increases from 1 to
2, f10 increases from 1 to 210 whereas f15 increases from 1 to 215. Thus, for the same
increment in x, f15 grow faster than f10.
Upshot of the above discussion is that the growth of polynomial functions is dependent
on the degree of the polynomial function – higher the degree, greater is the growth.
The next natural question is: Is there a function which grows faster than any polynomial
function. The answer is in affirmative and an example of such a function is
y = f (x) = 10x.
Our claim is that this function f grows faster than fn (x) = xn for any positive integer n.
For example, we can prove that 10x grows faster than f100 (x) = x100. For large values
of x like x = 103 , note that f100 (x) = (103 )100 = 10300 whereas f (103 ) = 10103 = 101000.
Clearly f (x) is much greater than f100 (x). It is not difficult to prove that for all
x > 10 3 , f (x) > f100 (x). But we will not attempt to give a proof of this here. Similarly, by
choosing large values of x, one can verify that f (x) grows faster than fn (x) for any
positive integer n.
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 71

Definition 3 The exponential function with positive base b > 1 is the function
y = f (x) = bx
The graph of y = 10x is given in the Fig 5.9.
It is advised that the reader plots this graph for particular values of b like 2, 3 and 4.
Following are some of the salient features of the exponential functions:
(1) Domain of the exponential function is R, the set of all real numbers.
(2) Range of the exponential function is the set of all positive real numbers.
(3) The point (0, 1) is always on the graph of the exponential function (this is a
restatement of the fact that b0 = 1 for any real b > 1).
(4) Exponential function is ever increasing; i.e., as we move from left to right, the
graph rises above.
(5) For very large negative values of x, the exponential function is very close to 0. In
other words, in the second quadrant, the graph approaches x-axis (but never
meets it).
Exponential function with base 10 is called the common exponential function. In
the Appendix A.1.4 of Class XI, it was observed that the sum of the series
1 1
1+ + + ...
1!2!
is a number between 2 and 3 and is denoted by e. Using this e as the base we obtain an
extremely important exponential function y = ex.
This is called natural exponential function.
It would be interesting to know if the inverse of the exponential function exists and
has nice interpretation. This search motivates the following definition.
Definition 4 Let b > 1 be a real number. Then we say logarithm of a to base b is x if
bx = a.
Logarithm of a to base b is denoted by logb a. Thus logb a = x if bx = a. Let us
work with a few explicit examples to get a feel for this. We know 23 = 8. In terms of
logarithms, we may rewrite this as log2 8 = 3. Similarly, 10 4
= 10000 is equivalent to
saying log10 10000 = 4. Also, 625 = 5 4
= 25 is equivalent to saying log5 625 = 4 or
2

log25 625 = 2.
On a slightly more mature note, fixing a base b > 1, we may look at logarithm as
a function from positive real numbers to all real numbers. This function, called the
logarithmic function, is defined by
logb : R+ ® R
x ® logb x = y if by = x
172 MATHEM ATICS

As before if the base b = 10, we say it

is common logarithms and if b = e, then
we say it is natural logarithms. Often
natural logarithm is denoted by ln. In this
chapter, log x denotes the logarithm
function to base e, i.e., ln x will be written
as simply log x. The Fig 5.10 gives the plots
of logarithm function to base 2, e and 10.
Some of the important observations
about the logarithm function to any base
b > 1 are listed below: Fig 5.10
(1) We cannot make a meaningful definition of logarithm of non-positive numbers
and hence the domain of log function is R+ .
(2) The range of log function is the set of all real numbers.
(3) The point (1, 0) is always on the graph of the log function.
(4) The log function is ever increasing,
i.e., as we move from left to right
the graph rises above.
(5) For x very near to zero, the value
of log x can be made lesser than
any given real number. In other
words in the fourth quadrant the
graph approaches y-axis (but never
meets it).
(6) Fig 5.11 gives the plot of y = ex and
y = ln x. It is of interest to observe
that the two curves are the mirror Fig 5.11
images of each other reflected in the line y = x.
Two properties of ‘ log’ functions are proved below:
(1) There is a standard change of base rule to obtain loga p in terms of logb p. Let
loga p = a, logb p = b and logb a = g. This means aa = p, bb = p and bg = a.
Substituting the third equation in the first one, we have
(bg)a = bga = p
sU ing this in the second equation, we get
bb = p = bga
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 73

b
which implies b = ag or a = . But then
g
logb p
loga p =
logb a
(2) Another interesting property of the log function is its effect on products. Let
logb pq = a. Then ba = pq. If logb p = b and logb q = g, then bb = p and bg = q.
But then ba = pq = bbbg = bb + g
which implies a = b + g, i.e.,
logb pq = logb p + logb q
A particularly interesting and important consequence of this is when p = q. In
this case the above may be rewritten as
logb p2 = logb p + logb p = 2 log p
An easy generalisation of this (left as an exercise!) is
logb pn = n log p
for any positive integer n. In fact this is true for any real number n, but we will
not attempt to prove this. On the similar lines the reader is invited to verify
x
log b = logb x – logb y
y
Example 28 Is it true that x = elog x for all real x?
Solution First, observe that the domain of log function is set of all positive real numbers.
So the above equation is not true for non-positive real numbers. Now, let y = elog x. If
y > 0, we may take logarithm which gives us log y = log (e ) = log x . log e = log x. Thus
log x

y = x. Hence x = elog x is true only for positive values of x.

One of the striking properties of the natural exponential function in differential
calculus is that it doesn’ t change during the process of differentiation. This is captured
in the following theorem whose proof we skip.
Theorem 5*
d x
(1) The derivative of ex w.r.t., x is ex; i.e., (e ) = ex.
dx
1 d 1
(2) The derivative of log x w.r.t., x is ; i.e., (log x) = .
x dx x
* Please see supplementary material on Page 286.
174 MATHEM ATICS

Example 29 Differentiate the following w.r.t. x:

(i) e –x (ii) sin (log x), x > 0 (iii) cos –1
(ex) (iv) ecos x

Solution
(i) Let y = e – x. Using chain rule, we have
dy d
= e- x × (– x) = – e– x
dx dx
(ii) eL t y = sin (log x). Using chain rule, we have
dy d cos (log x)
= cos (log x) × (log x ) =
dx dx x
(iii) eL t y = cos (e ). Using chain rule, we have
–1 x

dy -1 d x -e x
= × (e ) =
dx 1 - (e x )2 dx 1 - e2 x
(iv) Let y = ecos x. Using chain rule, we have
dy
= ecos x × (- sin x) = - (sin x) ecos x
dx

EXERCISE 5.4
Differentiate the following w.r.t. x:

ex -1 3
1. 2. esin x
3. ex
sin x
2 5
x x x
4. sin (tan–1 e–x) 5. log (cos ex) 6. e + e + ... + e
cos x
7. e x
, x>0 8. log (log x), x > 1 9. log x , x > 0

10. cos (log x + ex), x > 0

5.5. Logarithmic Differentiation
In this section, we will learn to differentiate certain special class of functions given in
the form
y = f (x) = [ u(x)] v (x)
By taking logarithm (to base e) the above may be rewritten as
log y = v(x) log [ u(x)]
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 75

Using chain rule we may differentiate this to get

1 dy 1 .
× = v( x) × u¢(x) + v¢(x) . log [ u(x)]
y dx u( x)
which implies that
dy é v ( x) ù
= yê × u¢( x) + v¢( x) × log u( x ) ú
dx ë u ( x ) û
The main point to be noted in this method is that f (x) and u(x) must always be
positive as otherwise their logarithms are not defined. This process of differentiation is
known as logarithms differentiation and is illustrated by the following examples:

( x - 3) ( x 2 +4)
Example 30 Differentiate w.r.t. x.
345x 2 + x +

( x - 3) ( x 2 +4)
Solution Let y=
(345)x 2 + x +
Taking logarithm on both sides, we have
1
log y = [log ( x – 3) + log ( x2 + 4) – log (3 x2 + 4 x + 5)]
2
N w, differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we get
o
1 dy 1é 1 2x 64 x + ù
× = ê + 2 - 2
y dx 2 ë ( x - 3) x + 435 x + x + úû

dy yé 1 2x 64 x + ù
or = ê + 2 - 2
dx 2 ë ( x - 3) x + 435 x + x + úû

1 ( x - 3) ( x 2 +4) é1 2 x 64 x+ ù
=
2 345x 2 + x + ê ( x -4353) + x 2 + - x 2 + x + ú
ë û
Example 31 Differentiate ax w.r.t. x, where a is a positive constant.
Solution Let y = ax. Then
log y = x log a
Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we have
1 dy
y dx = log a
176 MATHEM ATICS

dy
or = y log a
dx
d x
Thus ( a ) = ax log a
dx
d x d x log a d
Alternatively (a ) = (e ) = e x log a ( x log a)
dx dx dx
= ex log a . log a = ax log a.
Example 32 Differentiate xsin x, x > 0 w.r.t. x.
Solution Let y = xsin x. Taking logarithm on both sides, we have
log y = sin x log x
1 dy d d
Therefore . sin x (log x ) + log x (sin x )
y dx = dx dx
1 dy 1
or (sin x) + log x cos x
y dx = x

dy é sin x ù
or = yê + cos x log x ú
dx ë x û

sin x é sin x ù
= x ê + cos x log x ú
ë x û
= xsin x -1 × sin x + xsin x × cos x log x

dy
Example 33 Find , if yx + xy + xx = ab.
dx
Solution Given that yx + xy + xx = ab.
Putting u = yx, v = xy and w = xx, we get u + v + w = ab
du dv dw
Therefore + + =0 ... (1)
dx dx dx
Now, u = yx. Taking logarithm on both sides, we have
log u = x log y
Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we have
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 7

1 du d d
× = x (log y ) + log y ( x )
u dx dx dx
1 dy
= x × + log y ×1
y dx

du æ x dy ö é x dy ù
So = uç + log y ÷ = y x ê + log y ú ... (2)
dx è y dx ø ë y dx û
Also v = xy
Taking logarithm on both sides, we have
log v = y log x
Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we have
1 dv d dy
× = y (log x ) + log x
v dx dx dx
1 dy
= y × + log x ×
x dx
dv éy dy ù
So = v ê + log x ú
dx ëx dx û

y éy dy ù
= x ê + log x ú ... (3)
ëx dx û
Again w=x x

Taking logarithm on both sides, we have

log w = x log x.
Differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we have
1 dw d d
× = x (log x ) + log x × ( x)
w dx dx dx

1
= x × + log x × 1
x

dw
i.e. = w (1 + log x)
dx
= xx (1 + log x) ... (4)
178 MATHEM ATICS

From (1), (2), (3), (4), we have

æ x dy ö æy dy ö
yx ç + log y ÷ + x y ç + log x ÷ + xx (1 + log x) = 0
è y dx ø èx dx ø
dy
or (x . yx – 1 + xy . log x) = – xx (1 + log x) – y . xy–1 – yx log y
dx
dy yx
- [log y .+ y x y -1 +(1x x log+ )] x
Therefore =
dx x . y x -1 + x y log x

EXERCISE 5.5
Differentiate the functions given in Exercises 1 to 11 w.r.t. x.

( x - 1) ( x - 2)
1. cos x . cos 2x . cos 3 x 2.
( x - 3) ( x -4) ( x5)-
3. (log x)cos x 4. xx – 2sin x
x æ 1ö
æ 1ö ç1+ ÷
5. (x + 3) 2
. (x + 4) 3
. (x + 5) 4
6. ç x + ÷ + x è x ø
è xø
7. (log x)x + xlog x 8. (sin x)x + sin –1
x
x2 + 1
9. x sin x
+ (sin x) cos x
10. x x cos x +
x2 - 1
1
11. (x cos x) + x
( x sin x) x
dy
Find of the functions given in Exercises 12 to 15.
dx
12. xy + yx = 1 13. yx = xy
14. (cos x)y = (cos y)x 15. xy = e(x – y)
16. Find the derivative of the function given by f (x) = (1 + x) (1 + x2) (1 + x4 ) (1 + x8 )
and hence find f ¢(1).
17. Differentiate ( x2 – 5x + 8) ( x3 + 7 x + 9) in three ways mentioned below:
(i) by using product rule
(ii) by expanding the product to obtain a single polynomial.
(iii) by logarithmic differentiation.
Do they all give the same answer?
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 79

18. If u, v and w are functions of x, then show that

d du dv dw
(u. v. w) = v. w + u . .w+ u.v
dx dx dx dx
in two ways - first by repeated application of product rule, second by logarithmic
differentiation.
5.6 Derivatives of Functions in Parametric Forms
Sometimes the relation between two variables is neither explicit nor implicit, but some
link of a third variable with each of the two variables, separately, establishes a relation
between the first two variables. In such a situation, we say that the relation between
them is expressed via a third variable. The third variable is called the parameter. More
precisely, a relation expressed between two variables x and y in the form
x = f (t), y = g (t) is said to be parametric form with t as a parameter.
In order to find derivative of function in such form, we have by chain rule.
dy dy dx
= ×
dt dx dt

dy
dy æ dx ö
or = dt ç whenever ¹ 0÷
dx dx è dt ø
dt

dy g ¢(t ) æ dy dx ö
Thus = ç as = g ¢(t ) and = f ¢(t ) ÷ [provided f ¢(t) ¹ 0]
dx f ¢(t ) è dt dt ø

dy
Example 34 Find , if x = a cos q, y = a sin q.
dx
Solution Given that
x = a cos q, y = a sin q
dx dy
Therefore = – a sin q, = a cos q
dq dq

dy
dy d q = a cos q = - cot q
He nce =
dx dx - a sin q
dq
180 MATHEM ATICS

dy
Example 35 Find , if x = at2, y = 2at.
dx
Solution Given that x = at2, y = 2at
dx dy
So = 2at and = 2a
dt dt

dy
dy dt = 2a = 1
Therefore =
dx dx 2at t
dt

dy
Example 36 Find , if x = a (q + sin q), y = a (1 – cos q).
dx
dx dy
Solution We have = a(1 + cos q), = a (sin q)
dq dq

dy
dy d q = a sin q = tan q
Therefore =
dx dx a (1 + cos q) 2
dq

dy
ANote It may be noted here that
dx
is expressed in terms of parameter only
without directly involving the main variables x and y.
2 2 2
Example 37 Find dy , if x 3 + y = a .
dx
Solution Let x = a cos3 q, y = a sin3 q. Then
2 2 2 2
3
x 3 + y = (a cos q) 3 + ( a sin q)
2 2
2 2
= a 3 (cos q + (sin q) = a
2 2 2
Hence, x = a cos3 q, y = a sin3 q is parametric equation of x 3 + y = a
dx dy
Now = – 3 a cos2 q sin q and = 3 a sin2 q cos q
dq dq
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 81

dy
dy a 2cos
d q = 3sin q q y
Therefore = = - tan q = - 3
dx dx - 3cosa 2
q q
sin x
dq

ANote Had we proceeded in implicit way, it would have been quite tedious.
EXERCISE 5.6
If x and y are connected parametrically by the equations given in Exercises 1 to 10,
dy
without eliminating the parameter, Find .
dx
1. x = 2at2, y = at4 2. x = a cos q, y = b cos q
4
3. x = sin t, y = cos 2t 4. x = 4 t, y =
t
5. x = cos q – cos 2q, y = sin q – sin 2q
sin 3 t cos3 t
6. x = a (q – sin q), y = a (1 + cos q) 7. x = , y =
cos 2t cos 2t

æ tö
x = a ç cos t + log tan ÷ y = a sin t 9. x = a sec q, y = b tan q
8.
è 2ø
10. x = a (cos q + q sin q), y = a (sin q – q cos q)
-1 -1 dy y
11. If x = a sin t , y = a cos t , show that =-
dx x
5.7 Second Order Derivative
Let y = f (x). Then
dy
= f ¢(x) ... (1)
dx
If f ¢(x) is differentiable, we may differentiate (1) again w.r.t. x. Then, the left hand
d æ dy ö
side becomes ç ÷ which is called the second order derivative of y w.r.t. x and
dx è dx ø

d2y
is denoted by . The second order derivative of f (x) is denoted by f ²(x). It is also
dx 2
182 MATHEM ATICS

denoted by D 2 y or y² or y2 if y = f (x). We remark that higher order derivatives may be

defined similarly.
d2y
Example 38 Find , if y = x3 + tan x.
dx 2
Solution Given that y = x3 + tan x. Then
dy
= 3 x2 + sec 2
x
dx

d2y d
Therefore 2 =
x2 + 2 x
3sec
dx dx
= 6 x + 2 sec x . sec x tan x = 6 x + 2 sec 2
x tan x
d2y
Example 39 If y = A sin x + B cos x, then prove that + y=0.
dx 2
Solution We have
dy
= A cos x – B sin x
dx
d2y d
and 2 = (A cos x – B sin x)
dx dx
= – A sin x – B cos x = – y
d2y
He nce + y=0
dx 2
d2y dy
Example 40 If y = 3 e2x + 2 e3 x, prove that 2
- 5 + 60 y = .
dx dx
Solution Given that y = 3 e2x + 2 e3 x. Then
dy
= 6 e2x + 6 e3 x = 6 ( e2x + e3 x)
dx
d2y
Therefore = 12e2x + 18 e3 x = 6 (2 e2x + 3 e3 x)
dx 2

d2y dy
He nce 2
-5 +6 y = 6 (2 e2x + 3 e3 x)
dx dx
– 30 ( e2x + e3 x) + 6 (3 e2x + 2 e3 x) = 0
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 83

d2y dy
Example 41 If y = sin–1 x, show that (1 – x2) 2
-x =0.
dx dx
Solution We have y = sin–1 x. Then
dy 1
=
dx (1 - x 2 )

dy
or (1 - x 2 ) =1
dx
d æ 2 dy ö
So ç (1 - x ) . ÷ = 0
dx è dx ø

d 2 y dy d
or (1 - x 2 ) × + × (1 - x 2 ) = 0
dx 2 dx dx

d 2 y dy 2x
or (1 - x 2 ) × 2
- × =0
dx dx 2 1 - x 2

d2 y dy
He nce (1 - x 2 )
2
-x =0
dx dx
Alternatively, Given that y = sin–1 x, we have
1
y1 = , i.e., 1 - x 2 y 2 = 1
1 - x2 1

So (1 - x 2 ) . 2 y1 y2 + y12 (0 - 2 x ) = 0
He nce (1 – x2) y2 – xy1 = 0

EXERCISE 5.7
Find the second order derivatives of the functions given in Exercises 1 to 10.
1. x2 + 3 x+2 2. x 20 3. x . cos x
4. log x 5. x3 log x 6. ex sin 5x
7. e6 x cos 3 x 8. tan–1 x 9. log (log x)
10. sin (log x)
d2y
11. If y = 5 cos x – 3 sin x, prove that + y=0
dx 2
184 MATHEM ATICS

d2y
12. If y = cos–1 x, Find in terms of y alone.
dx 2
13. If y = 3 cos (log x) + 4 sin (log x), show that x2 y2 + xy1 + y = 0

d2y dy
14. If y = Ae + B
mx
e , show that
nx
2
- ( m + n) + mny = 0
dx dx

d2y
15. If y = 500e7 x + 600 e– 7 x, show that = 49 y
dx 2
2
d 2 y æ dy ö
16. If ey (x + 1) = 1, show that =ç ÷
dx 2 è dx ø
17. If y = (tan–1 x)2, show that (x2 + 1) 2
y2 + 2 x (x2 + 1) y1 = 2

5.8 Mean Value Theorem

In this section, we will state two fundamental results in Calculus without proof. We
shall also learn the geometric interpretation of these theorems.
Theorem 6 (Rolle ’ s Theorem) Let f : [ a, b] ® R be continuous on [ a, b] and
differentiable on (a, b), such that f(a) = f(b), where a and b are some real numbers.
Then there exists some c in (a, b) such that f ¢(c) = 0.
In Fig 5.12 and 5.13, graphs of a few typical differentiable functions satisfying the
hypothesis of Rolle ’ s theorem are given.

Fig 5.12 Fig 5.13

Observe what happens to the slope of the tangent to the curve at various points
between a and b. In each of the graphs, the slope becomes zero at least at one point.
That is precisely the claim of the Rolle ’ s theorem as the slope of the tangent at any
point on the graph of y = f (x) is nothing but the derivative of f (x) at that point.
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 85

Theorem 7 (Mean Value Theorem) Let f : [ a, b] ® R be a continuous function on

[ a, b] and differentiable on ( a, b). Then there exists some c in (a, b) such that
f (b) - f ( a)
f ¢(c) =
b-a
Observe that the Mean Value Theorem (MVT) is an extension of Rolle ’ s theorem.
Let us now understand a geometric interpretation of the MVT. The graph of a function
y = f(x) is given in the Fig 5.14. We have already interpreted f ¢(c) as the slope of the
f (b) - f ( a)
tangent to the curve y = f (x) at (c, f (c)). From the Fig 5.14 it is clear that
b-a
is the slope of the secant drawn between (a, f (a)) and (b, f (b)). The MVT states that
there is a point c in (a, b) such that the slope of the tangent at (c, f(c)) is same as the
slope of the secant between (a, f (a)) and (b, f (b)). In other words, there is a point c in
(a, b) such that the tangent at (c, f (c)) is parallel to the secant between (a, f (a)) and
(b, f (b)).

Fig 5.14

Example 42 Verify Rolle ’ s theorem for the function y = x2 + 2, a = – 2 and b = 2.

Solution The function y = x2 + 2 is continuous in [ – 2, 2] and differentiable in ( – 2, 2).

Also f (– 2) = f ( 2) = 6 and hence the value of f (x) at – 2 and 2 coincide. Rolle ’ s
theorem states that there is a point c Î (– 2, 2), where f ¢ (c) = 0. Since f ¢ (x) = 2x, we
get c = 0. Thus at c = 0, we have f ¢ (c) = 0 and c = 0 Î (– 2, 2).
Example 43 Verify Mean Value Theorem for the function f (x) = x2 in the interval [2, 4].

Solution The function f (x) = x2 is continuous in [2, 4] and differentiable in (2, 4) as its
derivative f ¢ (x) = 2x is defined in (2, 4).
186 MATHEM ATICS

Now, f (2) = 4 and f (4) = 16. Hence

f (b) - f ( a ) 164 -
= =6
b-a 42 -
MVT states that there is a point c Î (2, 4) such that f ¢ (c) = 6. But f ¢ (x) = 2x which
implies c = 3. Thus at c = 3 Î (2, 4), we have f ¢ (c) = 6.

EXERCISE 5.8
1. eV rify Rolle ’ s theorem for the function f (x) = x2 + 2 x – 8, x Î [ – 4, 2].
2. x E amine if Rolle ’ s theorem is applicable to any of the following functions. Can
you say some thing about the converse of Rolle ’ s theorem from these example?
(i) f (x) = [ x] for x Î [5, 9](ii) f (x) = [ x] for x Î [ – 2, 2]
(iii) f (x) = x – 1 for x Î [1, 2]
2

3. If f : [ – 5, 5] ® R is a differentiable function and if f ¢(x) does not vanish

anywhere, then prove that f (– 5) ¹ f (5).
4. Verify Mean Value Theorem, if f (x) = x2 – 4 x – 3 in the interval [ a, b], where
a = 1 and b = 4.
5. Verify Mean Value Theorem, if f (x) = x3 – 5x2 – 3 x in the interval [ a, b], where
a = 1 and b = 3. Find all c Î (1, 3) for which f ¢(c) = 0.
6. Examine the applicability of Mean Value Theorem for all three functions given in
the above exercise 2.

Miscellaneous Examples
Example 44 Differentiate w.r.t. x, the following function:
1 2
(i) 32x + + (ii) esec x + 3cos –1
x (iii) log7 (log x)
2
2x + 4
Solution
1 1
1 -
(i) Let y = 32x + + = (32)x + (22 + 4)x +2 2
2 x2 + 4
2
Note that this function is defined at all real numbers x > - . Therefore
3
1 1
dy 1 -1 d æ 1ö 2
- -1 d
= (32)x + 2 (3×2 ) x + (2+ ç - 4) ÷ x + (2 2 ×4) x2 +
dx 2 dx è 2ø dx
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 87

1 3
1 - æ 1ö -
= (32)x + (3) 2 × -(2ç ÷ 4) x 2 +4 2 × x
2 è 2ø
3 2 x
= - 3
2 32x + 2
2x + 4 2

2
This is defined for all real numbers x > - .
3
2
(ii) eL t y = e
sec x
+ 3cos -1 x
This is defined at every real number in [1-
,1] . Therefore

dy sec2 x d æ 1 ö
= e × (sec2 x) + 3 ç -
dx dx è 1 - x 2 ÷ø

sec2 x æ d ö æ 1 ö
= e × ç 2sec x (sec x)÷ + 3 ç -
è dx ø è 1 - x 2 ÷ø

sec 2 x æ 1 ö
2sec x (sec x tan x ) e +3 ç-
= 2 ÷
è 1- x ø

2 sec2 x æ 1 ö
2sec x tan x e +3 ç-
= 2 ÷
è 1- x ø
Observe that the derivative of the given function is valid only in 1[ -
, 1]0 - as
the derivative of cos x exists only in (– 1, 1) and the function itself is not
–1

defined at 0.
log (log x)
(iii) Let y = log7 (log x) = (by change of base formula).
log 7
The function is defined for all real numbers x > 1. Therefore
dy 1 d
= (log (log x ))
dx log 7 dx
1 1 d
= × (log x )
log 7log x dx
1
=
x log 7log x
188 MATHEM ATICS

Example 45 Differentiate the following w.r.t. x.

æ sin x ö æ 2 x +1 ö
(i) cos – 1 (sin x) (ii) tan -1 ç ÷ (iii) sin -1 ç ÷
è 1 + cos x ø è 1+ 4 x ø
Solution
(i) Let f (x) = cos – 1 (sin x). Observe that this function is defined for all real numbers.
We may rewrite this function as
f (x) = cos – 1 (sin x)
-1 é æp öù
= cos êcos çè - x÷ø ú
ë 2 û
p
= -x
2
Thus f ¢(x) = – 1.
æ sin x ö
(ii) Let f (x) = tan – 1 ç ÷ . Observe that this function is defined for all real
è 1 + cos x ø
numbers, where cos x ¹ – 1; i.e., at all odd multiplies of p. We may rewrite this
function as

-1 æ sin x ö
f (x) = tan ç ÷
è 1 + cos x ø
é æxö æ x öù
ê 2 sin ç ÷ cos ç ÷ ú
-1 è2ø è 2 øú
= tan ê
ê x ú
2cos 2
êë 2 úû

-1 é æ x öù x
= tan ê tan ç ÷ ú =
ë è 2 øû 2
æ xö
Observe that we could cancel cos ç ÷ in both numerator and denominator as it
è2ø
1.
is not equal to zero. Thus f ¢(x) =
2
æ 2x + 1 ö
(iii) Let f (x) = sin – 1 ç ÷ . To find the domain of this function we need to find all
è 1+ 4 x ø

2 x +1
x such that -1 £ £ 1 . Since the quantity in the middle is always positive,
1+ 4 x
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 89

2 x +1
we need to find all x such that x
£ 1 , i.e., all x such that 2x + 1 £ 1 + 4 x
. Wee
1+ 4
1
may rewrite this as 2 £ + 2 x which is true for all x. Hence the function
2x
is defined at every real number. By putting 2 x = tan q, this function may be
rewritten as

-1 é 2 ù
x +1
f (x) = sin ê xú
ë1 + 4 û

-1 é 2 × 2 ù
x
= sin ê 2ú
êë1 + 2 x úû

-1 é 2 tan q ù
= sin ê
ë1 + tan 2 q úû
= sin – 1 [sin 2 q]
= 2q = 2 tan – 1 (2x)
1 d
Thus f ¢(x) = 2 × × (2 x )
x 2 dx
1+ 2
2
= x
× (2 x )log 2
1+ 4
2 x + 1 log 2
=
1+ 4 x
Example 46 Find f ¢(x) if f (x) = (sin x)sin x for all 0 < x < p.
Solution The function y = (sin x)sin x is defined for all positive real numbers. Taking
logarithms, we have
log y = log (sin x)sin x = sin x log (sin x)
1 dy d
Then = (sin x log (sin x))
y dx dx

1 d
= cos x log (sin x) + sin x . × (sin x)
sin x dx
= cos x log (sin x) + cos x
= (1 + log (sin x)) cos x
190 MATHEM ATICS

dy
Thus = y((1 + log (sin x)) cos x) = (1 + log (sin x)) ( sin x)sin x cos x
dx
dy
Example 47 For a positive constant a find , where
dx
1 a
t+ æ 1ö
y=a and x = ç t + ÷
t,
è tø
Solution Observe that both y and x are defined for all real t ¹ 0. Clearly
1
dy d t +1 t+ d æ 1ö
= a t = a t ç t + ÷ × log a
dt dt dt è t ø
1
t+ æ 1ö
= a ç1 - 2 ÷ log a
t
è t ø
a -1
dx é 1ù d æ 1ö
Similarly = a êt + ú × çt + ÷
dt ë tû dt è t ø
a -1
é 1ù æ 1ö
= a êt + ú × ç1 - 2 ÷
ë tû è t ø
dx
¹ 0 only if t ¹ ± 1. Thus for t ¹ ± 1,
dt
1
t+ æ 1ö
dy a t ç1 - 2 ÷ log a
dy dt è t ø
= = a -1
dx dx é 1ù æ 1ö
a êt + ú × ç 1 - 2 ÷
dt ë tû è t ø
1
t+
a t log a
= a -1
æ 1ö
açt + ÷
è tø
Example 48 Differentiate sin 2
x w.r.t. e .
cos x

Solution Let u (x) = sin2 x and v (x) = e cos x. We want to find du = du / dx . Clearly
dv dv / dx
du dv
= 2 sin x cos x and = e cos x (– sin x) = – (sin x) e cos x
dx dx
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 91

du 2sin x cos x 2cos x

Thus = cos x
= - cos x
dv - sin x e e

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 5

Differentiate w.r.t. x the function in Exercises 1 to 11.
1. (3 x2 – 9 x + 5) 9 2. sin3 x + cos 6 x
3. (5x) 3c os 2 x 4. sin–1(x x ), 0 £ x £ 1
x
cos -1
5. 2 ,–2< x<2
2x + 7
é 1 + sin x + 1 - sin x ù p
6. cot -1 ê ú,0< x<
ë 1 + sin x - 1 - sin x û 2
7. (log x) , x > 1
log x

8. cos (a cos x + b sin x), for some constant a and b.

p 3 p
9. (sin x – cos x) <x<
(sin x – cos x)
,
4
10. xx + xa + ax + aa, for some fixed a > 0 and x > 0
2
-3 x2
11. xx + x-3 , for x > 3
dy p p
12. Find , if y = 12 (1 – cos t), x = 10 (t – sin t), - < t <
dx 2 2
dy
13. Find , if y = sin–1 x + sin –1 1 - x 2 , 0 < x < 1
dx
14. If x 1 + y + y 1 + x = 0 , for , – 1 < x < 1, prove that
dy 1
=- 2
dx 1+ x
15. If (x – a)2 + ( y – b)2 = c2, for some c > 0, prove that
3
é æ dy ö2 ù 2
ê1 + ç ÷ ú
ë è dx ø û
d2y
dx 2
is a constant independent of a and b.
192 MATHEM ATICS

dy cos 2 (a + y )
16. If cos y = x cos (a + y), with cos a ¹ ± 1, prove that = .
dx sin a

d2y
17. If x = a (cos t + t sin t) and y = a (sin t – t cos t), find .
dx 2
18. If f (x) = | x | 3 , show that f ²(x) exists for all real x and find it.
d n
19. Using mathematical induction prove that x = nx n-1 for all positive
dx
integers n.
20. Using the fact that sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B and the differentiation,
obtain the sum formula for cosines.
21. Does there exist a function which is continuous everywhere but not differentiable
at exactly two points? Justify your answer.

f ( x) g ( x) h( x) f ¢( x ) g ¢( x) h¢( x)
dy
22. If y = l m n , prove that = l m n
dx
a b c a b c

2
23. If y = ea cos-1 x , – 1 £ x £ 1, show that 1 - x 2 d y - x dy - a 2 y = 0 .
dx 2 dx

Summary
® A real valued function is continuous at a point in its domain if the limit of the
function at that point equals the value of the function at that point. A function
is continuous if it is continuous on the whole of its domain.
® Sum, difference, product and quotient of continuous functions are continuous.
i.e., if f and g are continuous functions, then
(f ± g) (x) = f (x) ± g (x) is continuous.
(f . g) (x) = f (x) . g (x) is continuous.

æf ö f ( x)
çg ÷ ( x) = g ( x) (wherever g (x) ¹ 0) is continuous.
è ø
® Every differentiable function is continuous, but the converse is not true.
 CONT INUI TY AND DIFFERENT IABILITY1 93

® Chain rule is rule to differentiate composites of functions. If f = v o u, t = u (x)

dt dv
and if both and exist then
dx dt
df dv dt
= ×
dx dt dx
® Following are some of the standard derivatives (in appropriate domains):
d 1 d 1
sin -1 x = cos -1 x = -
dx 1 - x2 dx 1 - x2
d 1 d -1
tan -1 x = cot -1 x =
dx 1 + x2 dx 1 + x2
d 1 d -1
sec -1 x = cosec-1 x =
dx x 1 - x2 dx x 1 - x2

d x d 1
e = ex log x =
dx dx x
® Logarithmic differentiation is a powerful technique to differentiate functions
of the form f (x) = [ u (x)] v (x). Here both f (x) and u (x) need to be positive for
this technique to make sense.
® Rolle’s Theorem: If f : [ a, b] ® R is continuous on [ a, b] and differentiable
on (a, b) such that f (a) = f (b), then there exists some c in (a, b) such that
f ¢(c) = 0.
® Mean Value Theorem: If f : [ a, b] ® R is continuous on [ a, b] and
differentiable on (a, b). Then there exists some c in (a, b) such that
f (b) - f ( a)
f ¢(c) =
b-a

—v—
194 MATHEMATICS

Chapter 6
APPLICATION OF
DERIVATIVES
v With the Calculus as a key, Mathematics can be successfully applied
to the explanation of the course of Nature.” — WHITEHEAD v

6.1 Introduction
In Chapter 5, we have learnt how to find derivative of composite functions, inverse
trigonometric functions, implicit functions, exponential functions and logarithmic functions.
In this chapter, we will study applications of the derivative in various disciplines, e.g., in
engineering, science, social science, and many other fields. For instance, we will learn
how the derivative can be used (i) to determine rate of change of quantities, (ii) to find
the equations of tangent and normal to a curve at a point, (iii) to find turning points on
the graph of a function which in turn will help us to locate points at which largest or
smallest value (locally) of a function occurs. We will also use derivative to find intervals
on which a function is increasing or decreasing. Finally, we use the derivative to find
approximate value of certain quantities.
6.2 Rate of Change of Quantities
ds
Recall that by the derivative , we mean the rate of change of distance s with
dt
respect to the time t. In a similar fashion, whenever one quantity y varies with another
dy
quantity x, satisfying some rule y = f ( x ) , then (or f ¢(x)) represents the rate of
dx
dy ù
change of y with respect to x and dx úû (or f ¢(x0)) represents the rate of change
x = x0

of y with respect to x at x = x0 .
Further, if two variables x and y are varying with respect to another variable t, i.e.,
if x = f (t ) and y = g (t ) , then by Chain Rule
dy dy dx dx
= , if ¹0
dx dt dt dt
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 195

Thus, the rate of change of y with respect to x can be calculated using the rate of
change of y and that of x both with respect to t.
et us consider some examples.
Example 1 Find the rate of change of the area of a circle per second with respect to
its radius r when r = 5 cm.
Solution The area A of a circle with radius r is given by A = pr . Therefore, the rate
dA d
of change of the area A with respect to its radius r is given by = (p r ) = p r .
dr dr
dA
When r = 5 cm, = 10p . Thus, the area of the circle is changing at the rate of
dr
10p cm s.
Example 2 The volume of a cube is increasing at a rate of 9 cubic centimetres per
second. How fast is the surface area increasing when the length of an edge is 10
centimetres
Solution et x be the length of a side, be the volume and S be the surface area of
the cube. Then, = x and S = x , where x is a function of time t.
d
ow = 9cm s ( iven)
dt
d d d dx
Therefore 9= = (x ) = (x ) × ( y Chain Rule)
dt dt dx dt
dx
= x ×
dt
dx
or = ... (1)
dt x
dS d d dx
ow = ( x ) = ( x )× ( y Chain Rule)
dt dt dx dt

æ ö
= 1 x×ç ÷ = ( sing (1))
èx ø x
dS
Hence, when x = 10 cm, = . cm s
dt
19 MATHEMATICS

Example 3 A stone is dropped into a quiet la e and waves move in circles at a speed
of 4cm per second. At the instant, when the radius of the circular wave is 10 cm, how
fast is the enclosed area increasing
Solution The area A of a circle with radius r is given by A = pr . Therefore, the rate
of change of area A with respect to time t is
dA d d dr dr
= (p r ) = ( p r ) × = pr ( y Chain Rule)
dt dt dr dt dt
dr
It is given that = 4cm s
dt
dA
Therefore, when r = 10 cm, = p (10) (4) = 0p
dt
Thus, the enclosed area is increasing at the rate of 0p cm s, when r = 10 cm.
dy
ANote dx
is positive if y increases as x increases and is negative if y decreases
as x increases.

Example 4 The length x of a rectangle is decreasing at the rate of cm minute and

the width y is increasing at the rate of cm minute. When x =10cm and y = cm, find
the rates of change of (a) the perimeter and (b) the area of the rectangle.
Solution Since the length x is decreasing and the width y is increasing with respect to
time, we have
dx dy
= - cm min and = cm min
dt dt
(a) The perimeter of a rectangle is given by
= (x y)
d æ dx dy ö
Therefore = çè + ÷ø = ( - + ) = - cm min
dt dt dt
(b) The area A of the rectangle is given by
A= x . y
dA dx dy
Therefore = × y + x×
dt dt dt
= ( ) 10( ) (as x = 10 cm and y = cm)
= cm min
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 19

Example 5 The total cost C(x) in Rupees, associated with the production of x units of
an item is given by
C(x) = 0.005 x 0.0 x 0x 5000
Find the marginal cost when units are produced, where by marginal cost we
mean the instantaneous rate of change of total cost at any level of output.
Solution Since marginal cost is the rate of change of total cost with respect to the
output, we have
dC
Marginal cost (MC) = = 0.005( x ) - 0.0 ( x) + 0
dx
When x = , MC = 0.015( ) - 0.04( ) + 0
= 0.1 5 0.1 0 = 0.015
Hence, the required marginal cost is Rs 0.0 (nearly).
Example 6 The total revenue in Rupees received from the sale of x units of a product
is given by R(x) = x x 5. Find the marginal revenue, when x = 5, where by
marginal revenue we mean the rate of change of total revenue with respect to the
number of items sold at an instant.
Solution Since marginal revenue is the rate of change of total revenue with respect to
the number of units sold, we have
dR
Marginal Revenue (MR) = = x+
dx
When x = 5, MR = (5) =
Hence, the required marginal revenue is Rs .

EXERCISE 6.1
1. Find the rate of change of the area of a circle with respect to its radius r when
(a) r = cm (b) r = 4 cm
2. The volume of a cube is increasing at the rate of cm s. How fast is the
surface area increasing when the length of an edge is 1 cm
3. The radius of a circle is increasing uniformly at the rate of cm s. Find the rate
at which the area of the circle is increasing when the radius is 10 cm.
4. An edge of a variable cube is increasing at the rate of cm s. How fast is the
volume of the cube increasing when the edge is 10 cm long
5. A stone is dropped into a quiet la e and waves move in circles at the speed of
5 cm s. At the instant when the radius of the circular wave is cm, how fast is
the enclosed area increasing
19 MATHEMATICS

6. The radius of a circle is increasing at the rate of 0. cm s. What is the rate of

increase of its circumference
7. The length x of a rectangle is decreasing at the rate of 5 cm minute and the
width y is increasing at the rate of 4 cm minute. When x = cm and y = cm, find
the rates of change of (a) the perimeter, and (b) the area of the rectangle.
8. A balloon, which always remains spherical on inflation, is being inflated by pumping
in 900 cubic centimetres of gas per second. Find the rate at which the radius of
the balloon increases when the radius is 15 cm.
9. A balloon, which always remains spherical has a variable radius. Find the rate at
which its volume is increasing with the radius when the later is 10 cm.
10. A ladder 5 m long is leaning against a wall. The bottom of the ladder is pulled
along the ground, away from the wall, at the rate of cm s. How fast is its height
on the wall decreasing when the foot of the ladder is 4 m away from the wall
11. A particle moves along the curve y = x . Find the points on the curve at
which the y coordinate is changing times as fast as the x coordinate.
1
12. The radius of an air bubble is increasing at the rate of cm s. At what rate is the
volume of the bubble increasing when the radius is 1 cm

13. A balloon, which always remains spherical, has a variable diameter ( x + 1) .

Find the rate of change of its volume with respect to x.
14. Sand is pouring from a pipe at the rate of 1 cm s. The falling sand forms a cone
on the ground in such a way that the height of the cone is always one sixth of the
radius of the base. How fast is the height of the sand cone increasing when the
height is 4 cm
15. The total cost C (x) in Rupees associated with the production of x units of an
item is given by
C (x) = 0.00 x 0.00 x 15x 4000.
Find the marginal cost when 1 units are produced.
16. The total revenue in Rupees received from the sale of x units of a product is
given by
R (x) = 1 x x 15.
Find the marginal revenue when x = .
Choose the correct answer in the Exercises 1 and 1 .
17. The rate of change of the area of a circle with respect to its radius r at r = cm is
(A) 10p ( ) 1 p (C) p ( ) 11p
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 199

18. The total revenue in Rupees received from the sale of x units of a product is
given by
R(x) = x x 5. The marginal revenue, when x = 15 is
(A) 11 ( ) 9 (C) 90 ( ) 1
6.3 Increasing and Decreasing Functions
In this section, we will use differentiation to find out whether a function is increasing or
decreasing or none.
Consider the function f given by f (x) = x , x Î R. The graph of this function is a
parabola as given in Fig .1.
alues left to origin alues right to origin
x f (x) = x x f (x) = x

4 0 0
9 1 1
-
4 4
1 1 1 1
1 1 9
-
4 4
0 0 4

Fig 6.1
First consider the graph (Fig .1) to the right of the origin. bserve that as we
move from left to right along the graph, the height of the graph continuously increases.
For this reason, the function is said to be increasing for the real numbers x 0.
ow consider the graph to the left of the origin and observe here that as we move
from left to right along the graph, the height of the graph continuously decreases.
Consequently, the function is said to be decreasing for the real numbers x 0.
We shall now give the following analytical definitions for a function which is
increasing or decreasing on an interval.
Definition 1 et I be an interval contained in the domain of a real valued function f.
Then f is said to be
(i) increasing on I if x1 x in I Þ f (x1) £ f (x ) for all x1, x Î I.
(ii) strictly increasing on I if x1 x in I Þ f (x1) f (x ) for all x1, x Î I.
 00 MATHEMATICS

(iii) decreasing on I if x1 x in I Þ f (x1) ³ f (x ) for all x1, x Î I.

(iv) strictly decreasing on I if x1 x in I Þ f (x1) f (x ) for all x1, x Î I.
For graphical representation of such functions see Fig . .

Fig 6.2
We shall now define when a function is increasing or decreasing at a point.
Definition 2 et x0 be a point in the domain of definition of a real valued function f.
Then f is said to be increasing, strictly increasing, decreasing or strictly decreasing at
x0 if there exists an open interval I containing x0 such that f is increasing, strictly
increasing, decreasing or strictly decreasing, respectively, in I.
et us clarify this definition for the case of increasing function.
A function f is said to be increasing at x0 if there exists an interval I = (x0 h, x0 h),
h 0 such that for x1, x Î I
x1 x in I Þ f (x1) £ f (x )
Similarly, the other cases can be clarified.
Example 7 Show that the function given by f (x) = x is strictly increasing on R.
Solution et x1 and x be any two numbers in R. Then
x1 x Þ x1 x Þ x1 x Þ f (x1) f (x )
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 01

Thus, by efinition 1, it follows that f is strictly increasing on R.

We shall now give the first derivative test for increasing and decreasing functions.
The proof of this test requires the Mean alue Theorem studied in Chapter 5.
Theorem 1 et f be continuous on a, b and differentiable on the open interval
(a,b). Then
(a) f is strictly increasing in a,b if f ¢(x) 0 for each x Î (a, b)
(b) f is strictly decreasing in a,b if f ¢(x) 0 for each x Î (a, b)
(c) f is a constant function in a,b if f ¢(x) = 0 for each x Î (a, b)

Proof (a) et x1, x Î a, b be such that x1 x.

Then, by Mean alue Theorem (Theorem in Chapter 5), there exists a point c
between x1 and x such that
f (x ) f (x1) = f ¢(c) (x x1)
i.e. f (x ) f (x1) 0 (as f ¢(c) 0 (given))
i.e. f (x ) f (x 1 )
Thus, we have
x1 < x Þ f ( x1 ) < f ( x ), for all x1 , x Î a , b
Hence, f is an increasing function in a,b .
The proofs of part (b) and (c) are similar. It is left as an exercise to the reader.

Remarks
(i) There is a more generalised theorem, which states that if f ¢(x) 0 for x in an
interval excluding the end points and f is continuous in the interval, then f is
strictly increasing. Similarly, if f ¢(x) 0 for x in an interval excluding the end
points and f is continuous in the interval, then f is strictly decreasing.
(ii) If a function is strictly increasing or strictly decreasing in an interval I, then it is
necessarily increasing or decreasing in I. However, the converse need not
be true.
Example 8 Show that the function f given by
f (x) = x x 4x, x Î R
is strictly increasing on R.
Solution ote that
f ¢(x) = x x 4
 0 MATHEMATICS

= (x x 1) 1
= (x 1) 1 0, in every interval of R
Therefore, the function f is strictly increasing on R.

Example 9 rove that the function given by f (x) = cos x is

(a) strictly decreasing in (0, p)
(b) strictly increasing in (p, p), and
(c) neither increasing nor decreasing in (0, p).
Solution ote that f ¢(x) = sin x
(a) Since for each x Î (0, p), sin x 0, we have f ¢(x) 0 and so f is strictly
decreasing in (0, p).
(b) Since for each x Î (p, p), sin x 0, we have f ¢(x) 0 and so f is strictly
increasing in (p, p).
(c) Clearly by (a) and (b) above, f is neither increasing nor decreasing in (0, p).

Example 10 Find the intervals in which the function f given by f (x) = x 4x is

(a) strictly increasing (b) strictly decreasing
Solution We have
f (x) = x 4x
or f ¢(x) = x 4
Therefore, f ¢(x) = 0 gives x = . ow
the point x = divides the real line into two
dis oint intervals namely, ( ¥, ) and ( , Fig 6.3
¥) (Fig . ). In the interval ( ¥, ), f ¢(x)
= x 4 0.
Therefore, f is strictly decreasing in this interval. Also, in the interval ( , ¥) ,
f ¢ ( x) > 0 and so the function f is strictly increasing in this interval.

Example 11 Find the intervals in which the function f given by f (x) = 4x x x 0

is (a) strictly increasing (b) strictly decreasing.
Solution We have
f (x) = 4x x x 0
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 0

or f ¢(x) = 1 x 1 x
= 1 (x x )
= 1 (x ) (x )
Therefore, f ¢(x) = 0 gives x = , . The
points x = and x = divides the real line into
three dis oint intervals, namely, ( ¥, ), ( , ) Fig 6.4
and ( , ¥).
In the intervals ( ¥, ) and ( , ¥), f ¢(x) is positive while in the interval ( , ),
f ¢(x) is negative. Consequently, the function f is strictly increasing in the intervals
( ¥, ) and ( , ¥) while the function is strictly decreasing in the interval ( , ).
However, f is neither increasing nor decreasing in R.

Interval Sign of f ¢(x) ature of function f

( ¥, ) ( )( ) 0 f is strictly increasing
( , ) ( )( ) 0 f is strictly decreasing
( , ¥) ( )( ) 0 f is strictly increasing

é pù
Example 12 Find intervals in which the function given by f (x) = sin x, x Î ê0, ú is
ë û
(a) increasing (b) decreasing.
Solution We have
f (x) = sin x
or f ¢(x) = cos x
p p é pù
Therefore, f ¢(x) = 0 gives cos x = 0 which in turn gives x = , (as x Î ê0, ú
ë û
é pù p p p é pù
implies x Î ê0, ú ). So x = and . The point x = divides the interval ê0, ú
ë û ë û
é pö æ p pù
into two dis oint intervals ê0, ÷ and ç , ú .
ë ø è û
Fig 6.5
é pö p p
ow, f ¢ ( x) > 0 for all x Î ê0, ÷ as 0 £ x < Þ 0 £ x < and f ¢ ( x) < 0 for
ë ø
æp pö p p p p
all x Î ç , ÷ as < x < Þ < x < .
è ø
 04 MATHEMATICS

é pö æp pö
Therefore, f is strictly increasing in ê0, ÷ and strictly decreasing in ç , ÷.
ë ø è ø

p
Also, the given function is continuous at x = 0 and x = . Therefore, by Theorem 1,

é pù ép pù
f is increasing on ê0, ú and decreasing on ê , ú .
ë û ë û

Example 13 Find the intervals in which the function f given by

f (x) = sin x cos x, 0 £ x £ p
is strictly increasing or strictly decreasing.

Solution We have
f(x) = sin x cos x,
or f ¢(x) = cos x sin x
p 5p
ow f ¢ ( x) = 0 gives sin x = cos x which gives that x = , as 0 £ x £ p
4 4

p 5p
The points x = and x = divide the interval 0, p into three dis oint intervals,
4 4

é p ö æ p 5p ö æ 5p ù
namely, ê0, ÷ , çè , ÷ø and ç , p ú .
ë 4ø 4 4 è 4 û
Fig 6.6
é p ö æ 5p ù
ote that f ¢( x) > 0 if x Î ê0, ÷ È ç , p ú
ë 4ø è 4 û

é pö æ 5p ù
or f is strictly increasing in the intervals ê0, ÷ and ç , p ú
ë 4ø è 4 û

æ p 5p ö
Also f ¢ ( x ) < 0 if x Îç , ÷
è4 4 ø

æ p 5p ö
or f is strictly decreasing in çè , ÷ø
4 4
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 05

Interval Sign of f ¢ ( x) ature of function

é pö
êë0, 4 ø÷ 0 f is strictly increasing

æ p 5p ö
çè , ÷ø 0 f is strictly decreasing
4 4

æ 5p ù
ç 4 , pú 0 f is strictly increasing
è û

EXERCISE 6.2
1. Show that the function given by f (x) = x 1 is strictly increasing on R.
2. Show that the function given by f (x) = e x is strictly increasing on R.
3. Show that the function given by f (x) = sin x is

æ pö æp ö
(a) strictly increasing in ç 0, ÷ (b) strictly decreasing in ç ,p÷
è ø è ø
(c) neither increasing nor decreasing in (0, p)
4. Find the intervals in which the function f given by f (x) = x x is
(a) strictly increasing (b) strictly decreasing
5. Find the intervals in which the function f given by f (x) = x x x is
(a) strictly increasing (b) strictly decreasing
6. Find the intervals in which the following functions are strictly increasing or
decreasing
(a) x x 5 (b) 10 x x
(c) x 9x 1 x 1 (d) 9x x
(e) (x 1) (x )
x
7. Show that y = log(1 + x) - , x 1, is an increasing function of x
+x
throughout its domain.
8. Find the values of x for which y = x(x ) is an increasing function.

4sin q é pù
9. rove that y = - q is an increasing function of q in ê0, ú .
( + cos q) ë û
 0 MATHEMATICS

10. rove that the logarithmic function is strictly increasing on (0, ¥).
11. rove that the function f given by f (x) = x x 1 is neither strictly increasing
nor strictly decreasing on ( 1, 1).
æ pö
12. Which of the following functions are strictly decreasing on ç 0, ÷
è ø
(A) cos x ( ) cos x (C) cos x ( ) tan x
13. n which of the following intervals is the function f given by f (x) = x100 sin x 1
strictly decreasing
æp ö æ pö
(A) (0,1) ( ) ç , p÷ (C) ç 0, ÷ ( ) one of these
è ø è ø
14. Find the least value of a such that the function f given by f (x) = x ax 1 is
strictly increasing on 1, .
15. et I be any interval dis oint from 1, 1 . rove that the function f given by
1
f ( x) = x + is strictly increasing on I.
x
æ pö
16. rove that the function f given by f (x) = log sin x is strictly increasing on ç 0, ÷
è ø

æp ö
and strictly decreasing on ç , p÷ .
è ø
17. rove that the function f given by f (x) = log cos x| is strictly decreasing on
æ pö æ p ö
ç 0, ÷ and strictly increasing on ç , p ÷ .
è ø è ø
18. rove that the function given by f (x) = x x x 100 is increasing in R.
19. The interval in which y = x e–x is increasing is
(A) ( ¥, ¥) ( ) ( , 0) (C) ( , ¥) ( ) (0, )
6.4 Tangents and Normals
In this section, we shall use differentiation to find the equation of the tangent line and
the normal line to a curve at a given point.
Recall that the equation of a straight line passing through a given point (x0, y0)
having finite slope m is given by
y y0 = m (x x0)
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 0

ote that the slope of the tangent to the curve y = f (x)

dy ù
at the point (x0, y0) is given by ( = f ¢( x0 )) . So
dx úû ( x0 , y0 )
the equation of the tangent at (x0, y0) to the curve y = f (x)
is given by
y y0 = f ¢(x0)(x x0)
Also, since the normal is perpendicular to the tangent,
the slope of the normal to the curve y = f (x) at (x0, y0) is
-1 Fig 6.7
, if f ¢ ( x0 ) ¹ 0 . Therefore, the equation of the
f ¢ ( x0 )
normal to the curve y = f (x) at (x0, y0) is given by

-1
y y0 = ( x - x0 )
f ¢( x0 )

i.e. ( y - y0 ) f ¢( x0 ) + ( x - x0 ) = 0

ANote If a tangent line to the curve y = f (x) ma es an angle q with x axis in the
dy
positive direction, then = slope of the tangent = tan q .
dx
Particular cases
(i) If slope of the tangent line is ero, then tan q = 0 and so q = 0 which means the
tangent line is parallel to the x axis. In this case, the equation of the tangent at
the point (x0, y0) is given by y = y0.

p
(ii) If q ® , then tan q ® ¥, which means the tangent line is perpendicular to the

x axis, i.e., parallel to the y axis. In this case, the equation of the tangent at
(x0, y0) is given by x = x0 (Why ).

Example 14 Find the slope of the tangent to the curve y = x x at x = .

Solution The slope of the tangent at x = is given by

dy ù
= x - 1ùû x = = 11.
dx úû x =
 0 MATHEMATICS

Example 15 Find the point at which the tangent to the curve y = 4 x - - 1 has its

slope .
Solution Slope of tangent to the given curve at (x, y) is
-1
dy 1
= (4 x - ) 4 =
dx 4x -

The slope is given to be .

So =
4x -
or 4x =9
or x=
ow y = 4 x - - 1 . So when x = , y = 4( ) - - 1 = .
Therefore, the required point is ( , ).
Example 16 Find the equation of all lines having slope and being tangent to the curve

y+ =0.
x-
Solution Slope of the tangent to the given curve at any point (x,y) is given by
dy
=
dx (x - )
ut the slope is given to be . Therefore

=
(x - )
or (x ) =1
or x = 1
or x = ,4
ow x = gives y = and x = 4 gives y = . Thus, there are two tangents to the
given curve with slope and passing through the points ( , ) and (4, ). The equation
of tangent through ( , ) is given by
y = (x )
or y x =0
and the equation of the tangent through (4, ) is given by
y ( ) = (x 4)
or y x 10 = 0
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 09

x y
Example 17 Find points on the curve + = 1 at which the tangents are (i) parallel
4 5
to x axis (ii) parallel to y axis.
x y
Solution ifferentiating + = 1 with respect to x, we get
4 5
x y dy
+ =0
5 dx

dy - 5 x
or = 4 y
dx
(i) ow, the tangent is parallel to the x axis if the slope of the tangent is ero which
- 5x x y
gives = 0 . This is possible if x = 0. Then + = 1 for x = 0 gives
4 y 4 5
y = 5, i.e., y = 5.
Thus, the points at which the tangents are parallel to the x axis are (0, 5) and
(0, 5).
(ii) The tangent line is parallel to y axis if the slope of the normal is 0 which gives

4y x y
= 0 , i.e., y = 0. Therefore, + = 1 for y = 0 gives x = . Hence, the
5x 4 5
points at which the tangents are parallel to the y axis are ( , 0) and ( , 0).

x-
Example 18 Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y = at the
( x - )( x - )
point where it cuts the x axis.

Solution ote that on x axis, y = 0. So the equation of the curve, when y = 0, gives
x = . Thus, the curve cuts the x axis at ( , 0). ow differentiating the equation of the
curve with respect to x, we obtain
dy 1 - y ( x - 5)
= (Why )
dx ( x - )( x - )

dy ù 1- 0 1
or = =
dx úû ( ,0) (5)(4) 0
 10 MATHEMATICS

1
Therefore, the slope of the tangent at ( , 0) is . Hence, the equation of the
0
tangent at ( , 0) is
1
y-0= (x - ) or 0y - x + = 0
0

Example 19 Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the curve x + y =
at (1, 1).

Solution ifferentiating x + y = with respect to x, we get

-1 -1
dy
x + y =0
dx
1
dy æ yö
or = -ç ÷
dx èxø
dy ù
Therefore, the slope of the tangent at (1, 1) is = -1 .
dx úû (1, 1)
So the equation of the tangent at (1, 1) is
y 1 = 1 (x 1) or y x =0
Also, the slope of the normal at (1, 1) is given by
-1
=1
slope of the tangent at (1,1)
Therefore, the equation of the normal at (1, 1) is
y 1 = 1 (x 1) or y x=0
Example 20 Find the equation of tangent to the curve given by
x = a sin t , y = b cos t ... (1)
p
at a point where t = .

Solution ifferentiating (1) with respect to t, we get

dx dy
= a sin t cos t and = - b cos t sin t
dt dt
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 11

dy
dy dt - b cos t sin t -b cos t
or = = =
dx dx a sin t cos t a sin t
dt

p
Therefore, slope of the tangent at t = is

p
dy ù -b cos
=0
dx úût = p = p
a sin

p
Also, when t = , x = a and y = 0. Hence, the equation of tangent to the given

p
curve at t = , i.e., at (a, 0) is

y 0 = 0 (x a), i.e., y = 0.

EXERCISE 6.3
1. Find the slope of the tangent to the curve y = x4 4x at x = 4.
x -1
2. Find the slope of the tangent to the curve y = , x ¹ at x = 10.
x-
3. Find the slope of the tangent to curve y = x x 1 at the point whose
x-coordinate is .
4. Find the slope of the tangent to the curve y = x x at the point whose
x coordinate is .
p
5. Find the slope of the normal to the curve x = a cos q, y = a sin q at q = .
4
p
6. Find the slope of the normal to the curve x = 1 - a sin q, y = b cos q at q = .

7. Find points at which the tangent to the curve y = x x 9x is parallel to

the x axis.
8. Find a point on the curve y = (x ) at which the tangent is parallel to the chord
oining the points ( , 0) and (4, 4).
1 MATHEMATICS

9. Find the point on the curve y = x 11x 5 at which the tangent is y = x 11.
10. Find the equation of all lines having slope 1 that are tangents to the curve
1
y= , x ¹ 1.
x -1
11. Find the equation of all lines having slope which are tangents to the curve
1
y= ,x¹ .
x-
12. Find the equations of all lines having slope 0 which are tangent to the curve
1 .
y=
x - x+
x y
13. Find points on the curve + = 1 at which the tangents are
9 1
(i) parallel to x axis (ii) parallel to y axis.
14. Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the given curves at the indicated
points
(i) y = x4 x 1 x 10x 5 at (0, 5)
(ii) y = x4
x 1 x 10x 5 at (1, )
(iii) y = x at (1, 1)
(iv) y = x at (0, 0)
p
(v) x = cos t, y = sin t at t =
4
15. Find the equation of the tangent line to the curve y = x x which is
(a) parallel to the line x y 9 = 0
(b) perpendicular to the line 5y 15x = 1 .
16. Show that the tangents to the curve y = x 11 at the points where x = and
x= are parallel.
17. Find the points on the curve y = x at which the slope of the tangent is equal to
the y coordinate of the point.
18. For the curve y = 4x x5, find all the points at which the tangent passes
through the origin.
19. Find the points on the curve x y x = 0 at which the tangents are parallel
to the x axis.
20. Find the equation of the normal at the point (am ,am ) for the curve ay = x .
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 1

21. Find the equation of the normals to the curve y = x x which are parallel
to the line x 14y 4 = 0.
22. Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the parabola y = 4ax at the point
(at , at).
23. rove that the curves x = y and xy = k cut at right angles if k = 1.

x y
24. Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the hyperbola - = 1 at the
a b
!!!!!!!x0, y0).
25. Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y = x- which is parallel to the
line 4 x - y + 5 = 0 .
Choose the correct answer in Exercises and .
26. The slope of the normal to the curve y = x sin x at x = 0 is
1 1
(A) ( ) (C) ( ) -

27. The line y = x 1 is a tangent to the curve y = 4x at the point

(A) (1, ) ( ) ( , 1) (C) (1, ) ( ) ( 1, )
6.5 Approximations
In this section, we will use differentials to approximate values of certain quantities.
et f ® R, Ì R, be a given function
and let y = f (x). et Dx denote a small
increment in x. Recall that the increment in y
corresponding to the increment in x, denoted
by Dy, is given by Dy = f (x Dx) f (x). We
define the following
(i) The differential of x, denoted by dx, is
defined by dx = Dx.
(ii) The differential of y, denoted by dy,
is defined by dy = f¢(x) dx or
Fig 6.8
æ dy ö
dy = ç ÷ Dx.
è dx ø
Two curves intersect at right angle if the tangents to the curves at the point of intersection
are perpendicular to each other.
 14 MATHEMATICS

In case dx = Dx is relatively small when compared with x, dy is a good approximation

of Dy and we denote it by dy » Dy.
For geometrical meaning of Dx, Dy, dx and dy, one may refer to Fig . .

A Note In view of the above discussion and Fig . , we may note that the
differential of the dependent variable is not equal to the increment of the variable
where as the differential of independent variable is equal to the increment of the
variable.

Example 21 se differential to approximate . .

Solution Ta e y = x . et x = and let Dx = 0. . Then
Dy = x + Dx - x = . - = . -
or . = Dy
ow dy is approximately equal to Dy and is given by
æ dy ö 1 1
dy = ç ÷ Dx = (0. ) = (0. ) = 0.05 (as y = x )
è dx ø x

Thus, the approximate value of . is 0.05 = .05.

1
Example 22 se differential to approximate ( 5) .
1
Solution et y = x . et x = and let Dx = . Then
1 1 1 1 1
Dy = ( x + Dx ) - x = ( 5) - ( ) = ( 5) -
1
or ( 5) = Dy
ow dy is approximately equal to Dy and is given by
1
æ dy ö 1
dy = ç ÷ Dx = (- ) (as y = x )
è dx ø
x
1 -
= 1
(- ) = = - 0.0 4
(( ) )
1
Thus, the approximate value of ( 5) is given by
( 0. 0 4) = .9
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 15

Example 23 Find the approximate value of f ( .0 ), where f (x) = x 5x .

Solution et x = and Dx = 0.0 . Then
f ( . 0 ) = f (x Dx) = (x Dx) 5(x Dx)
ote that Dy = f (x Dx) f (x). Therefore
f (x Dx) = f (x) Dy
» f (x) f ¢(x) Dx (as dx = Dx)
or f ( .0 ) » ( x 5x ) ( x 5) Dx
= ( ( ) 5( ) ) ( ( ) 5) (0.0 ) (as x = , Dx = 0.0 )
= ( 15 ) (1 5) (0.0 )
= 45 0.4 = 45.4
Hence, approximate value of f ( .0 ) is 45.4 .
Example 24 Find the approximate change in the volume of a cube of side x meters
caused by increasing the side by .
Solution ote that
=x

æd ö
or d = ç ÷ Dx = ( x ) Dx
è dx ø
= ( x ) (0.0 x) = 0.0 x m (as of x is 0.0 x)
Thus, the approximate change in volume is 0.0 x m .
Example 25 If the radius of a sphere is measured as 9 cm with an error of 0.0 cm,
then find the approximate error in calculating its volume.
Solution et r be the radius of the sphere and Dr be the error in measuring the radius.
Then r = 9 cm and Dr = 0.0 cm. ow, the volume of the sphere is given by
4
= pr

d
or = 4pr
dr
æd ö
Therefore d = ç ÷ Dr = (4pr )Dr
è dr ø
= 4p(9) (0.0 ) = 9. p cm
Thus, the approximate error in calculating the volume is 9. p cm .
 1 MATHEMATICS

EXERCISE 6.4
1. sing differentials, find the approximate value of each of the following up to
places of decimal.
(i) 5. (ii) 49.5 (iii) 0.
1 1 1
(iv) (0.009) (v) (0.999) 10
(vi) (15) 4
1 1 1
(vii) ( ) (viii) ( 55) 4 (ix) ( )4

1 1 1
(x) (401) (xi) (0.00 ) (xii) ( .5 )

1 1
(xiii) ( 1.5) 4 (xiv) ( .9 ) (xv) ( .15) 5
2. Find the approximate value of f ( .01), where f (x) = 4x 5x .
3. Find the approximate value of f (5.001), where f (x) = x x 15.
4. Find the approximate change in the volume of a cube of side x metres caused
by increasing the side by 1 .
5. Find the approximate change in the surface area of a cube of side x metres
caused by decreasing the side by 1 .
6. If the radius of a sphere is measured as m with an error of 0.0 m, then find the
approximate error in calculating its volume.
7. If the radius of a sphere is measured as 9 m with an error of 0.0 m, then find the
approximate error in calculating its surface area.
8. If f(x) = x 15x 5, then the approximate value of f ( .0 ) is
(A) 4 . ( ) 5 . (C) . ( ) .
9. The approximate change in the volume of a cube of side x metres caused by
increasing the side by is
(A) 0.0 x m ( ) 0. x m (C) 0.09 x m ( ) 0.9 x m

6.6 Maxima and Minima

In this section, we will use the concept of derivatives to calculate the maximum or
minimum values of various functions. In fact, we will find the turning points of the
graph of a function and thus find points at which the graph reaches its highest (or
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 1

lowest) locally. The nowledge of such points is very useful in s etching the graph of
a given function. Further, we will also find the absolute maximum and absolute minimum
of a function that are necessary for the solution of many applied problems.
et us consider the following problems that arise in day to day life.
(i) The profit from a grove of orange trees is given by (x) = ax bx , where a,b
are constants and x is the number of orange trees per acre. How many trees per
acre will maximise the profit
(ii) A ball, thrown into the air from a building 0 metres high, travels along a path
x
given by h ( x) = 0 + x - , where x is the hori ontal distance from the building
0
and h(x) is the height of the ball . What is the maximum height the ball will
reach
(iii) An Apache helicopter of enemy is flying along the path given by the curve
f (x) = x . A soldier, placed at the point (1, ), wants to shoot the helicopter
when it is nearest to him. What is the nearest distance
In each of the above problem, there is something common, i.e., we wish to find out
the maximum or minimum values of the given functions. In order to tac le such problems,
we first formally define maximum or minimum values of a function, points of local
maxima and minima and test for determining such points.
Definition 3 et f be a function defined on an interval I. Then
(a) f is said to have a maximum value in I, if there exists a point c in I such that
f (c ) > f ( x ) , for all x Î I.
The number f (c) is called the maximum value of f in I and the point c is called a
point of maximum value of f in I.
(b) f is said to have a minimum value in I, if there exists a point c in I such that
f (c) < f (x), for all x Î I.
The number f (c), in this case, is called the minimum value of f in I and the point
c, in this case, is called a point of minimum value of f in I.
(c) f is said to have an extreme value in I if there exists a point c in I such that
f (c) is either a maximum value or a minimum value of f in I.
The number f (c), in this case, is called an extreme value of f in I and the point c
is called an extreme point.
Remark In Fig .9(a), (b) and (c), we have exhibited that graphs of certain particular
functions help us to find maximum value and minimum value at a point. Infact, through
graphs, we can even find maximum minimum value of a function at a point at which it
is not even differentiable (Example ).
 1 MATHEMATICS

Fig 6.9
Example 26 Find the maximum and the minimum values,
if any, of the function f given by
f (x) = x , x Î R.
Solution From the graph of the given function (Fig .10),
we have f (x) = 0 if x = 0. Also
f (x) ³ 0, for all x Î R.
Therefore, the minimum value of f is 0 and the point
of minimum value of f is x = 0. Further, it may be observed
from the graph of the function that f has no maximum
value and hence no point of maximum value of f in R.
Fig 6.10
A Note If we restrict the domain of f to , 1 only,
then f will have maximum value( ) = 4 at x = .

Example 27 Find the maximum and minimum values

of f , if any, of the function given by f (x) = x , x Î R.
Solution From the graph of the given function
(Fig .11) , note that
f (x) ³ 0, for all x Î R and f (x) = 0 if x = 0.
Therefore, the function f has a minimum value 0
and the point of minimum value of f is x = 0. Also, the
graph clearly shows that f has no maximum value in
R and hence no point of maximum value in R.
Fig 6.11

A Note
(i) If we restrict the domain of f to , 1 only, then f will have maximum value
= .
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 19

(ii) ne may note that the function f in Example is not differentiable at

x = 0.
Example 28 Find the maximum and the minimum values, if any, of the function
given by
f (x) = x, x Î (0, 1).
Solution The given function is an increasing (strictly) function in the given interval
(0, 1). From the graph (Fig .1 ) of the function f , it
seems that, it should have the minimum value at a
point closest to 0 on its right and the maximum value
at a point closest to 1 on its left. Are such points
available f course, not. It is not possible to locate
such points. Infact, if a point x0 is closest to 0, then
x0
we find < x0 for all x0 Î (0,1) . Also, if x1 is

x1 + 1
closest to 1, then > x1 for all x1 Î (0,1) .
Fig 6.12
Therefore, the given function has neither the maximum value nor the minimum
value in the interval (0,1).
Remark The reader may observe that in Example , if we include the points 0 and 1
in the domain of f , i.e., if we extend the domain of f to 0,1 , then the function f has
minimum value 0 at x = 0 and maximum value 1 at x = 1. Infact, we have the following
results (The proof of these results are beyond the scope of the present text)
Every monotonic function assumes its maximum/minimum value at the end
points of the domain of definition of the function.
A more general result is
Every continuous function on a closed interval has a maximum and a minimum
value.

A Note y a monotonic function f

increasing in I or decreasing in I.
in an interval I, we mean that f is either

Maximum and minimum values of a function defined on a closed interval will be

discussed later in this section.
et us now examine the graph of a function as shown in Fig .1 . bserve that at
points A, , C and on the graph, the function changes its nature from decreasing to
increasing or vice versa. These points may be called turning points of the given
function. Further, observe that at turning points, the graph has either a little hill or a little
valley. Roughly spea ing, the function has minimum value in some neighbourhood
(interval) of each of the points A and C which are at the bottom of their respective
 0 MATHEMATICS

Fig 6.13
valleys. Similarly, the function has maximum value in some neighbourhood of points
and which are at the top of their respective hills. For this reason, the points A and C
may be regarded as points of local minimum value (or relative minimum value) and
points and may be regarded as points of local maximum value (or relative maximum
value) for the function. The local maximum value and local minimum value of the
function are referred to as local maxima and local minima, respectively, of the function.
We now formally give the following definition
Definition 4 et f be a real valued function and let c be an interior point in the domain
of f. Then
(a) c is called a point of local maxima if there is an h 0 such that
f (c) > f (x), for all x in (c h, c h)
The value f (c) is called the local maximum value of f.
(b) c is called a point of local minima if there is an h 0 such that
f (c) < f (x), for all x in (c h, c h)
The value f (c) is called the local minimum value of f .
eometrically, the above definition states that if x = c is a point of local maxima of f,
then the graph of f around c will be as shown in Fig .14(a). ote that the function f is
increasing (i.e., f ¢(x) 0) in the interval (c h, c) and decreasing (i.e., f ¢(x) 0) in the
interval (c, c h).
This suggests that f ¢(c) must be ero.

Fig 6.14
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 1

Similarly, if c is a point of local minima of f , then the graph of f around c will be as

shown in Fig .14(b). Here f is decreasing (i.e., f ¢(x) 0) in the interval (c h, c) and
increasing (i.e., f ¢(x) 0) in the interval (c, c h). This again suggest that f ¢(c) must
be ero.
The above discussion lead us to the following theorem (without proof).
Theorem 2 et f be a function defined on an open interval I. Suppose c Î I be any
point. If f has a local maxima or a local minima at x = c, then either f ¢(c) = 0 or f is not
differentiable at c.

Remark The converse of above theorem need

not be true, that is, a point at which the derivative
vanishes need not be a point of local maxima or
local minima. For example, if f (x) = x , then f ¢(x)
= x and so f ¢(0) = 0. ut 0 is neither a point of
local maxima nor a point of local minima (Fig .15).

A Note A point c in the domain of a function

f at which either f ¢(c) = 0 or f is not differentiable
is called a critical point of f. ote that if f is
continuous at c and f ¢(c) = 0, then there exists
an h 0 such that f is differentiable in the interval Fig 6.15
(c h, c h).
We shall now give a wor ing rule for finding points of local maxima or points of
local minima using only the first order derivatives.
Theorem 3 (First Derivative Test) et f be a function defined on an open interval I.
et f be continuous at a critical point c in I. Then
(i) If f ¢(x) changes sign from positive to negative as x increases through c, i.e., if
f ¢(x) 0 at every point sufficiently close to and to the left of c, and f ¢(x) 0 at
every point sufficiently close to and to the right of c, then c is a point of local
maxima.
(ii) If f ¢(x) changes sign from negative to positive as x increases through c, i.e., if
f ¢(x) 0 at every point sufficiently close to and to the left of c, and f ¢(x) 0 at
every point sufficiently close to and to the right of c, then c is a point of local
minima.
(iii) If f ¢(x) does not change sign as x increases through c, then c is neither a point of
local maxima nor a point of local minima. Infact, such a point is called point of
inflection (Fig .15).
 MATHEMATICS

A Note If c is a point of local maxima of f , then f (c) is a local maximum value of

f. Similarly, if c is a point of local minima of f , then f(c) is a local minimum value of f.
Figures .15 and .1 , geometrically explain Theorem .

Fig 6.16
Example 29 Find all points of local maxima and local minima of the function f
given by
f (x) = x x .
Solution We have
f (x) = x x
or f ¢(x) = x = (x 1) (x 1)
or f ¢(x) = 0 at x = 1 and x = 1
Thus, x = 1 are the only critical points which could possibly be the points of local
maxima and or local minima of f . et us first examine the point x = 1.
ote that for values close to 1 and to the right of 1, f ¢(x) 0 and for values close
to 1 and to the left of 1, f ¢(x) 0. Therefore, by first derivative test, x = 1 is a point
of local minima and local minimum value is f (1) = 1. In the case of x = 1, note that
f ¢(x) 0, for values close to and to the left of 1 and f ¢(x) 0, for values close to and
to the right of 1. Therefore, by first derivative test, x = 1 is a point of local maxima
and local maximum value is f ( 1) = 5.
Values of x Sign of f ¢(x) = 3(x – 1) (x + 1)
to the right (say 1.1 etc.) 0
Close to 1
to the left (say 0.9 etc.) 0
to the right (say - 0.9 etc.) <0
Close to 1 to the left (say - 1.1 etc.) >0
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES

Example 30 Find all the points of local maxima and local minima of the function f
given by
f (x) = x x x 5.
Solution We have
f (x) = x x x 5
or f ¢(x) = x 1 x = (x 1)
or f ¢(x) = 0 at x = 1
Thus, x = 1 is the only critical point of f . We shall now examine this point for local
maxima and or local minima of f. bserve that f ¢(x) ³ 0, for all x Î R and in particular
f ¢(x) 0, for values close to 1 and to the left and to the right of 1. Therefore, by first
derivative test, the point x = 1 is neither a point of local maxima nor a point of local
minima. Hence x = 1 is a point of inflexion.
Remark ne may note that since f ¢(x), in Example 0, never changes its sign on R,
graph of f has no turning points and hence no point of local maxima or local minima.
We shall now give another test to examine local maxima and local minima of a
given function. This test is often easier to apply than the first derivative test.
Theorem 4 (Second Derivative Test) et f be a function defined on an interval I
and c Î I. et f be twice differentiable at c. Then
(i) x = c is a point of local maxima if f ¢(c) = 0 and f ²(c) 0
The value f (c) is local maximum value of f .
(ii) x = c is a point of local minima if f ¢ (c) = 0 and f ²(c) 0
In this case, f (c) is local minimum value of f .
(iii) The test fails if f ¢(c) = 0 and f ²(c) = 0.
In this case, we go bac to the first derivative test and find whether c is a point of
local maxima, local minima or a point of inflexion.

ANote As f is twice differentiable at c, we mean

second order derivative of f exists at c.
Example 31 Find local minimum value of the function f
given by f (x) = x , x Î R.
Solution ote that the given function is not differentiable
at x = 0. So, second derivative test fails. et us try first
derivative test. ote that 0 is a critical point of f . ow
to the left of 0, f (x) = x and so f ¢(x) = 1 0. Also Fig 6.17
 4 MATHEMATICS

to the right of 0, f (x) = x and so f ¢(x) = 1 0. Therefore, by first derivative test,

x = 0 is a point of local minima of f and local minimum value of f is f (0) = .

Example 32 Find local maximum and local minimum values of the function f given by
f (x) = x4 4x 1 x 1
Solution We have
f (x) = x4 4x 1 x 1
or f ¢(x) =1 x 1 x 4x = 1 x (x 1) (x )
or f ¢(x) = 0 at x = 0, x = 1 and x = .
ow f ²(x) = x 4x 4=1 ( x x 1)
ì f ¢¢ (0) = -1 < 0
ï
or í f ¢¢ (1) = 4 > 0
ï f ¢¢ ( - ) = 4 > 0
î
Therefore, by second derivative test, x = 0 is a point of local maxima and local
maximum value of f at x = 0 is f (0) = 1 while x = 1 and x = are the points of local
minima and local minimum values of f at x = 1 and are f (1) = and f ( ) = 0,
respectively.
Example 33 Find all the points of local maxima and local minima of the function f
given by
f (x) = x x x 5.
Solution We have
f (x) = x x x 5
ìï f ¢( x) = x - 1 x + = ( x - 1)
or í
ïî f ¢¢( x) = 1 ( x - 1)
ow f ¢(x) = 0 gives x =1. Also f ²(1) = 0. Therefore, the second derivative test
fails in this case. So, we shall go bac to the first derivative test.
We have already seen (Example 0) that, using first derivative test, x =1 is neither
a point of local maxima nor a point of local minima and so it is a point of inflexion.
Example 34 Find two positive numbers whose sum is 15 and the sum of whose
squares is minimum.
Solution et one of the numbers be x. Then the other number is (15 x). et S(x)
denote the sum of the squares of these numbers. Then
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 5

S(x) = x (15 x) = x 0x 5
ìS¢( x) = 4 x - 0
or í
îS¢¢( x) = 4

15 æ 15 ö
ow S¢(x) = 0 gives x = . Also S¢¢ ç ÷ = 4 > 0 . Therefore, by second derivative
è ø
15
test, x = is the point of local minima of S. Hence the sum of squares of numbers is

15 15 15
minimum when the numbers are and 15 - = .

Remark roceeding as in Example 4 one may prove that the two positive numbers,
k k
whose sum is k and the sum of whose squares is minimum, are and .

Example 35 Find the shortest distance of the point (0, c) from the parabola y = x ,
where 0 £ c £ 5.
Solution et (h, k) be any point on the parabola y = x . et be the required distance
between (h, k) and (0, c). Then

= ( h - 0) + (k - c ) = h + (k - c) ... (1)
Since (h, k) lies on the parabola y = x , we have k = h . So (1) gives

º (k) = k + (k - c)

1 + (k - c)
or ¢(k) =
k + (k - c)

c -1
ow ¢(k) = 0 gives k =

c -1
bserve that when k < , then ( k - c ) + 1 < 0 , i.e., ¢( k ) < 0 . Also when

c -1 c -1
k> , then ¢( k ) > 0 . So, by first derivative test, (k) is minimum at k = .
Hence, the required shortest distance is given by
 MATHEMATICS

æ c -1ö c -1 æ c -1 ö 4c - 1
ç ÷= +ç - c÷ =
è ø è ø

A Note The reader may note that in Example 5, we have used first derivative
test instead of the second derivative test as the former is easy and short.

Example 36 et A and be two vertical poles at

points A and , respectively. If A = 1 m, = m
and A = 0 m, then find the distance of a point R on
A from the point A such that R R is minimum.

Solution et R be a point on A such that AR = x m.

Then R = ( 0 x) m (as A = 0 m). From Fig .1 ,
we have
R = AR A
Fig 6.18
and R =R 2

Therefore R R = AR A R
= x (1 ) ( 0 x) ( )
= x 40x 1140
et S º S(x) = R R = x 40x 1140.
Therefore S¢(x) = 4x 40.
ow S¢(x) = 0 gives x = 10. Also S²(x) = 4 0, for all x and so S²(10) 0.
Therefore, by second derivative test, x = 10 is the point of local minima of S. Thus, the
distance of R from A on A is AR = x =10 m.
Example 37 If length of three sides of a trape ium other than base are equal to 10cm,
then find the area of the trape ium when it is maximum.
Solution The required trape ium is as given in Fig .19. raw perpendiculars and

Fig 6.19
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES

C on A . et A = x cm. ote that DA D C. Therefore, = x cm. Also, by

ythagoras theorem, = C = 100 - x . et A be the area of the trape ium. Then
1
A º A(x) = (sum of parallel sides) (height)

1
= ( x + 10 + 10) 100 - x

= ( x + 10) 100 - x
( - x)
or A¢(x) = ( x + 10) + 100 - x
100 - x
- x - 10 x + 100
=
100 - x
ow A¢(x) = 0 gives x 10x 100 = 0, i.e., x = 5 and x = 10.
Since x represents distance, it can not be negative.
So, x = 5. ow
(- x)
100 - x (-4 x - 10) - (- x - 10 x + 100)
100 - x
A²(x) =
100 - x

x - 00 x - 1000
= (on simplification)
(100 - x )

(5) - 00(5) - 1000 - 50 - 0

or A²(5) = = = <0
5 5 5
(100 - (5) )
Thus, area of trape ium is maximum at x = 5 and the area is given by
A (5) = (5 + 10) 100 - (5) = 15 5= 5 cm

Example 38 rove that the radius of the right circular cylinder of greatest curved
surface area which can be inscribed in a given cone is half of that of the cone.
Solution et C = r be the radius of the cone and A = h be its height. et a cylinder
with radius E = x inscribed in the given cone (Fig . 0). The height E of the cylinder
is given by
 MATHEMATICS

E EC
= (since D EC DA C)
A C
E r-x
or =
h r
h (r - x )
or E=
r
et S be the curved surface area of the given
cylinder. Then
px h ( r - x) ph
S º S (x) = = (rx - x )
r r Fig 6.20

ì ¢ ph
ïïS ( x) = r ( r - x)
or í
ïS¢¢( x ) = - 4ph
ïî r

r ærö r
ow S¢(x) = 0 gives x = . Since S²(x)0 for all x, S¢¢ ç ÷ < 0 . So x = is a
è ø
point of maxima of S. Hence, the radius of the cylinder of greatest curved surface area
which can be inscribed in a given cone is half of that of the cone.
6.6.1 Maximum and Minimum Values of a Function in a Closed Interval
et us consider a function f given by
f (x) = x , x Î (0, 1)
bserve that the function is continuous on (0, 1) and neither has a maximum value
nor has a minimum value. Further, we may note that the function even has neither a
local maximum value nor a local minimum value.
However, if we extend the domain of f to the closed interval 0, 1 , then f still may
not have a local maximum (minimum) values but it certainly does have maximum value
= f (1) and minimum value = f (0). The maximum value of f at x = 1 is called
absolute maximum value (global maximum or greatest value) of f on the interval
0, 1 . Similarly, the minimum value of f at x = 0 is called the absolute minimum
value (global minimum or least value) of f on 0, 1 .
Consider the graph given in Fig . 1 of a continuous function defined on a closed
interval a, d . bserve that the function f has a local minima at x = b and local
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 9

Fig 6.21
minimum value is f (b). The function also has a local maxima at x = c and local maximum
value is f (c).
Also from the graph, it is evident that f has absolute maximum value f (a) and
absolute minimum value f (d). Further note that the absolute maximum (minimum)
value of f is different from local maximum (minimum) value of f .
We will now state two results (without proof) regarding absolute maximum and
absolute minimum values of a function on a closed interval I.
Theorem 5 et f be a continuous function on an interval I = a, b . Then f has the
absolute maximum value and f attains it at least once in I. Also, f has the absolute
minimum value and attains it at least once in I.
Theorem 6 et f be a differentiable function on a closed interval I and let c be any
interior point of I. Then
(i) f ¢(c) = 0 if f attains its absolute maximum value at c.
(ii) f ¢(c) = 0 if f attains its absolute minimum value at c.
In view of the above results, we have the following wor ing rule for finding absolute
maximum and or absolute minimum values of a function in a given closed interval
a, b .
Working Rule
Step 1 Find all critical points of f in the interval, i.e., find points x where either
f ¢ ( x ) = 0 or f is not differentiable.
Step 2 Ta e the end points of the interval.
Step 3 At all these points (listed in Step 1 and ), calculate the values of f .
Step 4 Identify the maximum and minimum values of f out of the values calculated in
Step . This maximum value will be the absolute maximum (greatest) value of
f and the minimum value will be the absolute minimum (least) value of f .
 0 MATHEMATICS

Example 39 Find the absolute maximum and minimum values of a function f given by
f (x) = x 15x x 1 on the interval 1, 5 .
Solution We have
f (x) = x 15x x 1
or f ¢(x) = x 0x = (x ) (x )
ote that f ¢(x) = 0 gives x = and x = .
We shall now evaluate the value of f at these points and at the end points of the
interval 1, 5 , i.e., at x = 1, x = , x = and at x = 5. So
f (1) = (1 ) 15 (1 ) (1) 1 = 4
f ( ) = ( ) 15 ( ) ( ) 1= 9
f ( ) = ( ) 15 ( ) ( ) 1=
f (5) = (5 ) 15 (5 ) (5) 1 = 5
Thus, we conclude that absolute maximum value of f on 1, 5 is 5 , occurring at
x =5, and absolute minimum value of f on 1, 5 is 4 which occurs at x = 1.
Example 40 Find absolute maximum and minimum values of a function f given by
4 1
f ( x ) = 1 x - x , x Î -1, 1
Solution We have
4 1
f (x) = 1 x - x
1
( x - 1)
or f ¢(x) = 1 x - =
x x
1
Thus, f ¢(x) = 0 gives x = . Further note that f ¢(x) is not defined at x = 0. So the

1
critical points are x = 0 and x = . ow evaluating the value of f at critical points

1
x = 0, and at end points of the interval x = 1 and x = 1, we have

4 1
f ( 1) = 1 ( -1) - (-1) = 1
f (0) = 1 (0) (0) = 0
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 1

4 1
æ 1ö
f ç ÷ = 1 æç 1 ö÷ - æç 1 ö÷ = - 9
è ø è ø è ø 4
4 1
f (1) = 1 (1) - (1) =
Hence, we conclude that absolute maximum value of f is 1 that occurs at x = 1
-9 1
and absolute minimum value of f is that occurs at x = .
4
Example 41 An Apache helicopter of enemy is flying along the curve given by
y=x . A soldier, placed at ( , ), wants to shoot down the helicopter when it is
nearest to him. Find the nearest distance.
Solution For each value of x, the helicopter s position is at point (x, x ).
Therefore, the distance between the helicopter and the soldier placed at ( , ) is

( x - ) + ( x + - ) , i.e., ( x - ) + x4 .
et f (x) = (x ) x4
or f ¢(x) = (x ) 4x = (x 1) ( x x )
Thus, f ¢(x) = 0 gives x = 1 or x x = 0 for which there are no real roots.
Also, there are no end points of the interval to be added to the set for which f ¢ is ero,
i.e., there is only one point, namely, x = 1. The value of f at this point is given by
f (1) = (1 ) (1)4 = 5. Thus, the distance between the solider and the helicopter is
f (1) = 5 .
ote that 5 is either a maximum value or a minimum value. Since
f (0) = (0 - ) + (0) 4 = > 5 ,

it follows that 5 is the minimum value of f ( x ) . Hence, 5 is the minimum

distance between the soldier and the helicopter.

EXERCISE 6.5
1. Find the maximum and minimum values, if any, of the following functions
given by
(i) f (x) = ( x 1) (ii) f (x) = 9x 1 x
(iii) f (x) = (x 1) 10 (iv) g (x) = x 1
 MATHEMATICS

2. Find the maximum and minimum values, if any, of the following functions
given by
(i) f (x) = x 1 (ii) g (x) = x 1
(iii) h (x) = sin ( x) 5 (iv) f (x) = sin 4x
(v) h (x) = x 1, x Î ( 1, 1)
3. Find the local maxima and local minima, if any, of the following functions. Find
also the local maximum and the local minimum values, as the case may be
(i) f (x) = x (ii) g (x) = x x
p
(iii) h (x) = sin x cos x, 0 < x <

(iv) f (x) = sin x cos x, 0 < x < p

x
(v) f (x) = x x 9x 15 (vi) g ( x ) = + , x>0
x
1
(vii) g ( x) = (viii) f ( x) = x 1 - x , 0 < x < 1
x +
4. rove that the following functions do not have maxima or minima
(i) f (x) = ex (ii) g (x) = log x
(iii) h (x) = x x x 1
5. Find the absolute maximum value and the absolute minimum value of the following
functions in the given intervals
(i) f (x) = x , x Î , (ii) f (x) = sin x cos x , x Î 0, p

1 é 9ù
(iii) f (x) = 4 x - x , x Î ê - , ú (iv) f ( x) = ( x - 1) + , x Î - ,1
ë û
6. Find the maximum profit that a company can ma e, if the profit function is
given by
p (x) = 41 x 1 x
7. Find both the maximum value and the minimum value of
x4 x 1 x 4 x 5 on the interval 0, .
8. At what points in the interval 0, p , does the function sin x attain its maximum
value
9. What is the maximum value of the function sin x cos x
10. Find the maximum value of x 4x 10 in the interval 1, . Find the
maximum value of the same function in , 1.
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES

11. It is given that at x = 1, the function x4 x ax 9 attains its maximum value,

on the interval 0, . Find the value of a.
12. Find the maximum and minimum values of x sin x on 0, p .
13. Find two numbers whose sum is 4 and whose product is as large as possible.
14. Find two positive numbers x and y such that x y = 0 and xy is maximum.
15. Find two positive numbers x and y such that their sum is 5 and the product x y5
is a maximum.
16. Find two positive numbers whose sum is 1 and the sum of whose cubes is
minimum.
17. A square piece of tin of side 1 cm is to be made into a box without top, by
cutting a square from each corner and folding up the flaps to form the box. What
should be the side of the square to be cut off so that the volume of the box is the
maximum possible.
18. A rectangular sheet of tin 45 cm by 4 cm is to be made into a box without top,
by cutting off square from each corner and folding up the flaps. What should be
the side of the square to be cut off so that the volume of the box is maximum
19. Show that of all the rectangles inscribed in a given fixed circle, the square has
the maximum area.
20. Show that the right circular cylinder of given surface and maximum volume is
such that its height is equal to the diameter of the base.
21. f all the closed cylindrical cans (right circular), of a given volume of 100 cubic
centimetres, find the dimensions of the can which has the minimum surface
area
22. A wire of length m is to be cut into two pieces. ne of the pieces is to be
made into a square and the other into a circle. What should be the length of the
two pieces so that the combined area of the square and the circle is minimum
23. rove that the volume of the largest cone that can be inscribed in a sphere of

radius R is of the volume of the sphere.

24. Show that the right circular cone of least curved surface and given volume has
an altitude equal to time the radius of the base.
25. Show that the semi vertical angle of the cone of the maximum volume and of
given slant height is tan -1 .
26. Show that semi vertical angle of right circular cone of given surface area and
æ 1ö
maximum volume is sin -1 ç ÷ .
è ø
 4 MATHEMATICS

Choose the correct answer in the Exercises and 9.

27. The point on the curve x = y which is nearest to the point (0, 5) is
(A) ( ,4) ( ) ( ,0) (C) (0, 0) ( ) ( , )

1- x + x
28. For all real values of x, the minimum value of is
1+ x + x
1
(A) 0 ( ) 1 (C) ( )

1
29. The maximum value of x( x - 1) + 1 , 0 £ x £ 1 is
1
æ 1ö 1
(A) ç ÷ ( ) (C) 1 ( ) 0
è ø

Miscellaneous Examples

Example 42 A car starts from a point at time t = 0 seconds and stops at point . The
distance x, in metres, covered by it, in t seconds is given by
æ tö
x=t ç - ÷
è ø

Find the time ta en by it to reach and also find distance between and .

Solution et v be the velocity of the car at t seconds.

æ tö
ow x= t ç - ÷
è ø
dx
Therefore v= = 4t t = t (4 t)
dt
Thus, v = 0 gives t = 0 and or t = 4.
ow v = 0 at as well as at and at , t = 0. So, at , t = 4. Thus, the car will
reach the point after 4 seconds. Also the distance travelled in 4 seconds is given by
æ 4ö æ ö
x = 4 ç - ÷ =1 ç ÷ = m
t=4
è ø è ø
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 5

Example 43 A water tan has the shape of an inverted right circular cone with its axis
vertical and vertex lowermost. Its semi vertical angle is tan 1 (0.5). Water is poured
into it at a constant rate of 5 cubic metre per hour. Find the rate at which the level of
the water is rising at the instant when the depth of water in the tan is 4 m.
r
Solution et r, h and a be as in Fig . . Then tan a = .
h

-1 æ r ö
So a = tan ç ÷ .
èhø
ut a = tan 1 (0.5) (given)
r
or = 0.5
h
h
or r=
et be the volume of the cone. Then
Fig 6.22
1 1 æhö ph
= pr h = p ç ÷ h =
è ø 1

d d æ ph ö dh
Therefore = ç ÷× (by Chain Rule)
dt dh è 1 ø dt

p dh
= h
4 dt
d
ow rate of change of volume, i.e., = 5 m h and h = 4 m.
dt
p dh
Therefore 5= (4) ×
4 dt
dh 5 5 æ ö
or = = mh çp = ÷
dt 4p è ø
5
Thus, the rate of change of water level is mh.

Example 44 A man of height metres wal s at a uniform speed of 5 m h away from

a lamp post which is metres high. Find the rate at which the length of his shadow
increases.
 MATHEMATICS

Solution In Fig . , et A be the lamp post, the

lamp being at the position and let M be the man
at a particular time t and let AM = l metres. Then,
MS is the shadow of the man. et MS = s metres.

ote that DMS DAS

MS M
or =
AS A
Fig 6.23
or AS = s (as M = and A = (given))
Thus AM = s s = s. ut AM = l
So l= s
dl ds
Therefore =
dt dt
dl 5
Since = 5 m h. Hence, the length of the shadow increases at the rate m h.
dt
Example 45 Find the equation of the normal to the curve x = 4y which passes through
the point (1, ).
Solution ifferentiating x = 4y with respect to x, we get
dy x
=
dx
et (h, k) be the coordinates of the point of contact of the normal to the curve
x = 4y. ow, slope of the tangent at (h, k) is given by
dy ù h
dx úû ( h, k ) =

-
Hence, slope of the normal at (h, k) =
h
Therefore, the equation of normal at (h, k) is
-
y k= ( x - h) ... (1)
h
Since it passes through the point (1, ), we have
-
-k = (1 - h) or k = + (1 - h) ... ( )
h h
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES

Since (h, k) lies on the curve x = 4y, we have

h = 4k ... ( )
From ( ) and ( ), we have h = and k = 1. Substituting the values of h and k in (1),
we get the required equation of normal as
-
y -1 = ( x - ) or x y =

Example 46 Find the equation of tangents to the curve

y = cos (x y), p£x£ p
that are parallel to the line x y = 0.
Solution ifferentiating y = cos(x y) with respect to x, we have

dy - sin ( x + y )
=
dx 1 + sin ( x + y )

- sin ( x + y )
or slope of tangent at (x, y) =
1 + sin ( x + y )
Since the tangents to the given curve are parallel to the line x y = 0, whose slope
-1
is , we have

- sin( x + y) -1
1 + sin( x + y ) =
or sin (x y) = 1
p,
or x y = np ( 1)n nÎZ

æ n p ö,
Then y = cos(x y) = cos ç np + ( -1) ÷ nÎZ
è ø
= 0, for all n Î Z
- p p
Also, since - p £ x £ p , we get x = and x = . Thus, tangents to the

æ- p ö æp ö
given curve are parallel to the line x y = 0 only at points ç ,0 ÷ and ç ,0÷ .
è ø è ø
Therefore, the required equation of tangents are
 MATHEMATICS

-1 æ pö
y 0= çx+ ÷ or x + 4y + p = 0
è ø
-1 æ pö
and y çx- ÷
0= or x + 4y - p = 0
è ø
Example 47 Find intervals in which the function given by
4
f (x) = x 4 - x - x + x + 11
10 5 5
is (a) strictly increasing (b) strictly decreasing.
Solution We have
4
f (x) = x 4 - x - x + x + 11
10 5 5
4
Therefore f ¢(x) = (4 x ) - ( x ) - ( x ) +
10 5 5

= ( x - 1)( x + )( x - ) (on simplification)

5
ow f ¢(x) = 0 gives x = 1, x = , or x = . The
points x = 1, , and divide the real line into four
dis oint intervals namely, ( ¥, ), ( , 1), (1, ) Fig 6.24
and ( , ¥) (Fig . 4).
Consider the interval ( ¥, ), i.e., when ¥ x .
In this case, we have x 1 0, x 0 and x 0.
(In particular, observe that for x = , f ¢(x) = (x 1) (x ) (x ) = ( 4) ( 1)
( ) 0)
Therefore, f ¢(x) 0 when ¥ x .
Thus, the function f is strictly decreasing in ( ¥, ).
Consider the interval ( , 1), i.e., when x 1.
In this case, we have x 1 0, x 0 and x 0
(In particular, observe that for x = 0, f ¢(x) = (x 1) (x ) (x ) = ( 1) ( ) ( )
= 0)
So f ¢(x) 0 when x 1.
Thus, f is strictly increasing in ( , 1).
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 9

ow consider the interval (1, ), i.e., when 1 x . In this case, we have

x 1 0, x 0 and x 0.
So, f ¢(x) 0 when 1 x .
Thus, f is strictly decreasing in (1, ).
Finally, consider the interval ( , ¥), i.e., when x . In this case, we have x 1 0,
x 0 and x 0. So f ¢(x) 0 when x .
Thus, f is strictly increasing in the interval ( , ¥).
Example 48 Show that the function f given by
f (x) = tan 1(sin x cos x), x 0
p
is always an strictly increasing function in æç 0, ö÷ .
è 4ø
Solution We have
f (x) = tan 1(sin x cos x), x 0
1
Therefore f ¢(x) = (cos x - sin x)
1 + (sin x + cos x )

cos x - sin x
= (on simplification)
+ sin x

æ pö
ote that sin x 0 for all x in çè 0, ÷ø .
4
Therefore f ¢(x) 0 if cos x sin x 0
or f ¢(x) 0 if cos x sin x or cot x 1
p
ow cot x 1 if tan x 1, i.e., if 0 < x <
4
æ pö
Thus f ¢(x) 0 in ç 0, ÷
è 4ø

æ pö
Hence f is strictly increasing function in ç 0, ÷ .
è 4ø
Example 49 A circular disc of radius cm is being heated. ue to expansion, its
radius increases at the rate of 0.05 cm s. Find the rate at which its area is increasing
when radius is . cm.
 40 MATHEMATICS

Solution et r be the radius of the given disc and A be its area. Then
A = pr
dA dr
or = pr (by Chain Rule)
dt dt
dr
ow approximate rate of increase of radius = dr = Dt = 0.05 cm s.
dt
Therefore, the approximate rate of increase in area is given by

dA æ dr ö
dA = ( Dt ) = pr ç Dt ÷
dt è dt ø
= p ( . ) (0.05) = 0. 0p cm s (r = . cm)
Example 50 An open topped box is to be constructed by removing equal squares from
each corner of a metre by metre rectangular sheet of aluminium and folding up the
sides. Find the volume of the largest such box.
Solution et x metre be the length of a side of the removed squares. Then, the height
of the box is x, length is x and breadth is x (Fig . 5). If (x) is the volume
of the box, then

Fig 6.25

(x) = x ( x) ( x)
= 4x x 4x
ìï ¢( x) = 1 x - 44 x + 4 = 4( x - )( x - )
Therefore í
ïî ¢¢( x) = 4 x - 44

ow ¢(x) = 0 gives x = , . ut x ¹ (Why )

Thus, we have x = . ow ¢¢ æç ö÷ = 4 æç ö÷ - 44 = - < 0.

è ø è ø
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 41

Therefore, x = is the point of maxima, i.e., if we remove a square of side

metre from each corner of the sheet and ma e a box from the remaining sheet, then
the volume of the box such obtained will be the largest and it is given by
æ ö æ ö æ ö æ ö
ç ÷ = 4ç ÷ - ç ÷ + 4ç ÷
è ø è ø è ø è ø
00
= m

æ x ö
Example 51 Manufacturer can sell x items at a price of rupees ç 5 - ÷ each. The
è 100 ø

æx ö
cost price of x items is Rs ç + 500÷ . Find the number of items he should sell to earn
è5 ø
maximum profit.
Solution et S(x) be the selling price of x items and let C (x) be the cost price of x
items. Then, we have
æ x ö x
S (x) = ç 5 - ÷ x = 5x -
è 100 ø 100
x
and C (x) = + 500
5
Thus, the profit function (x) is given by
x x
(x) = S( x ) - C( x ) = 5 x - - - 500
100 5
4 x
i.e. (x) = x- - 500
5 100
4 x
or ¢(x) = -
5 50
-1 -1
ow ¢(x) = 0 gives x = 40. Also ¢¢( x ) = . So ¢¢( 40) = <0
50 50
Thus, x = 40 is a point of maxima. Hence, the manufacturer can earn maximum
profit, if he sells 40 items.
4 MATHEMATICS

Miscellaneous Exercise on Chapter 6

1. sing differentials, find the approximate value of each of the following
1
1
(a) æ 1 ö 4 (b) -
5
çè ÷ø
1

log x
2. Show that the function given by f ( x ) = has maximum at x = e.
x
3. The two equal sides of an isosceles triangle with fixed base b are decreasing at
the rate of cm per second. How fast is the area decreasing when the two equal
sides are equal to the base
4. Find the equation of the normal to curve x = 4y which passes through the point
(1, ).
5. Show that the normal at any point q to the curve
x = a cosq a q sin q, y = a sinq aq cosq
is at a constant distance from the origin.
6. Find the intervals in which the function f given by
4sin x - x - x cos x
f ( x) =
+ cos x
is (i) strictly increasing (ii) strictly decreasing.
1
7. Find the intervals in which the function f given by f ( x ) = x + , x ¹ 0 is
x
(i) increasing (ii) decreasing.
x y
8. Find the maximum area of an isosceles triangle inscribed in the ellipse + =1
a b
with its vertex at one end of the ma or axis.
9. A tan with rectangular base and rectangular sides, open at the top is to be
constructed so that its depth is m and volume is m . If building of tan costs
Rs 0 per sq metres for the base and Rs 45 per square metre for sides. What is
the cost of least expensive tan
10. The sum of the perimeter of a circle and square is k, where k is some constant.
rove that the sum of their areas is least when the side of square is double the
radius of the circle.
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 4

11. A window is in the form of a rectangle surmounted by a semicircular opening.

The total perimeter of the window is 10 m. Find the dimensions of the window to
admit maximum light through the whole opening.
12. A point on the hypotenuse of a triangle is at distance a and b from the sides of
the triangle.

Show that the maximum length of the hypotenuse is (a + b ) .

13. Find the points at which the function f given by f (x) = (x )4 (x 1) has
(i) local maxima (ii) local minima
(iii) point of inflexion
14. Find the absolute maximum and minimum values of the function f given by
f (x) = cos x sin x, x Î 0, p
15. Show that the altitude of the right circular cone of maximum volume that can be
4r
inscribed in a sphere of radius r is .
16. et f be a function defined on a, b such that f ¢(x) 0, for all x Î (a, b). Then
prove that f is an increasing function on (a, b).
17. Show that the height of the cylinder of maximum volume that can be inscribed in
R
a sphere of radius R is . Also find the maximum volume.

18. Show that height of the cylinder of greatest volume which can be inscribed in a
right circular cone of height h and semi vertical angle a is one third that of the
4
cone and the greatest volume of cylinder is ph tan a .

Choose the correct answer in the Exercises from 19 to 4.

19. A cylindrical tan of radius 10 m is being filled with wheat at the rate of 14
cubic metre per hour. Then the depth of the wheat is increasing at the rate of
(A) 1 m h ( ) 0.1 m h
(C) 1.1 m h ( ) 0.5 m h
20. The slope of the tangent to the curve x = t t ,y= t t 5 at the point
( , 1) is
-
(A) ( ) (C) ( )
44 MATHEMATICS

21. The line y = mx 1 is a tangent to the curve y = 4x if the value of m is

1
(A) 1 ( ) (C) ( )
22. The normal at the point (1,1) on the curve y x = is
(A) x y = 0 ( ) x y=0
(C) x y 1 = 0 ( ) x y=1
23. The normal to the curve x = 4y passing (1, ) is
(A) x y = ( ) x y=
(C) x y = 1 ( ) x y=1
24. The points on the curve 9y = x , where the normal to the curve ma es equal
intercepts with the axes are
æ ö æ - ö
(A) ç 4, ± ÷ ( ) çè 4, ÷ø
è ø

æ ö æ ö
(C) ç 4, ± ÷ ( ) ç ± 4, ÷
è ø è ø

Summary
® If a quantity y varies with another quantity x, satisfying some rule y = f ( x ) ,
dy
then (or f ¢ ( x) ) represents the rate of change of y with respect to x and
dx
dy ù
dx úû x = x0 (or f ¢(x0 ) ) represents the rate of change of y with respect to x at

x = x0 .
® If two variables x and y are varying with respect to another variable t, i.e., if
x = f (t ) and y = g (t ) , then by Chain Rule
dy dy dx dx
= , if ¹0.
dx dt dt dt
® A function f is said to be
(a) increasing on an interval (a, b) if
x1 x in (a, b) Þ f (x1) £ f (x ) for all x1, x Î (a, b).
 A ICATI F ERI ATI ES 45

Alternatively, if f ¢(x) ³ 0 for each x in (a, b)

(b) decreasing on (a,b) if
x1 x in (a, b) Þ f (x1) ³ f (x ) for all x1, x Î (a, b).
Alternatively, if f ¢(x) £ 0 for each x in (a, b)
® The equation of the tangent at (x0, y0) to the curve y = f (x) is given by

dy ù
y - y0 = ( x - x0 )
dx úû ( x0 , y0 )

dy
® If
dx
does not exist at the point ( x0 , y0 ) , then the tangent at this point is
parallel to the y axis and its equation is x = x0.
dy ù
® If tangent to a curve y = f (x) at x = x0 is parallel to x axis, then =0.
dx úû x = x0

® Equation of the normal to the curve y = f (x) at a point ( x0 , y0 ) is given by

-1
y - y0 = ( x - x0 )
dy ù
dx úû ( x0 , y0 )

dy
® If
dx
at the point ( x0 , y0 ) is ero, then equation of the normal is x = x0.

dy
® If
dx
at the point ( x0 , y0 ) does not exist, then the normal is parallel to x axis
and its equation is y = y0.
® et y = f (x), Dx be a small increment in x and Dy be the increment in y
corresponding to the increment in x, i.e., Dy = f (x Dx) f (x). Then dy
given by
æ dy ö
dy = f ¢ ( x) dx or dy = ç ÷ Dx .
è dx ø
is a good approximation of Dy when dx = Dx is relatively small and we denote
it by dy » Dy.
® A point c in the domain of a function f at which either f ¢(c) = 0 or f is not
differentiable is called a critical point of f.
4 MATHEMATICS

® First Derivative Test et f be a function defined on an open interval I. et

f be continuous at a critical point c in I. Then
(i) If f ¢(x) changes sign from positive to negative as x increases through c,
i.e., if f ¢(x) 0 at every point sufficiently close to and to the left of c,
and f ¢(x) 0 at every point sufficiently close to and to the right of c,
then c is a point of local maxima.
(ii) If f ¢(x) changes sign from negative to positive as x increases through c,
i.e., if f ¢(x) 0 at every point sufficiently close to and to the left of c,
and f ¢(x) 0 at every point sufficiently close to and to the right of c,
then c is a point of local minima.
(iii) If f ¢(x) does not change sign as x increases through c, then c is neither
a point of local maxima nor a point of local minima. Infact, such a point
is called point of inflexion.
® Second Derivative Test et f be a function defined on an interval I and
c Î I. et f be twice differentiable at c. Then
(i) x = c is a point of local maxima if f ¢(c) = 0 and f ²(c) 0
The values f (c) is local maximum value of f .
(ii) x = c is a point of local minima if f ¢(c) = 0 and f ²(c) 0
In this case, f (c) is local minimum value of f .
(iii) The test fails if f ¢(c) = 0 and f ²(c) = 0.
In this case, we go bac to the first derivative test and find whether c is
a point of maxima, minima or a point of inflexion.
® Wor ing rule for finding absolute maxima and or absolute minima
Step 1: Find all critical points of f in the interval, i.e., find points x where
either f ¢(x) = 0 or f is not differentiable.
Step 2:Ta e the end points of the interval.
Step 3: At all these points (listed in Step 1 and ), calculate the values of f .
Step 4: Identify the maximum and minimum values of f out of the values
calculated in Step . This maximum value will be the absolute maximum
value of f and the minimum value will be the absolute minimum value of f .

—v—